3.《阿摩昼经》注释显示巴利原文
3. Ambaṭṭhasuttavaṇṇanā
长途行进注释显示巴利原文
Addhānagamanavaṇṇanā
254 254. 如此注释了《沙门果经》后,现在注释《阿摩昼经》。为显示注释次第的成就,并阐明结集时紧接《沙门果经》之后的经典即是《阿摩昼经》,故说:“如是我闻……于拘萨罗国……《阿摩昼经》”。在此类情形中,“iti”一词为起始义;而表示词义倒置的“iti”则略而未提,或可视为省略了“ādi”一词,或是举例说明。所谓“前所未有之词的注释”,是指对因前文未提及而显得新颖的词语进行释义。因为曾说过:“舍弃一再重复之义,我将阐明义理”(《长部注》卷首语)。有些地方读作“anupubbapadavaṇṇanā”,但那是不正确的,因为《复注》未曾引用,也未如此注释。显示巴利原文
254. Evaṃ sāmaññaphalasuttaṃ saṃvaṇṇetvā idāni ambaṭṭhasuttaṃ saṃvaṇṇento yathānupubbaṃ saṃvaṇṇokāsassa pattabhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ, sāmaññaphalasuttassānantaraṃ saṅgītassa suttassa ambaṭṭhasuttabhāvaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ…pe… kosalesūti ambaṭṭhasutta’’nti āha. Evamīdisesu. Itisaddo cettha ādiattho, padatthavipallāsajotako pana itisaddo luttaniddiṭṭho, ādisaddalopo vā esa, upalakkhaṇaniddeso vā. Apubbapadavaṇṇanā nāma heṭṭhā aggahitatāya apubbassa padassa atthavibhajanā. ‘‘Hitvā punappunāgata-matthaṃ atthaṃ pakāsayissāmī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā) hi vuttaṃ, ‘‘anupubbapadavaṇṇanā’’ti katthaci pāṭho, so ayuttova ṭīkāya anuddhaṭattā, tathā asaṃvaṇṇitattā ca.
“王子们因种姓而得名拘萨罗人”,此为论师所说。文字学家们则说:“他们收纳‘藏’(kosaṃ lanti),或者询问‘善’(kusalaṃ),因此名为拘萨罗人”。“Janapadino”意为拥有国土者,或国土的统治者。虽然仅说“名为拘萨罗的王子们”已经足够,但言及“janapadino”是为了表明:即使当地还居住着其他以各自之名著称的人们,而正是因为以他们的住处为据,这个国土才得此名。以“他们的住处”表明派生词义:“拘萨罗人的住处即拘萨罗”。“即使是一个国土”此处意在表明,从语法上看这是复数形式,但从意义上则是一个。这里的“api”一词表示认可,由此而认可是这样:即使这确实是一个国土,出于这种原因,复数形式也是成立的。若是一个国土,为何用复数?答曰:“以惯用语故”等,意为因为是惯用语,所以复数成立。把用于依处的复数形式,或说复数性,安立到依处之上,这就是惯用语。因此,论师在此处以及在《中部复注》等他处中说:“文字学家们于此类情形中,视这种性、数如同合理,这便是此处的惯用语,例如‘在俱卢国中住’、‘在鸯伽国中住’等。”有些人则想显示巴利原文
‘‘Rājakumārā gottavasena kosalā nāmā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.254) ācariyena vuttaṃ. Akkharacintakā pana vadanti ‘‘kosaṃ lanti gaṇhanti, kusalaṃ vā pucchantīti kosalā’’ti. Janapadinoti janapadavanto, janapadassa vā issarā. ‘‘Kosalā nāma rājakumārā’’ti vutteyeva siddhepi ‘‘janapadino’’ti vacanaṃ santesupi aññesu taṃtaṃnāmapaññātesu tattha nivasantesu janapadibhāvato tesameva nivasanamupādāya janapadassāyaṃ samaññāti dassanatthaṃ. ‘‘Tesaṃ nivāso’’ti iminā ‘‘kosalānaṃ nivāsā kosalā’’ti taddhitaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ekopi janapado’’ti iminā pana saddatoyevetaṃ puthuvacanaṃ, atthato panesa eko evāti vibhāveti. Api-saddo cettha anuggahe, tena kāmaṃ ekoyevesa janapado, tathāpi iminā kāraṇena puthuvacanamupapannanti anuggaṇhāti. Yadi ekova janapado, kathaṃ tattha bahuvacananti āha ‘‘ruḷhisaddenā’’tiādi, ruḷhisaddattā bahuvacanamupapannanti vuttaṃ hoti. Nissitesu payuttassa puthuvacanassa, puthubhāvassa vā nissaye abhiniropanā idha ruḷhi, tena vuttaṃ ācariyena idha ceva aññattha ca majjhimāgamaṭīkādīsu ‘‘akkharacintakā hi īdisesu ṭhānesu yutte viya īdisaliṅgavacanāni icchanti, ayamettha ruḷhi yathā ‘aññatthāpi kurūsu viharati, aṅgesu viharatī’ti cā’’ti. Keci pana kosalanāmābhiniropanamicchanti, ayuttametaṃ puthuvacanassa appayujjitabbattā. Nāmābhiniropanāya hi ekavacanampi bhavati yathā ‘‘sīho gāyatī’’ti. Tabbisesitepi janapadasadde jātisaddattā ekavacanameva. Tenāha ‘‘tasmiṃ kosalesu janapade’’ti, kosalanāmake tasmiṃ janapadeti attho. Abhūtato hi vohāramattaṃ ruḷhi, bhūtatoyeva attho vinicchinitabbo. Yathā hi –
“有毗提诃之子长寿,是令国土增长者;
他们将在弥提罗统治王国,生主啊。” (见于《本生经》2.22.276)等之中——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Santi puttā videhānaṃ, dīghāvu raṭṭhavaḍḍhano; Te rajjaṃ kārayissanti, mithilāyaṃ pajāpatī’’ti. (jā. 2.22.276) ādīsu –
对于被称为“其子”的单一事物,依惯用语而用复数“puttā”;同样,在此对于被称为“其住处”的单一事物,也是依惯用语而用复数“kosalesu”。又如“不应杀生,不应取未与之物”等(《增支部》8.42, 43, 45)中,依类别而对多物用了单数;同样,在此也是依类别、依部分区分而对多物用了单数“janapade”。论师在《中部复注》中亦云:“即使是在修饰它的‘国土’一词上,因为是表示类别的词,所以也用单数。因此说‘在那个鸯伽国土中’。”显示巴利原文
Taṃputtasaṅkhātassa ekatthassa ruḷhivasena ‘‘puttā’’ti bahuvacanapayogo, tathā idhāpi tannivāsasaṅkhātassa ekatthassa ruḷhivasena ‘‘kosalesū’’ti bahuvacanapayogo hoti. Yathā ca ‘‘pāṇaṃ na haññe, na ca’dinnamādiye’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.42, 43, 45) jātivasena bahvatthānamekavacanapayogo, tathā idhāpi jātivasena avayavappabhedena bahvatthassa ‘‘janapade’’ti ekavacanapayogo hoti. Vuttañca ācariyena majjhimāgamaṭīkāyaṃ ‘‘tabbisesanepi janapadasadde jātisadde ekavacanameva. Tenāha ‘tasmiṃ aṅgesu janapade’ti’’.
如此,依惯用语显示了在可说为多时用了复数之后,现在为了显示依多义在可说为多时也用复数,而说“然而古昔说”等。此处的“pana”一词是差别之义的彰显,它表明:此处用复数是因为涉及多义,而非依惯用语,此即下面将要阐述的差别。因为那个地区方圆三百由旬,有多部分,但在此理趣中,应知是指“在那些拘萨罗国土中”之意。Mahāpanāda:指在《大波那陀本生经》(《本生经》1.3.40, 41, 42)、《须卢吉本生经》(《本生经》1.14.102等)中出现的、名为须卢吉的毗提诃王之子、名为大波那陀的王子。Nānānāṭakāni:以跋努、甘陀、潘杜、甘陀等为首的六十万种各类戏剧。有些地方也见到“ādi”一词,但在《本生经注》中未见;如果见到,则应知它包含了跳跃戏等。Sitamattampi:即使只是微笑。据说因为他曾在无间地狱中见过天界戏剧,所以人间戏剧的舞蹈对他而言并不悦意。Naṅgalānipi chaḍḍetvā:因放弃耕作而舍弃了犁,这只是举例。并非只有农夫,而是两国其他居民也都放下各自的工作,聚集在那吉祥之处。据说那时显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ruḷhivasena bahumhi viya vattabbe bahuvacanaṃ dassetvā idāni bahvatthavasena bahumpi eva vattabbe bahuvacanaṃ dassento ‘‘porāṇā panāhū’’tiādimāha. Pana-saddo cettha visesatthajotano, tena puthuatthavisayatāya evetaṃ puthuvacanaṃ, na ruḷhivasenāti vakkhamānaṃ visesaṃ joteti. So hi padeso tiyojanasataparimāṇatāya bahuppabhedoti, imasmiṃ pana naye tesu kosalesu janapadesūti attho veditabbo. Mahāpanādanti mahāpanādajātaka (jā. 1.3.40, 41, 42) surucijātakesu (jā. 1.14.102 ādayo) āgataṃ surucino nāma videharañño puttaṃ mahāpanādanāmakaṃ rājakumāraṃ. Nānānāṭakānīti bhaṇḍukaṇḍapaṇḍukaṇḍapamukhāni chasatasahassāni nānāvidhanāṭakāni, katthaci pana ādisaddopi diṭṭho, so jātakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ na dissati, yadi ca dissati, tena naṭalaṅghakādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Sitamattampīti mihitamattampi. Tassa kira dibbanāṭakānaṃ anantarabhaveyeva diṭṭhattā manussanāṭakānaṃ naccaṃ amanuññaṃ ahosi. Naṅgalānipi chaḍḍetvāti kasikammappahānavasena naṅgalāni pahāya, nidassanamattañcetaṃ. Na hi kevalaṃ kassakā eva, atha kho aññepi ubhayaraṭṭhavāsino manussā attano attano kiccaṃ pahāya tasmiṃ maṅgalaṭṭhāne sannipatiṃsu. Tadā kira mahāpanādakumārassa pāsādamaṅgalaṃ, chattamaṅgalaṃ, āvāhamaṅgalanti tīṇi maṅgalāni ekato akaṃsu, kāsivideharaṭṭhavāsinopi tattha sannipatitvā atirekasattavassāni chaṇamanubhaviṃsūti, adhunā pana ‘‘naṅgalādīnī’’ti pāṭho dissati, so na porāṇapāṭho ṭīkāyamanuddhaṭattā.
当大众聚集时:有些人说“我们要展示种种取乐方法,让王子发起笑来”,也有些人说“我们要看那场表演”,就这样大众成群聚集。在展示了攀爬藤蔓、进入木制火葬堆等各种表演之后。据说,帝释天王派遣的天伎艺人在王宫广场上空站立,展示名为“半身”的表演:仅以一手、一脚、一眼、一牙在跳舞移动,半身颤动,其余部分保持不动。看到这个,大帕那陀微微笑了一下。正是针对这个意思,才说“他展示了天伎艺人的表演,让他发起笑来”。所谓“好友”,是指可信赖的人,因为“他们的心是善良的”。以“等”字包含了亲戚、随从等人。因此,即由于那样的说法。关于“依那句‘善巧’的话”这句:在这里,由于“您善巧吗?是的,善巧”这样的问答方式而流行的善巧之说,那些人最初便获得了“善巧”的名称。这些善巧者的主人——王子们,便被称为“拘萨罗”,而由于是他们居住的地方,那个地区便依前文所述的方式被称为“拘萨罗”。因此说“那个地区被称为拘萨罗”。在《中部经集注》中,论师正是这样说的。在此,其意趣可能是:说“那个地区被称为拘萨罗”时,由于“想”与“名想”显示巴利原文
Mahājanakāye sannipatiteti keci ‘‘pahaṃsanavidhiṃ dassetvā rājakumāraṃ hāsāpessāmā’’ti, keci ‘‘taṃ kīḷanaṃ passissāmā’’ti evaṃ mahājanasamūhe sannipatite. Atulambābhiruhanadārucitakapavesanādi nānākīḷāyo dassetvā. Sakkapesito kira dibbanāṭako rājaṅgaṇe ākāse ṭhatvā upaḍḍhabhāgaṃ nāma dasseti, ekova hattho, eko pādo, ekaṃ akkhi, ekā dāṭhā naccati calati, upaḍḍhaṃ phandati, sesaṃ niccalamahosi, taṃ disvā mahāpanādo thokaṃ hasitamakāsi, imamatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘so dibbanāṭakaṃ dassetvā hasāpesī’’ti vuttaṃ. Suhajjā nāma vissāsikā ‘‘suṭṭhu hadayametesa’’nti katvā. Ādisaddena ñātakaparijanādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Tasmāti tathā vacanato. Taṃ kusalanti vacanaṃ upādāyāti ettha ‘‘kacci kusalaṃ? Āma kusala’’nti vacanapaṭivacanavasena pavattakusalavāditāya te manussā ādito ‘‘kusalā’’ti samaññaṃ labhiṃsu, tesaṃ kusalānaṃ issarāti rājakumārā kosalā nāma jātā, tesaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānatāya pana padeso kosalāti pubbe vuttanayameva. Tenāha ‘‘so padeso kosalāti vuccatī’’ti. Evaṃ majjhimāgamaṭīkāyaṃ ācariyeneva vuttaṃ. Tatrāyamadhippāyo siyā – ‘‘so padeso kosalāti vuccatī’’ti saññīsaññā yathākkamaṃ ekavacanabahuvacanavasena vuttattā purimanaye viya idhāpi ruḷhivaseneva bahuvacanaṃ hoti. Rājakumārānaṃ nāmalābhahetumattañhettha visesoti. Idha pana ācariyena evaṃ vuttaṃ so padesoti padesasāmaññato vuttaṃ, vacanavipallāsena vā, te padesāti attho. Kosalāti vuccati kusalā eva kosalāti katvā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.254) tatrāyamadhippāyo siyā – so padesoti jātisaddavasena, vacanavipallāsena vā vuttattā puthuatthavisayatāya eva bahuvacanaṃ hoti. Padesassa nāmalābhahetu hettha visesoti. ‘‘Kusala’’nti hi vacanamupādāya ruḷhināmavasena vuttanayena kosalā yathā ‘‘yevāpanakaṃ, natumhākavaggo’’ti. Apica vacanapaṭivacanavasena ‘‘kusala’’nti vadanti etthāti kosalā. Vicitrā hi taddhitavuttīti. Kusalanti ca ārogyaṃ ‘‘kacci nu bhoto kusalaṃ, kacci bhoto anāmaya’’ntiādīsu (jā. 1.15.145; jā. 2.20.129) viya, kacci tumhākaṃ ārogyaṃ hotīti attho, chekaṃ vā ‘‘kusalā naccagītassa , sikkhitā cāturitthiyo’’tiādīsu (jā. 2.22.94) viya, kacci tesaṃ nāṭakānaṃ chekatā hotīti attho.
“Caraṇaṃ”指游行,“caraṇaṃ”或“cāro”也为游行,此即“cārikā”(游行)本身。此处所指的是道路上的行走,为了说明并非仅仅是碎步行走,故称“长途旅行”。这是一个抽象中性名词,意为“正在从事可称为长途旅行的游行”。或者,以不分别的方式用分别的表述来说,如“他坐着度过白天的时光”(中部 1.256)之例,意思也是“正在从事可称为长途旅行的游行,正在作行走的动作”。因为“kar”与“bhū”等词根的意义是普遍通用的。有些地方读作“addhānamagga”(长途道路),那种读法并不恰当,因为“cārikā”一词并非对道路的称谓。现在,通过分类展示后,为确定此处所指,才接着说“所谓的游行”等。由于弟子们依惯例也有游行,为加以区别,才用了“世尊的”一词。正如中部经集注所说:“‘正在游行’:这里,虽然这种游行确实只有诸佛为了摄受大众才能获得,但依于佛陀,以惯用的词语,也用于弟子们,如同用芦苇等做的扇子也称为‘tālavaṇṭa’一样。”“在远处也”中,以“pi”字或“api”字,包含了“也”字。显示巴利原文
Caraṇaṃ cārikā, caraṇaṃ vā cāro, so eva cārikā, tayidaṃ maggagamanameva idhādhippetaṃ, na cuṇṇikagamanamattanti dassetuṃ ‘‘addhānagamana’’nti vuttaṃ, bhāvanapuṃsakañcetaṃ, addhānagamanasaṅkhātāya cārikāya caramānoti vuttaṃ hoti, abhedepi vā bhedavohārena vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘divāvihāraṃ nisīdī’’ti, (ma. ni. 1.256) addhānagamanasaṅkhātaṃ cārikaṃ caramāno, caraṇaṃ karontoti attho. Sabbatthako hi karabhūdhātūnamatthoti. ‘‘Addhānamagga’’ntipi katthaci pāṭho, so na sundaro. Na hi cārikāsaddo maggavācakoti. Idāni taṃ vibhāgena dassetvā idhādhippetaṃ niyamento ‘‘cārikā ca nāmesā’’tiādimāha. Sāvakānampi ruḷhivasena cārikāya sambhavato tato viseseti ‘‘bhagavato’’ti iminā. Tathā hi majjhimāgamaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘cārikaṃ caramānoti ettha kiñcāpi ayaṃ cārikā nāma mahājanasaṅgahatthaṃ buddhānaṃyeva labbhati, buddhe upādāya pana ruḷhisaddena sāvakānampi vuccati kilañjādīhi katabījanīpi tālavaṇṭaṃ viyā’’ti. Dūrepīti ettha pi-saddena, api-saddena vā nātidūrepīti sampiṇḍanaṃ tatthāpi cārikāsambhavato. Bodhaneyyapuggalanti catusaccapaṭivedhavasena bodhanārahapuggalaṃ. Sahasā gamananti sīghagamanaṃ. ‘‘Mahākassapassa paccuggamanādīsū’’ti vuttameva sarūpato dasseti ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādinā. Paccuggacchantoti paṭimukhaṃ gacchanto, paccuṭṭhahantoti attho. ‘‘Tathā’’ti iminā ‘‘tiṃsayojana’’nti padamanukaḍḍhati. Pakkusāti nāma gandhārarājā. Mahākappino nāma kukkuṭavatīrājā. Dhaniyo nāma koraṇḍaseṭṭhiputto gopo.
如此,以宣说敬法的端首,略示迎接大迦叶等事(相应部注 2.154)之后,如今为了通过详述住林者提萨沙弥的故事来显示游行,便开始了“有一天”等的讲述。然而,这位提萨沙弥是谁呢?他出生于舍卫城法将(舍利弗)的护持者家庭,福德广大,先前曾得名“施食者提萨”、“施毯者提萨”,后来以“住林者提萨”闻名,是一位漏尽的沙弥。详尽的因缘见于《法句经注》(法句经注 1.74 住林者提萨沙弥故事)。世尊想要与那些能行于空中的人一起从空中前往,便说:“通知六神通者。”他——也就是提萨沙弥——见到世尊与比丘僧团一起披着衣……他既不是长老,也不是平庸之辈——这是连接,意思是:在德行上,他不是低劣、微不足道的人。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ dhammagarutākittanamukhena mahākassapapaccuggamanādīni (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.154) ekadesena dassetvā idāni vanavāsitissasāmaṇerassa vatthuṃ vitthāretvā cārikaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ekadivasa’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Ko panesa tissasāmaṇero nāma? Sāvatthiyaṃ dhammasenāpatino upaṭṭhākakule jāto mahāpuñño ‘‘piṇḍapātadāyakatisso, kambaladāyakatisso’’ti ca pubbe laddhanāmo pacchā ‘‘vanavāsitisso’’ti pākaṭo khīṇāsavasāmaṇero. Vitthāro dhammapade (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.74 vanavāsītissasāmaṇeravatthu). Ākāsagāmīhi saddhiṃ ākāseneva gantukāmo bhagavā ‘‘chaḷabhiññānaṃ ārocehī’’ti avoca. Tassāti tissasāmaṇerassa. Tanti bhagavantaṃ saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghena cīvaraṃ pārupantaṃ. No thero no oramattako vatāti sambandho, guṇena lāmakappamāṇiko no hotīti attho.
“在自己的座位”是指于比丘们座位的末端。为那些村民说完与布施相应的吉祥语之后。为何世尊虽然是包含天界在内的世间之道的教导者,却如此说呢?为了澄清这一质疑,才说了“据说世尊”等语。“道的教导者”是指涅槃之道的教导者,或善趣之道的教导者。显示巴利原文
Attanopattāsaneti bhikkhūnaṃ āsanapariyante. Tesaṃ gāmikānaṃ dānapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ maṅgalaṃ vatvā. Kasmā pana sadevakassa lokassa maggadesakopi samāno bhagavā evamāhāti codanaṃ sodhetuṃ ‘‘bhagavā kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Maggadesakoti nibbānamaggassa, sugatimaggassa vā desako.
“Tāyā”指的是阿兰若想。即使依僧团羯磨而成立,具足戒也因依大师的命令而成立,因此有说“我将授予你佛之遗产”这句话是依大师的命令而说。另一些人则说:“大师在允许那位未满二十岁者具足戒时,说了‘我将授予你佛之遗产’。”在注释书中记载,由法将(舍利弗)担任戒师为其授具足戒后,他便成为法将的共住弟子。然而,在《法句经注释》中,依小诵师的说法,叙述了法将等大长老及其四万比丘眷属各自与随众分别而行,世尊则独自而行;而在此处以及《中部义注》中,应知依长诵师和中诵师的说法,其行法有所不同。“Ayaṃ”指的是为了大迦叶等而作的游行。至于世尊不带领他人而行的这种方式,则称为“不匆忙的游行”,这是句子的连接。显示巴利原文
Tāyāti araññasaññāya. Saṅghakammavasena sijjhamānāpi upasampadā satthu āṇāvasena sijjhanato ‘‘buddhadāyajjaṃ te dassāmī’’ti vuttanti vadanti. Apare pana ‘‘aparipuṇṇavīsativassasseva tassa upasampadaṃ anujānanto satthā ‘buddhadāyajjaṃ te dassāmī’ti avocā’’ti vadanti. Dhammasenāpatinā upajjhāyena upasampādetvā, tatoyevesa dhammasenāpatino saddhivihārikoti aṭṭhakathāsu vutto. Dhammapadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana dhammasenāpatiāditherānaṃ cattālīsabhikkhusahassaparivārānaṃ attano attano parivārehi saddhiṃ paccekaṃ gamanaṃ, bhagavato ca ekakasseva gamanaṃ khuddakabhāṇakānaṃ matena vuttaṃ, idha, pana majjhimāgamaṭṭhakathāyañca (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.65) aññathā gamanaṃ dīghabhāṇakamajjhimabhāṇakānaṃ matenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ayanti mahākassapādīnamatthāya cārikā. Yaṃ pana anuggaṇhantassa bhagavato gamanaṃ, ayaṃ aturitacārikā nāmāti sambandho.
而“此游行”则是指不匆忙的游行。“大区域”是指较大的区域,这是因为它依据属于中部地区的外围标准来划分。“中区域”是指在其他两者之间运转的区域。“内区域”是指比其他两者小的区域,或因包含于其他两者之内而称为最后的区域,即最内部的区域。为问“这些区域的量度如何?”而说“在哪里”等。其中,九由旬的量度应仅依属于中部地区来理解,因为此后便不再作不匆忙的游行。此后如来只作匆忙的游行,不作不匆忙的游行。游行前必先举行自恣,这是诸佛的常行,故说“在大自恣中自恣后”等。“在初日”是指在第一个迦提月满月后的初日。“周围”是指所到之处的四方周围。由于大众聚集,先到的人能得到邀请。为了显示如此聚集,故说“在其他地方”等。止观尚嫩:此处,“止的嫩”是指近行定,“观的嫩”则是指四种智——名色分别智、度疑清净智、思惟智、道非道智。所谓“嫩观”即是这四种智的别名。“给予自恣摄受”是指以给予许可的方式摄受。“在迦提月满月”是指在最后的迦提月满月。“在米伽西罗月的第一个初日”是依中部地区的用语,指米伽西罗月的第一个初日;依现今的用语,应知是最后一个迦提月黑半月的初日。显示巴利原文
Imaṃpana cārikanti aturitacārikaṃ. Mahāmaṇḍalanti majjhimadesapariyāpanneneva bāhirimena pamāṇena paricchinnattā mahantataraṃ maṇḍalaṃ. Majjhimamaṇḍalanti itaresaṃ ubhinnaṃ vemajjhe pavattaṃ maṇḍalaṃ. Antomaṇḍalanti itarehi khuddakaṃ maṇḍalaṃ, itaresaṃ vā antogadhattā antimaṃ maṇḍalaṃ, abbhantarimaṃ maṇḍalanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiṃ panimesaṃ pamāṇanti āha ‘‘katthā’’tiādi. Tattha navayojanasatikatā majjhimadesapariyāpannavaseneva gahetabbā tato paraṃ aturitacārikāya agamanato. Taduttari hi turitacārikāya eva tathāgato gacchati, na aturitacārikāya. Pavāretvāva cārikācaraṇaṃ buddhāciṇṇanti vuttaṃ ‘‘mahāpavāraṇāya pavāretvā’’tiādi. Pāṭipadadivaseti paṭhamakattikapuṇṇamiyā anantare pāṭipadavase. Samantāti gatagataṭṭhānassa catūsu passesu samantato. Mahājanakāyassa sannipatanato purimaṃ purimaṃ āgatā nimantetuṃ labhanti. Tathā sannipatanameva dassetuṃ ‘‘itaresū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samathavipassanā taruṇā hontīti ettha samathassa taruṇabhāvo upacārasamādhivasena, vipassanāya pana saṅkhāraparicchedañāṇaṃ, kaṅkhāvitaraṇañāṇaṃ, sammasanañāṇaṃ, maggāmaggañāṇanti catunnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ vasena veditabbo. Taruṇavipassanāti hi tesaṃ catunnaṃ ñāṇānamadhivacanaṃ. Pavāraṇāsaṅgahaṃ datvāti anumatidānavasena datvā. Kattikapuṇṇamāyanti pacchimakattikapuṇṇamiyaṃ. ‘‘Migasirassa paṭhamapāṭipadadivase’’ti idaṃ majjhimadesavohāravasena migasiramāsassa paṭhamaṃ pāṭipadadivasaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, etarahi pavattavohāravasena pana pacchimakattikamāsassa kāḷapakkhapāṭipadadivaso veditabbo.
“也因其他理由”是指除了比丘们止观尚嫩之外,还有其他的理由,例如在中区域应度化众生的智成熟等。“四个月”是指从阿沙荼月满月的初日起,直到最后的迦提月满月为止,共计四个月。“周围百由旬”等如前所述。“Vassa”指雨安居,即安居的行为;“Vutthavassa”指已住过雨安居的人,即他的雨安居已经住过。因为应由如来调伏,所以说“世尊的应度化众生”,此处的属格具有作格的含义,或也可视为作者格。而“应度化众生”是指应依其性行而调伏的众生。“等待根器成熟”是指等待信等根以解脱成熟的状态而成熟。出发时间是在普沙月、摩伽月、颇勒具那月、质多月这四个月中的某一天,所以这里并未限定月份。因此说“在那里住一个月、两个月或四个月”。“在那里”是指在入雨安居的地方。“七个月”等应与“一个月”等依次衔接:若在那里再住一个月,则七个月完成游行;若住两个月,则六个月完成;若住三个月,则五个月完成;若在那里住四个月,则四个月完成游行。为了消除“为何会有游行归来”的疑虑,故说“如此”等。那些极为衰老、极度羸弱的人,他们何时能见?他们是不能见的。正是为了悲悯世间——显示巴利原文
Aññenapi kāraṇenāti bhikkhūnaṃ samathavipassanātaruṇabhāvato aññenapi majjhimamaṇḍale veneyyānaṃ ñāṇaparipākādikāraṇena. Catumāsanti āsaḷhīpuṇṇamiyā pāṭipadato yāva pacchimakattikapuṇṇamī, tāva catumāsaṃ. ‘‘Samantā yojanasata’’ntiādinā vuttanayeneva. Vasanaṃ vassaṃ, vasanakiriyā, vutthaṃ vasitaṃ vassamassāti vutthavasso, tassa. Tathāgatena vinetabbattā ‘‘bhagavato veneyyasattā’’ti sāminiddeso vutto, kattuniddeso vā esa. Veneyyasattāti ca caritānurūpaṃ vinetabbasattā. Indriyaparipākaṃ āgamayamānoti saddhādiindriyānaṃ vimuttiparipācanabhāvena paripakkaṃ paṭimānento. Phussamāghaphagguṇacittamāsānaṃ aññataramāsassa paṭhamadivase nikkhamanato māsaniyamo ettha na katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ekamāsaṃ vā dviticatumāsaṃ vā tattheva vasitvā’’ti. Tatthevāti vassūpagamanaṭṭhāne eva. ‘‘Sattahi vā’’tiādi ‘‘ekamāsaṃ vā’’tiādinā yathākkamaṃ yojetabbaṃ – yadi aparampi ekamāsaṃ tattheva vasati, sattahi māsehi cārikaṃ pariyosāpeti. Yadi dvimāsaṃ chahi, yadi timāsaṃ pañcahi, yadi catumāsaṃ tattheva vasati, catūhi māsehi cārikaṃ pariyosāpetīti. Kasmā pana cārikāgamananti āsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ ‘‘itī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atirekaṃ jarādubbalo bāḷhajiṇṇo. Te kadā passissanti, na passissanti eva. Lokānukampakāyāti lokānukampakāya eva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘na cīvarādihetū’’ti.
“依步行威仪”,指以双足行走的方式,或是行走后在处处各住几日的威仪。因为“威仪”一词通于一切威仪。“为了身体安乐”,指长住一处而导致体内界增盛的身体,通过行走而得安适。“为了期待事缘”,指期待如《火聚喻经》、《摩伽提婆本生》等说法所需的事缘,或是期待事缘的来临,即于事缘发生时说法。“为了制立学处”,指为制立学处,如制定饮酒学处等。“为了觉悟”,指为了觉悟应被觉悟的众生,如指鬘等,令其觉悟四谛。“以广大”,指以广大的悲悯。专为某一人或少数人所作的游行为固定游方;不同的,为众多人,随村落、城镇、都市的次第而作的游行为不固定游方。由此故说“于该处”等。“Yaṃ carati”是对行履的指称。显示巴利原文
Jaṅghavihāravasenāti jaṅghāhi vicaraṇavasena, jaṅghāhi vicaritvā tattha tattha katipāhaṃ nivasanavasena vā. Sabbiriyāpathasādhāraṇañhi vihāravacanaṃ. Sarīraphāsukatthāyāti ekasmiṃyeva ṭhāne nibaddhavāsavasena ussannadhātukassa sarīrassa vicaraṇena phāsubhāvatthāya. Aṭṭhuppattikālābhikaṅkhanatthāyāti aggikkhandhopamasutta (a. ni. 7.72) maghadevajātakādi (jā. 1.1.9) desanānaṃ viya dhammadesanāya abhikaṅkhitabbaaṭṭhuppattikālatthāya, aṭṭhuppattikālassa vā abhikaṅkhanatthāya, aṭṭhuppattikāle dhammadesanatthāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sikkhāpadapaññāpanatthāyāti surāpānasikkhāpadādi (pāci. 327, 328, 329) paññāpane viya sikkhāpadānaṃ paññāpanatthāya. Bodhanatthāyāti aṅgulimālādayo (ma. ni. 2.347) viya bodhaneyyasatte catusaccabodhanatthāya. Mahatāti mahatiyā. Kañci, katipaye vā puggale uddissa cārikā nibaddhacārikā. Tadaññā sambahule uddissa gāmanigamanagarapaṭipāṭiyā cārikā anibaddhacārikā. Tenāha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Yaṃ caratīti kiriyāparāmasanaṃ.
为详细显示“此即是这里所指”,而说“那时”等。“一万世界界”,是就作为生起田的十千轮围而说。为什么?因为堪能众生即于该处生起。世尊为了在那里令佛智现前,安立于堪能、根熟众生所见之处而展开智网,故作此说。这是就诸天与梵天而说。人类则是于此轮围、此伴随眷属的赡部洲中,成为应被觉悟者。“应觉悟的亲属”,指应被觉悟众生中世尊的亲属。因为借着种姓等的关联,以及谛现观的关联,应化众生才称为世尊的亲属。以进入其行境,故说已入一切智智网。据说世尊入大悲定,起定后,以心决意:“愿堪能、智已成熟的众生,现于我智之前”,而作摄受。由于这一摄受,一位、两位或多位应化众生便随顺法,现于智的视野中。这正是佛于此处的威力。对于那些这样现于视野者,佛观察他们的近依、前远因以及现在的修行。因为摄受是为了把握应化众生。在作摄受时,他们首先以应化的状态现起;然后欲知“将会如何”,便以皈依等审察某种果证,而观察其近依、远因等。因此说“尔时世尊”等。“声”,即阿摩昼。在辩论中,以“阿摩昼,你如何如何”等,我所说之言;以“拘利……显示巴利原文
‘‘Esā idha adhippetā’’ti vuttameva vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘tadā kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dasasahassilokadhātuyāti jātikkhettabhūtaṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kasmāti ce? Tattheva bhabbasattānaṃ sambhavato. Tattha hi satte bhabbe paripakkindriye passituṃ buddhañāṇaṃ abhinīharitvā ṭhito bhagavā ñāṇajālaṃ pattharatīti vuccati, idañca devabrahmānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Manussā pana imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe, imasmiṃyeva ca saparivāre jambudīpe bodhaneyyā honti. Bodhaneyyabandhaveti bodhaneyyasattasaṅkhāte bhagavato bandhave. Gottādisambandhā viya hi saccapaṭivedhasambandhā veneyyā bhagavato bandhavā nāmāti. Gocarabhāvūpagamanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sabbaññutaññāṇajālassa anto paviṭṭho’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhagavā kira mahākaruṇāsamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā tato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘ye sattā bhabbā paripakkañāṇā, te mayhaṃ ñāṇassa upaṭṭhahantū’’ti cittaṃ adhiṭṭhāya samannāharati, tassa sahasamannāhārā eko vā dve vā sambahulā vā tadā vinayūpagā veneyyā ñāṇassa āpāthamāgacchanti, ayamettha buddhānubhāvo. Evamāpāthagatānaṃ pana nesaṃ upanissayaṃ pubbacariyaṃ, pubbahetuṃ, sampati vattamānañca paṭipattiṃ oloketi. Veneyyasattapariggaṇhanatthañhi samannāhāre kate paṭhamaṃ nesaṃ veneyyabhāvena upaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, atha ‘‘kiṃ nu kho bhavissatī’’ti saraṇagamanādivasena kañci nipphattiṃ vīmaṃsamāno pubbūpanissayādīni oloketi. Tenāha ‘‘atha bhagavā’’tiādi. Soti ambaṭṭho. Vādapaṭivādaṃ katvāti ‘‘evaṃ nu te ambaṭṭhā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.262) mayā vuttavacanassa ‘‘ye ca kho te bho gotama muṇḍakā samaṇakā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.263) paṭivacanaṃ datvā, asabbhivākyanti asappurisavācaṃ, tikkhattuṃ ibbhavādanipātanavasena nānappakāraṃ sādhusabhāvāya vācāya vattumayuttaṃ vākyaṃ vakkhatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Nibbisevananti vigatatudanaṃ, mānadappavasena apagataparinipphandananti attho.
应进入者,即当赴。此村唯是名字,于此有何义之寻求?故说“亦有读作Ijjhanaṅgala”。“由某方隅”者,显示依处指示相顺,于作具义是应用词,以此“由彼方隅进入”而明。“于某处”者,依地处指示相顺,而说“入彼处”。此两者皆由“由某方隅”等开显其义。去者,即已赴,已行之义。又去者,即到达,已达成之义。“Icchānaṅgale”者,此是当时世尊行境村落之显示,此地处是近依义。“Icchānaṅgala树林”者,此是居住地之显示,无差别说此地处是依止处,开显此二词特胜义,故说“依止Icchānaṅgala”等。如“戒蕴品”等所说之理,唯以顾念应化众生之利益,显示世尊之住处。其中,法主世尊之修行,一切皆唯是制伏非法,彼即依戒定慧,故唯是执取戒等三者。戒蕴关者,结合如转轮王木等所作关隘般之戒蕴关而住。木聚等从周围于此防护、围护,故将a作长音为khandhāvāra(关),是诸王不久住之处。然世尊由不久住之作用,于怖畏防护之义,有相似性故,戒亦如是被称为。定顶者,即名为正定之妙吉祥剑。一切智智处者,即名为一切智智之胜利处。随转者,即随念。亦有读作“一切智智箭”,义为一切智智金刚箭屡屡随转。随好乐之住者,显示一切住处共通,义为于天住等中,随自所好乐之住处而住。显示巴利原文
Avasaritabbanti upagantabbaṃ. Tassa gāmassa idaṃ nāmamattaṃ, kimettha atthapariyesanāyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘ijjhānaṅgalantipi pāṭho’’ti. ‘‘Yena disābhāgenā’’ti karaṇaniddesānurūpaṃ karaṇatthe upayogavacananti dasseti ‘‘tena avasarī’’ti iminā. ‘‘Yasmiṃ padese’’ti pana bhummaniddesānurūpaṃ ‘‘taṃ vā avasarī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tadubhayamevatthaṃ vivarati ‘‘tena disābhāgenā’’tiādinā. Gatoti upagato, agamāsīti attho. Puna gatoti sampatto, sampāpuṇīti attho. ‘‘Icchānaṅgale’’ti idaṃ tadā bhagavato gocaragāmanidassanaṃ, samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummaṃ . ‘‘Icchānaṅgalavanasaṇḍe’’ti idaṃ pana nivāsaṭṭhānadassanaṃ, nippariyāyato adhikaraṇe cetaṃ bhummanti tadubhayampi padaṃ visesatthadassanena vivaranto ‘‘icchānaṅgalaṃ upanissāyā’’tiādimāha . ‘‘Sīlakhandhāvāra’’ntiādi vuttanayena veneyyahitasamapekkhanavaseneva bhagavato vihāradassanaṃ. Tattha dhammarājassa bhagavato sabbaso adhammaniggaṇhanaparā eva paṭipatti, sā ca sīlasamādhipaññāvasenāti sīlādittayasseva gahaṇaṃ. Sīlakhandhāvāranti cakkavattirañño dāruiṭṭhakādikataṃ khandhāvārasadisaṃ sīlasaṅkhātaṃ khandhāvāraṃ bandhitvā viharatīti sambandho. Dārukkhandhādīhi āsamantato varanti parikkhipanti etthāti hi khandhāvāro a-kārassa dīghaṃ katvā, rājūnaṃ aciranivāsaṭṭhānaṃ. Tattha pana bhagavato aciranivasanakiriyāsambandhamattena bhayanivāraṇaṭṭhena taṃsadisatāya sīlampi tathā vuccati. Samādhikontanti sammāsamādhisaṅkhātaṃ maṅgalasattiṃ. Sabbaññutaññāṇapadanti sabbaññutaññāṇasaṅkhātaṃ jayamantapadaṃ. Parivattayamānoti parijappamāno. ‘‘Sabbaññutaññāṇasara’’ntipi pāṭho, sabbaññutaññāṇavajiraggasaraṃ aparāparaṃ samparivattamānoti attho. Yathābhirucitena vihārenāti sabbavihārasādhāraṇadassanaṃ, dibbavihārādīsu yena yena attanā abhirucitena vihārena viharatīti attho.
波咖拉萨帝事缘注释显示巴利原文
Pokkharasātivatthuvaṇṇanā
255 “Manteti(他思量)”指关于iruveda等明论之学。因为iruveda等由于应被守护而说的意义,而被称为“manta(明论)”。“aṇa”音指发出声音,故说“sajjhāyati(他诵习)”。然而世间人说“婆罗门是梵天的后代,没有词缀,有ṇatta,长音等”。为何只说这个词义呢?故说“idameva(正是此)”等。然后以“ariyā pana(然而圣者们)”等语句,遣除了“其他人的词义是什么”的质疑。或者,为了驳斥世间人所说的“婆罗门由梵天所生”等词源而这样说。因为以“idameva”的限定而驳斥了它。而“jātibrāhmaṇānaṃ(对生来的婆罗门)”这一句,是为了在由不同词语所显示的、依生来婆罗门与清净婆罗门而分的两类婆罗门中,显示清净婆罗门的词源,而说“ariyā pana”等。因为圣者们依词源学,将“bahanti pāpe bahi karontī(他们去除诸恶,作到外面)”者称为婆罗门。“据说他的身体类似白莲花”,这仅仅是显示他得名之因,其余则是随此附带地显示如其存在的殊胜而已。因此说:显示巴利原文
255.Manteti iruvedādimantasatthe. Iruvedādayo hi guttabhāsitabbaṭṭhena ‘‘mantā’’ti vuccanti. Aṇa-saddo saddeti āha ‘‘sajjhāyatī’’ti. Lokiyā pana vadanti ‘‘brahmuno apaccaṃ brāhmaṇo, nāgamo, ṇattaṃ, dīghādī’’ti. Kasmā ayameva vacanattho vuttoti āha ‘‘idamevā’’tiādi. Atha kesaṃ itaro vacanatthoti codanamapaneti ‘‘ariyā panā’’tiādinā. Atha vā yaṃ lokiyā vadanti ‘‘brahmunā jāto brāhmaṇo’’tiādiniruttiṃ, taṃ paṭikkhipituṃ evaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idamevā’’ti hi avadhāraṇena taṃ paṭikkhipati. ‘‘Jātibrāhmaṇāna’’nti pana iminā saddantarena dassitesu jātibrāhmaṇavisuddhibrāhmaṇavasena duvidhesu brāhmaṇesu visuddhibrāhmaṇānaṃ niruttiṃ dassento ‘‘ariyā panā’’tiādimāha. Bahanti pāpe bahi karontīti hi ariyā brāhmaṇā niruttinayena. ‘‘Tassa kira kāyo setapokkharasadiso’’ti idamevassa nāmalābhahetudassanaṃ, sesaṃ pana tappasaṅgena yathāvijjamānavisesadassanameva. Tenāha ‘‘iti naṃ pokkharasadisattā pokkharasātīti sañjānantī’’ti. Pokkharena sadiso kāyo yassāti hi pokkharasātī niruttinayena . Sātasaddo vā sadisattho, pokkharena sāto sadiso kāyo tathā, so yassāti pokkharasātī. Setapokkharasadisoti setapadumavaṇṇo. Devanagareti ālakamandādidevapure. Ussāpitarajatatoraṇanti gambhīranemanikhātaṃ accuggataṃ rajatamayaṃ indakhīlaṃ . Kāḷamegharājīti kadāci dissamānā kāḷaabbhalekhā. Rajatapanāḷikāti rajatamayatumbaṃ. Suvaṭṭitāti vaṭṭabhāvassa yuttaṭṭhāne suṭṭhu vaṭṭulā. Kāḷavaṅgatilakādīnamabhāvena suparisuddhā.‘‘Arājake’’tiādināpi sobhaggappattabhāvameva nidasseti.
现在,为了进一步显示他得名的原因,而说“ayaṃ panā(然而此人)”等。其中,“在喜马拉雅地区的大湖中,于莲花苞内出生”,这仅仅是显示他得名之因。其余则是随此附带地显示如此发生的情形而已。因此说“iti naṃ pokkhare sayitattā pokkharasātīti sañjānantī(如是,因为卧于莲花,人们认知他为‘莲花卧’)”。因为依词源学,“卧于莲花中者”为pokkharasāti;或者,sāta指匀称的形态,生于莲花中的匀称形态如此,具有彼者也是pokkharasāti。然而,导师所说的“这位婆罗门的前世业行是怎样的,由此世尊为了摄受他而来到那个地方呢?”(《长部注》1.255),这仅是针对“ayaṃ panā”等语的某一部分而说。从“so tato manussaloka(他从那里到人界)”等语来看,在天界的出生等,在此处应视为只是说辗转的出生。针对由如是业而生的出生,而说“mātukucchivāsaṃ jigucchitvā(厌离母胎居住后)”等。显示巴利原文
Idāni aparampi tassa nāmalābhahetuṃ dassento ‘‘ayaṃ panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ca ‘‘himavantapadese mahāsare padumagabbhe nibbattī’’ti idamevassa nāmalābhahetudassanaṃ. Sesaṃ pana tappasaṅgena tathāpavattākāradassanameva. Tenāha ‘‘iti naṃ pokkhare sayitattā pokkharasātīti sañjānantī’’ti. Pokkhare kamale sayatīti hi pokkharasātī, sātaṃ vā vuccati samasaṇṭhānaṃ, pokkhare jātaṃ samasaṇṭhānaṃ tathā, tamassatthītipi pokkharasātī. Yaṃ pana ācariyena vuttaṃ ‘‘imassa brāhmaṇassa kīdiso pubbayogo, yena naṃ bhagavā anuggaṇhituṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatoti āhā’’ti, (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.255) tadetaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ panā’’tiādivacanaṃ ekadesameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘So tato manussaloka’’ntiādivacanato devaloke nibbattīti ettha aparāparaṃ nibbatti eva vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathārūpena kammena nibbattimeva sandhāya ‘‘mātukucchivāsaṃ jigucchitvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Padumagabbhe nibbattī’’ti iminā saṃsedajoyeva hutvā nibbattīti dasseti. Na pupphatīti na vikasati. Tenāti tāpasena. Nāḷatoti pupphadaṇḍato. Suvaṇṇacuṇṇehi piñjaraṃ hemavaṇṇo yassāti suvaṇṇacuṇṇapiñjaro, taṃ, suvaṇṇacuṇṇehi vikiṇṇabhāvena hemavaṇṇanti attho. Piñjarasaddo hi hemavaṇṇapariyāyoti sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. 1.22) vuttaṃ. Esa nayo padumareṇupiñjaranti etthāpi. Rajatabimbakanti rūpiyamayarūpakaṃ. Paṭijaggāmīti posemi. Pāranti pariyosānaṃ, nipphatti vā vuccati nadīsamuddādīnaṃ pariyosānabhūtaṃ pāraṃ viyāti katvā. Paṭisandhipaññāsaṅkhātena sabhāvañāṇena paṇḍito. Iti kattabbesu, vedesu vā visāradapaññāsaṅkhātena veyyattiyena byatto. Aggabrāhmaṇoti disāpāmokkhabrāhmaṇo. Sippanti vedasippaṃ tasseva pakaraṇādhigatattā. Brahmadeyyaṃ adāsīti vakkhamānanayena brahmadeyyaṃ katvā adāsi.
在“ajjhāvasati(他居住)”中,adhi-前缀和ā-前缀仅是介词而已,因此“ukkaṭṭha(乌迦吒)”是“ajjhā-”前缀与“vas”结合时,表示处格意义的业格。或者,adhi-前缀有“统治”义,ā-前缀有“界限”义,因此为了显示“ukkaṭṭha”是在与不变介词结合时,表示处格意义的业格,便说“ukkaṭṭhanāmake(在名为乌迦吒的)”等。为阐其义,又说“tassā(对她)”等。所谓“成为该城的主人”是对“abhibhavitvā(征服后)”的释义,以此表示“主人性即是征服”。而“以某界限”等是对ā-前缀的释义,以此表示“ā-前缀有界限义,所谓界限,即是在那里应居住的,那本身就是不隶属于他人”。因为“以某界限”的意思是:以称为不隶属于他人的、不共于他人的状态。而“依前缀之力”等是对“ukkaṭṭhanāmake(在名为乌迦吒的)”的释义,以此表示“即使有处格语形的可能,由于与两种前缀——随顺词根意义而作限定的、特殊的——相结合,此处唯施设业格”。“据说他的”等则是显示随义而有的名称。所谓“基址”,指适合建造城市的地域,如“园基址、寺基址”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ajjhāvasatī’’ti ettha adhi-saddo, ā-saddo ca upasaggamattaṃ, tato ‘‘ukkaṭṭha’’nti idaṃ ajjhāpubbavasayoge bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Adhi-saddo vā issariyattho, ā-saddo mariyādattho tato ‘‘ukkaṭṭha’’nti idaṃ kammappavacanīyayoge bhummatthe upayogavacananti dasseti ‘‘ukkaṭṭhanāmake’’tiādinā. Tadevatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘tassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tassa nagarassa sāmiko hutvā’’ti hi ‘‘abhibhavitvā’’ti etassatthavivaraṇaṃ, tenetaṃ dīpeti ‘‘sāmibhāvo abhibhavana’’nti. ‘‘Yāya mariyādāyā’’tiādi pana ā-saddassatthavivaraṇaṃ, tenetaṃ dīpeti ‘‘āsaddo mariyādattho, mariyādā ca nāma yāya tattha vasitabbaṃ, sāyeva aparādhīnatā’’ti. Yāya mariyādāyāti hi yāya aparādhīnatāsaṅkhātāya anaññasādhāraṇāya avatthāyāti attho. ‘‘Upasaggavasenā’’tiādi pana ‘‘ukkaṭṭhanāmake’’ti etassatthavivaraṇaṃ, tenetaṃ dīpeti ‘‘satipi bhummavacanappasaṅge dhātvatthānuvattakavisesakabhūtehi duvidhehipi upasaggehi yuttattā upayogavacanamevettha vihita’’nti. ‘‘Tassa kirā’’tiādi pana atthānugatasamaññāparidīpanaṃ. Vatthu nāma nagaramāpanārahabhūmippadeso ‘‘ārāmavatthu, vihāravatthū’’tiādīsu viya.
“Ukkā”意指杆灯。他们心想:“今天是吉祥日,正值吉星高照,莫要错过这良辰”,为了在夜间守护光明,便点燃杆灯,在杆灯燃烧之时,执取了城市的地基;由此说明此义:他们立于杆灯之中,故称“Ukkaṭṭhā”。依词根分解等构词法,或依词源学方法,在杆灯的照耀中立者,即称“Ukkaṭṭhā”;同样,在杆灯被安立时住者,也称“Ukkaṭṭhā”。然而,《中部义注》中说:“那座城市,因为‘这是吉祥日、良辰、吉星高照,莫要错过’,即使在夜间,也于杆灯安立时进行建造,故也被称为‘Ukkaṭṭhā’,意思是,在点燃并高举杆灯之时建造。”这与本处所述相符且一致,因为执取城市地基也包含在建造城市的范畴内,应如此看待。另有些人则说:“由于地段具足、资具具足、人众具足,那座城市因具足殊胜(ukkaṭṭha)的功德,而得名‘Ukkaṭṭhā’。”世间人则说:“在其建造之时,有火炬被高举,故称‘Ukkaṭṭhā’,这只是语音的变化。”而且此名称是阴性词。显示巴利原文
Ukkāti daṇḍadīpikā. Aggahesunti ‘‘ajja maṅgaladivaso, tasmā sunakkhattaṃ, tatthāpi ayaṃ sukhaṇo mā atikkamī’’ti rattivibhāyanaṃ anurakkhantā, rattiyaṃ ālokakaraṇatthāya ukkā ṭhapetvā ukkāsu jalamānāsu nagarassa vatthuṃ aggahesuṃ, tenetaṃ dīpeti – ukkāsu ṭhitāti ukkaṭṭhā. Mūlavibhujādi ākatigaṇapakkhepena, niruttinayena vā ukkāsu vijjotayantīsu ṭhitāti ukkaṭṭhā, tathā ukkāsu ṭhitāsu ṭhitā āsītipi ukkaṭṭhāti. Majjhimāgamaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘tañca nagaraṃ ‘maṅgaladivaso sukhaṇo, sunakkhattaṃ mā atikkamī’ti rattimpi ukkāsu ṭhitāsu māpitattā ukkaṭṭhātipi vuccati, daṇḍadīpikāsu jāletvā dhāriyamānāsu māpitattāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti, (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.mūlapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā) tadapiminā saṃsandati ceva sameti ca nagaravatthupariggahassapi nagaramāpanapariyāpannattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Apare pana bhaṇanti ‘‘bhūmibhāgasampattiyā, upakaraṇasampattiyā, manussasampattiyā ca taṃ nagaraṃ ukkaṭṭhaguṇayogato ukkaṭṭhāti nāmaṃ labhatī’’ti. Lokiyā pana vadanti ‘‘ukkā dhārīyati etassa māpitakāleti ukkaṭṭhā, vaṇṇavikāroya’’nti, itthiliṅgavasena cāyaṃ samaññā, tenevidha payogo dissati ‘‘yathā ca bhavaṃ gotamo ukkaṭṭhāya aññāni upāsakakulāni upasaṅkamatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.299) mūlapariyāyasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 1.1) ca ‘‘ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā ukkaṭṭhāyaṃ viharati subhagavane sālarājamūle’’tiādi. Evamettha hotu upasaggavasena upayogavacanaṃ, kathaṃ panetaṃ sesapadesu siyāti anuyogenāha ‘‘tassa anupayogattā sesapadesū’’ti. Tattha tassāti upasaggavasena upayogasaññuttassa ‘‘ukkaṭṭha’’nti padassa. Anupayogattāti visesanabhāvena anupayuttattā. Sesapadesūti ‘‘sattussada’’ntiādīsu sattasu padesu.
“难道此词语用法不符合语法规则吗?”为排除此责难,而说“于此……应当探究”等。其中,“于此”指依前缀而有业格用法,或依不适用而有业格用法这两种方式。“规则”指作为把握方法的道理所成的语法规则,或指经论。“应当探究”意为:因存在于诸音声论中,故应以智慧寻求、应去了知,这是所说之义。因为以此表明:“此词语用法确实是符合语法规则的。”而语法家们也认可:“在upa、anu、adhi、ā等前缀的支配关系中,于处格的意义上获得业格;而于应被修饰的词语,作为同位的修饰语,则依规则不适用业格。”其中,当adhi词和ā词仅是前缀时,则依“第三、第七……”的规则,在adhi等前缀的支配关系中用业格。正如他们所说:“在处格的意义上,于时间、方位中,在upa、anu、adhi、ā等的支配关系中;在adhi等前缀的止住、坐卧等的运用中;在饮、行等中,用第二格(业格)。于时间:早晨时分,着衣已;一时,世尊;某时,以前生缘为缘;此夜,四大天王。于方位:东方,持国天王。在upa等前缀的支配关系中:近…显示巴利原文
Kiṃ nu khvāyaṃ saddapayogo saddalakkhaṇānugatoti codanamapaneti ‘‘tattha…pe… pariyesitabba’’nti iminā. Tatthāti upasaggavasena, anupayogavasena ca upayogavacananti vutte dubbidhepi vidhāne. Lakkhaṇanti gahaṇūpāyañāyabhūtaṃ saddalakkhaṇaṃ, suttaṃ vā. Pariyesitabbanti saddasatthesu vijjamānattā ñāṇena gavesitabbaṃ, gahetabbanti vuttaṃ hoti. Etena hi saddalakkhaṇānugatovāyaṃ saddapayogoti dasseti, saddavidū ca icchanti ‘‘upaanuadhiāiccādipubbavasayoge sattamiyatthe upayogavacanaṃ pāpuṇāti, visesitabbapade ca yathāvidhimanupayogo visesanapadānaṃ samānādhikaraṇabhūtāna’’nti. Tatra yadā adhi-saddo, ā-saddo ca upasaggamattaṃ, tadā ‘‘tatiyāsattamīnañcā’’ti lakkhaṇena ajjhāpubbavasayoge upayogavacanaṃ. Tathā hi vadanti ‘‘sattamiyatthe kāladisāsu upānvajjhāvasayoge, adhipubbasiṭhāvasānaṃ payoge, tappānacāresu ca dutiyā. Kāle pubbaṇhasamayaṃ nivāsetvā, ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā, kañci kālaṃ purejātapaccayena paccayo, imaṃ rattiṃ cattāro mahārājāno. Disāyaṃ purimaṃ disaṃ dhataraṭṭho. Upādipubbavasayoge gāmaṃ upavasati, gāmaṃ anuvasati, gāmaṃ āvasati, agāraṃ ajjhāvasati, adhipubbasiṭhāvasānaṃ payoge pathaviṃ adhisessati, gāmaṃ adhitiṭṭhati, gāmaṃ ajjhāvasati. Tappānacāresu nadiṃ pivati, gāmaṃ carati iccādīti.
然而,当adhi词表“统治”义,ā词表“界限”义时,则依“与不变化词相连”的规则,在与不变化词关联时用业格。正如他们所说:“anu、ā等前缀,以及dhī等小品词,被称为‘不变化词’——即那些能表明被称为‘行为’的业的不变化词。”那么,其余词语在依规则而不适用业格的情况下,是依哪一规则而用业格的呢?正是依前面所说的规则。如果是这样,那么由于它们也是依止(处格)的关系,岂不是会有多种不同的依止吗?不会,因为众多词语以城市为所依而具有同一事义,它们仅仅是在各自的意义上有差别而已。然而,其他语法家这样认为:“同位的词语,通过与行为逐一关联,而与应被修饰的词语具有相同的格,例如‘他做席子,广大的,美丽的’——在此,‘他做席子,做广大的,做美丽的’,通过与行为逐一关联,在业的意义上都是第二格(业格)。”但这应当加以审察,因为作为同位的修饰语,并不存在与行为的关联。因为当存在与行为的关联时,它就不再是修饰语了。显示巴利原文
Yadā pana adhi-saddo issariyattho, ā-saddo ca mariyādattho, tadā ‘‘kammappavacanīyayutte’’ti lakkhaṇena kammappavacanīyayoge upayogavacanaṃ. Tathā hi vadanti ‘‘anuādayo upasaggā, dhīādayo nipātā ca kammappavacanīyasaññā honti kiriyāsaṅkhātaṃ kammaṃ pavacanīyaṃ yesaṃ te kammappavacanīyā’’ti. Sesapadānaṃ pana yathāvidhimanupayoge katarena lakkhaṇena upayogavacananti? Yathāvuttalakkhaṇeneva. Yajjevaṃ tesampi ādhārabhāvato nānādhāratā siyāti? Na, bahūnampi padānaṃ nagaravasena ekatthabhāvato. Sakatthamattañhi tesaṃ nānākaraṇanti. Aññe pana saddavidū evamicchanti ‘‘samānādhikaraṇapadānaṃ paccekaṃ kiriyāsambandhanena visesitabbapadena samānavacanatā yathā ‘kaṭaṃ karoti, vipulaṃ, dassanīya’nti ettha ‘kaṭaṃ karoti, vipulaṃ karoti, dassanīyaṃ karotī’ti paccekaṃ kiriyāsambandhanena kammattheyeva dutiyā’’ti, tadetaṃ vicāretabbaṃ visesanapadānaṃ samānādhikaraṇānaṃ kiriyāsambajjhanābhāvato. Yadā hi kiriyāsambajjhanaṃ, tadā visesanameva na hotīti.
此处“ussadatā”意谓众多,故称为“bahujana”(众人);再以“ākiṇṇamanussa”(人群拥挤)等语,说明其众多的情形。于森林等处捕获后、应当加以畜养的,即是“posāvaniyā”(应畜养者),由此显示他们为有情众生。“āvijjhitvā”意为围绕。挖掘而成的蓄水池,称为“khaṇitvā katā pokkharaṇī”;筑堤围成的水库,称为“ābandhitvā kataṃ taḷākaṃ”。唯在恒常不涸之处,方能生出种种水生之花,故说“udakassa niccabharitānevā”(常有水充满)。至于“udakassa”一词,在与“充满”这一动作相关联时,是属于具格的属格用法,正如“mahante mahante sāṇipasibbake kārāpetvā hiraññasuvaṇṇassa pūrāpetvā”(令人制作大麻袋后,再令人装满金银)等文句中的用法一样。“saha dhaññenāti sadhaññaṃ”——此词依止于“城市”一词,故以中性词形说出;或依循前述的文法,以业格说出。一切处皆依此类推。显示巴利原文
Ussadatā nāmettha bahulatāti vuttaṃ ‘‘bahujana’’nti. Taṃ pana bahulataṃ dasseti ‘‘ākiṇṇamanussa’’ntiādinā. Araññādīsu gahetvā posetabbā posāvaniyā, etena tesaṃ dhammabhāvaṃ dasseti. Āvijjhitvāti parikkhipitvā. Khaṇitvā katā pokkharaṇī, ābandhitvā kataṃ taḷākaṃ. Acchinnūdakaṭṭhāneyeva jalajakusumāni jātānīti vuttaṃ ‘‘udakassa niccabharitānevā’’ti. Udakassāti ca pūraṇakiriyāyoge karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ ‘‘mahante mahante sāṇipasibbake kārāpetvā hiraññasuvaṇṇassa pūrāpetvā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 34) viya. Saha dhaññenātisadhaññanti nagarasaddāpekkhāya napuṃsakaliṅgena vuttaṃ, yathāvākyaṃ vā upayogavacanena. Evaṃ sabbattha. Pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇādibhedaṃ bahudhaññasannicayanti ettha ādisaddena tadubhayavinimuttaṃ alābukumbhaṇḍādisūpeyyaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tenāyamattho viññāyati – nayidha dhaññasaddo sāliādidhaññavisesavācako, posane sādhuttamattena pana niravasesapubbaṇṇāparaṇṇasūpeyyavācako, virūpekasesavasena vā payuttoti. Ettāvatāti yathāvuttapadattayena. Rājalīlāyāti rājūnaṃ vilāsena. Samiddhiyā upabhogaparibhogasampuṇṇabhāvena sampatti samiddhisampatti.
既说“rājabhogga”(王所享用),便不可避免地会有“由谁所授”的疑问,故以“kena”(由谁)等语说明何以有此说。或者,另一种出自注释书的解释是:“应如国王般受用”者,故称“rājabhogga”。由于这是从国王那里得来,作为家族所有物,经子、孙、曾孙代代相承至今,故说“rañño dāyabhūta”(成为国王的遗产)。正如“dhammadāyādā me bhikkhave bhavathā”(诸比丘,你们当成为我的法嗣)等句中,“dāya”一词即是“dāyajja”(遗产)的同义词,因此说“dāyajjanti attho”(意为遗产)。为了排除“为何因被授予而名为梵天所赐”的责难,便以“chattaṃ ussāpetvā”(令擎起伞盖)等语作答。因为,若仅仅是按国王的方式去受用,那便更无“梵天所赐”的受用义可言,而此物,正是这样被授予的,故称之为梵天所赐。“chejjabhejja”指断截肢体、罚没财产等种种刑罚。“nadītitthapabbatādīsu”指渡口、山麓、村门、林口等处。应知,“执白伞盖”一事,便已涵摄其余国王的标帜。显示巴利原文
‘‘Rājabhogga’’nti vutte ‘‘kena dinna’’nti avassaṃ pucchitabbato evaṃ vuttanti dasseti ‘‘kenā’’tiādinā. Raññā viya bhuñjitabbanti vā rājabhogganti aṭṭhakathāto aparo nayo. Yāva puttanattapanattaparamparā kulasantakabhāvena rājato laddhattā ‘‘rañño dāyabhūta’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dhammadāyādā me bhikkhave bhavathā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.29) viya ca dāyasaddo dāyajjapariyāyoti āha ‘‘dāyajjanti attho’’ti. Kathaṃ dinnattā brahmadeyyaṃ nāmāti codanaṃ pariharati ‘‘chattaṃ ussāpetvā’’tiādinā. Rājanīhārena paribhuñjitabbato hi uddhaṃ paribhogalābhassa brahmadeyyatā nāma natthi, idañca tathā dinnameva, tasmā brahmadeyyaṃ nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Chejjabhejjanti sarīradaṇḍadhanadaṇḍādibhedaṃ daṇḍamāha. Nadītitthapabbatādīsūti nadītitthapabbatapādagāmadvāraaṭavimukhādīsu. Setacchattaggahaṇena sesarājakakudhabhaṇḍampi gahitaṃ tappamukhattāti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Raññā bhuñjitabba’’ntveva vutte idhādhippetattho na pākaṭoti hutvā-saddaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Tañhi so rājakulato asamudāgatopi rājā hutvā bhuñjituṃ labhatīti ayamidhādhippeto attho. Dātabbanti dāyaṃ, ‘‘rājadāya’’nti imināva raññā dinnabhāve siddhe ‘‘raññā pasenadinā kosalena dinna’’nti puna ca vacanaṃ kimatthiyanti āha ‘‘dāyakarājadīpanattha’’ntiādi. Asukena raññā dinnanti dāyakarājassa adīpitattā evaṃ vuttanti adhippāyo. Ettha ca paṭhamanaye ‘‘rājabhogga’’nti pade pucchāsambhavato idaṃ vuttaṃ, dutiyanaye pana ‘‘rājadāya’’nti padeti ayampi viseso daṭṭhabbo. Tattha atibahulatāya purato ṭhapanokāsābhāvato passenapi odanasūpabyañjanādi dīyati etassāti pasenadi, aluttasamāsavasena. So hi rājā taṇḍuladoṇassa odanampi tadupiyena sūpabyañjanena bhuñjati. Tathā hi naṃ bhuttapātarāsakāle satthu santikamāgantvā ito cito ca samparivattantaṃ niddāya abhibhuyyamānaṃ ujukaṃ nisīditumasakkontaṃ bhagavā –
当人既昏沉嗜眠,又贪食无厌,
嗜睡而辗转反侧;
犹如大野猪被倾入饲料中,
愚者便一再入于母胎。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Middhī yadā hoti mahagghaso ca, Niddāyitā samparivattasāyī; Mahāvarāhova nivāpavuṭṭho, Punappunaṃ gabbhamupeti mando’’ti. (dha. pa. 325; netti. 26, 90);
以此偈颂教诫其外甥——名为善见的学童:显示巴利原文
Imāya gāthāya ovadi. Bhāgineyyañca so sudassanaṃ nāma māṇavaṃ –
‘‘Manujassa sadā satīmato, Mattaṃ jānato laddhabhojane; Tanukassa bhavanti vedanā, Saṇikaṃ jīrati āyupālaya’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.24) –
他请人在世尊跟前学得此偈,每当自己进食时,于最后一口饭之际,每日都令人诵念。后来,他审察此偈的义理,通过一再减省最后一口饭,安住于仅一筒饭的量,身体变得消瘦、有力,获得安乐。而《优陀那注释》中说:“因战胜敌军,故为波斯匿(Pasenadi)。”精通声韵者也举此为例,说明ja转为da。他战胜了自己的外甥阿阇世王,以及五百盗贼等被围困者。因为他是拘萨罗国的统治者,故称为拘萨罗。因此应知,这是由身为拘萨罗统治者的波斯匿王所施与,这便是其义。由于是以‘舍弃、施与’的方式,即不再取回而施与,所以此处名为‘梵天所赐’,而非如前一种解释那样,以国王简略受用的方式施与,故说‘yathā’等语。所谓‘成为舍弃’,或以舍弃之态而施与,即‘舍弃施与’,以放舍之施而舍弃,这就是其义。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ gāthaṃ bhagavato santike uggahāpetvā attano bhuñjantassa osānapiṇḍakāle devasikaṃ bhaṇāpeti, so aparena samayena tassā gāthāya atthaṃ sallakkhetvā punappunaṃ osānapiṇḍapariharaṇena nāḷikodanamattāya saṇṭhahitvā tanusarīro balavā sukhappatto ahosīti. Udānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (udā. aṭṭha. 12) pana evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘paccāmittaṃ parasenaṃ jinātīti pasenadī’’ti. Saddavidūpi hi ja-kārassa da-kāre idamudāharanti. So hi attano bhāgineyyaṃ ajātasatturājānaṃ, pañcacorasatādīni ca avaruddhakāni jinātīti. Kosalaraṭṭhassādhipatibhāvato kosalo, tasmā kosalādhipatinā pasenadi nāmakena raññā dinnanti attho veditabbo. Nissaṭṭhapariccattatāsaṅkhātena puna aggahetabbabhāveneva dinnattā idha brahmadeyyaṃ nāma, na tu purimanaye viya rājasaṅkhepena paribhuñjitabbabhāvena dinnattāti āha ‘‘yathā’’tiādi. Nissaṭṭhaṃ hutvā, nissaṭṭhabhāvena vā pariccattaṃ nissaṭṭhapariccattaṃ, muttacāgavasena cajitanti attho.
为了说明“听闻”是可得的,故说“得闻者”;而此“可得”正是以听闻的方式了知,因此说“依循到达耳门的言语音声而了知”。因为此处所谓的“听闻”,正是依循耳门、随顺识路的了知,由此才证得了“沙门乔达摩确实……”等所说之义;并非仅是依耳门之路而听,因为仅凭那样并不能证得彼义。由于“eva”一词的作用是决定,整个句子都含有决定义。因此,即使没有直接表示该义的词语,也能通过排除他义而理解“他确实听到了,没有任何听闻的障碍”这一意义,故说“‘kho’是仅作填词的小品词”。而且,在整句包含决定义的情况下,由于以“eva”之力,此义已被格外明显地了知,所以从已得义的角度,为了决定义而取用“kho”一词,这是第一种解释。接着,为了排除“若‘kho’仅是填词,有何作用”的质疑,故说“以填词……”等,意思是:它仅仅是为了使由字母组成的词和由词组成的句子流畅连贯。因为当取用“kho”时,“assosi”这个词就像被它充实、装饰、庄严了一样,变得圆满;由此,前后词语也因易于发音而变得流畅;若不取用,则不然。因此显示巴利原文
Savanaṃ upalabbhoti dasseti ‘‘upalabhī’’ti iminā, so cāyamupalabbho savanavaseneva jānananti vuttaṃ ‘‘sotadvārasampattavacananigghosānusārena aññāsī’’ti. Sotadvārānusāraviññāṇavīthivasena jānanameva hi idha savanaṃ teneva ‘‘samaṇo khalu bho gotamo’’tiādinā vuttassatthassa adhigatattā, na pana sotadvāravīthivasena sutamattaṃ tena tadatthassa anadhigatattā. Avadhāraṇaphalattā saddapayogassa sabbampi vākyaṃ antogadhāvadhāraṇaṃ. Tasmā tadatthajotakasaddena vināpi aññatthāpohanavasena assosi eva, nāssa koci savanantarāyo ahosīti ayamattho viññāyatīti āha ‘‘padapūraṇamatte nipāto’’ti, antogadhāvadhāraṇepi ca sabbasmiṃ vākye nītatthato avadhāraṇatthaṃ kho-saddaggahaṇaṃ ‘‘evā’’ti sāmatthiyā sātisayaṃ etadatthassa viññāyamānattāti paṭhamavikappo vutto, nītatthato avadhāraṇena ko attho ekantiko kato, avadhārito cāti vuttaṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Atha padapūraṇamattena kho-saddena kiṃ payojananti codanamapaneti ‘‘padapūraṇenā’’tiādinā, akkharasamūhapadassa, padasamūhavākyassa ca siliṭṭhatāpayojanamattamevāti attho. ‘‘Assosī’’ti hidaṃ padaṃ kho-sadde gahite tena phullitaṃ maṇḍitaṃ vibhūsitaṃ viya hontaṃ pūritaṃ nāma hoti, tena ca purimapacchimapadāni sukhuccāraṇavasena siliṭṭhāni honti, na tasmiṃ aggahite, tasmā padapūraṇamattampi padabyañjanasiliṭṭhatāpayojananti vuttaṃ hoti. Mattasaddo cettha visesanivattiattho, tenassa anatthantaradīpanatā dassitā, eva-saddena pana padabyañjanasiliṭṭhatāya ekantikatā.
为了显示“沙门确实……”等是随所听闻之义而举例,故说“现在……”等。“已平息诸恶”于此应理解为:彻底、无余、连同习气地平息了诸恶。如此,世尊的平息诸恶便与外道离欲者、有学及无学的恶平息,相应地有了区别。因此说“世尊以无上的圣道平息了诸恶”。为了以义释之文证成此义,故说“此亦曾于……中说”。“assa”指此比丘,或指世尊。“samitā”意为已令平息、已令完成,或已令达到平息的状态,或对于作为受益者的他而言,这些恶已成为寂静。又说“世尊……”等,表示此名称是随顺其义而用于世尊的。“tena”指因如此平息了诸恶。“yathābhūtaṃ pavatto”即是“yathābhuccaṃ”,这是功德,依彼而证得者为“tathā”。“khalū”中的“kho”是不变词,如同“khalupacchābhattika”词中的用法,并非名词;且因小品词有多义性,此处唯取“传闻”义,故说“传闻义的小品词”,此处的“传闻”指辗转听闻。“brāhmaṇajātisamudāgataṃ”意为由婆罗门种姓而来,即由显示巴利原文
‘‘Samaṇo khalū’’tiādi yathāsutatthanidassananti dasseti ‘‘idānī’’tiādinā. Samitapāpattāti ettha accantaṃ anavasesato savāsanaṃ samitapāpattāti attho gahetabbo. Evañhi bāhirakavītarāgasekkhāsekkhapāpasamanato bhagavato pāpasamanaṃ yathārahaṃ visesitaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavā ca anuttarena ariyamaggena samitapāpo’’ti. Tadevatthaṃ niddesapāṭhena sādhetuṃ ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādimāha. Assāti anena bhikkhunā, bhagavatā vā. Samitāti samāpitā, samabhāvaṃ vā āpādayitā, assa vā sampadānabhūtassa santā hontīti attho. Atthānugatā cāyaṃ bhagavati samaññāti vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavā cā’’tiādi. Tenāti tathā samitapāpattā. Yathābhūtaṃ pavatto yathābhuccaṃ, tadeva guṇo, tena adhigataṃ tathā. ‘‘Khalū’’ti idaṃ nepātikaṃ khalupacchābhattikapade (mi. pa. 4.1.8) viya, na nāmaṃ, anekatthattā ca nipātānaṃ anussavanatthova idhādhippetoti āha ‘‘anussavanatthe nipāto’’ti, paramparasavanañcettha anussavanaṃ. Brāhmaṇajātisamudāgatanti brāhmaṇajātiyā āgataṃ, jātisiddhanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ālapanamattanti piyālapanavacanamattaṃ, na taduttari atthaparidīpanaṃ. Piyasamudāhārā hete ‘‘bho’’ti vā ‘‘āvuso’’ti vā ‘‘devānaṃ piyā’’ti vā. Dhammapade brāhmaṇavatthupāṭhena, (dha. pa. 315 ādayo) suttanipāte ca vāseṭṭhasuttapadena brāhmaṇajātisamudāgatālapanabhāvaṃ samatthetuṃ ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādimāha.
此处之义是:如果一个人因贪等“kiñcana”(系缚物)而成为“有系缚者”,那么他在被称呼等场合,会说着“bho bho”而四处游走,因此他只能被称为“bhovādī”,而非婆罗门。接下来的偈颂是:“无系缚、无执取,我称彼为婆罗门”。其中,贪等能系缚、压迫、障碍有情,故称为“kiñcanāni”。据说,人们驱使牛踩踏谷场时,会喊“kiñcehi kapila, kiñcehi kāḷakā”,因此应知“kiñcana”一词有压迫之义。如义释中说:“‘akiñcana’(无系缚者):即贪系缚、嗔系缚、痴系缚、慢系缚、见系缚、烦恼系缚、恶行系缚——凡是这些系缚已被断除、根绝、平息、寂止、不再生起、被智火焚烧者,彼即称为无系缚者。”“Gotama”是以种姓而称扬,世间也称之为“Ādiccagotta”(日种);而“Sakyaputta”则是以出生而称,与“Sākiya”是同义词。此亦曾于《出家经》中说:显示巴利原文
Tatrāyamattho – sace rāgādikiñcanehi sakiñcano assa, so āmantanādīsu ‘‘bho bho’’ti vadanto hutvā vicaraṇato bhovādīyeva nāma hoti, na brāhmaṇo. ‘‘Akiñcanaṃ anādānaṃ, tamahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇa’’nti (dha. pa. 396, su. ni. 625) sesagāthāpadaṃ. Tattha rāgādayo satte kiñcanti maddanti palibuddhantīti kiñcanāni. Manussā kira goṇehi khalaṃ maddāpentā ‘‘kiñcehi kapila, kiñcehi kāḷakā’’ti vadanti, tasmā kiñcanasaddo maddanattho veditabbo. Yathāha niddese ‘‘akiñcananti rāgakiñcanaṃ, dosa, moha, māna, diṭṭhi, kilesakiñcanaṃ, duccaritakiñcanaṃ, yassete kiñcanā pahīnā samucchinnā vūpasantā paṭippassaddhā abhabbuppattikā ñāṇagginā daḍḍhā, so vuccati akiñcano’’ti (cūḷani. 28, 32, 60, 63). Gotamoti gottavasena parikittanaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘ādiccagotta’’ntipi loke vadanti, sakyaputtoti pana jātivasena sākiyoti ca tasseva vevacanaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ pabbajjāsutte –
以种姓而言,称为日种;以族姓而言,称为释迦族;
我从彼族姓出家,并非为了渴求诸欲。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ādiccā nāma gottena, sākiyā nāma jātiyā; Tamhā kulā pabbajitomhi, na kāme abhipatthaya’’nti. (su. ni. 425);
同样地,他说:“‘乔达摩’是以种姓称扬世尊”等。其中,“gaṃ tāyatīti gottaṃ”:所谓“保护ga者,即是种姓”;“乔达摩”是正在使用的名称,意思是它保护智慧,使其具有决定性。正如智慧没有所缘的义便不能生起,名称没有所称的义也不能生起;因此,被称为“种姓”的义保护了那些(名称与智慧),故如此说。此处的“go”一词,用于名称与智慧。正如他们所说:显示巴利原文
Tathā cāha ‘‘gotamoti bhagavantaṃ gottavasena parikittetī’’tiādi. Tattha gaṃ tāyatīti gottaṃ, ‘‘gotamo’’ti pavattamānaṃ abhidhānaṃ, buddhiñca ekaṃsikavisayatāya rakkhatīti attho. Yathā hi buddhi ārammaṇabhūtena atthena vinā na vattati, evaṃ abhidhānaṃ abhidheyyabhūtena, tasmā so gottasaṅkhāto attho tāni rakkhatīti vuccati, go-saddo cettha abhidhāne, buddhiyañca vattati. Tathā hi vadanti –
“go”一词,用于牛、感官、大地、言语与智慧;
亦用于太阳、光线及水中;
在这些意义中,指牛时为阴性,其余皆为阳性。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Go goṇe cendriye bhumyaṃ, vacane ceva buddhiyaṃ; Ādicce rasmiyañceva, pānīyepi ca vattate; Tesu atthesu goṇe thī, pumā ca itare pumā’’ti.
其中,于「往诣正受挤乳之牛群中,而以牛为第五」等句中,go指公牛。于「行处」等句中,指感官。于「护牛」等句中,指大地。正如《经集》注疏《婆悉咤经》释义所言:「护牛即守护田地、从事耕作之意。因大地称为go,其所分即为田地」(《经集》注疏第2.619-626段)。于「所谓族姓,有二种族姓:卑下族姓与高尚族姓」等句(《巴吉帝亚》第15条)中,go亦指言语与智慧。古代诗人所作「礼敬乔达摩,牛族之圣者」中,go指太阳,意为「我礼敬日种、日亲、正自觉者乔达摩」;于「具热光者」等句中,go指光线——「具热光者」即太阳,谓「其光线如热牛(即热光)」。于「如牛水清凉之旃檀」等句(《增支部》复注第1.49段)中,go指水——其义为「如称go之水般清凉,此旃檀亦然」。缘何如此?盖若将此旃檀投诸从灶取下之沸腾热油中,彼热油当即冷却。上述诸义中,指公牛之go,视情形可兼为阴性或阳性;而于余义中,则为纯阳性。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘gosu duyhamānāsu gato, gopañcamo’’tiādīsu gosaddo goṇe vattati. ‘‘Gocaro’’tiādīsu indriye. ‘‘Gorakkha’’ntiādīsu bhūmiyaṃ. Tathā hi suttanipātaṭṭhakathāya vāseṭṭhasuttasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘gorakkhanti khettarakkhaṃ, kasikammanti vuttaṃ hoti. Pathavī hi ‘go’ti vuccati, tappabhedo ca ‘‘khetta’’nti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.619-626). ‘‘Gottaṃ nāma dve gottāni hīnañca gottaṃ, ukkaṭṭhañca gotta’’ntiādīsu (pāci. 15) vacane, buddhiyañca vattati. ‘‘Gogottaṃ gotamaṃ name’’ti porāṇakaviracanāya ādicce, ādiccabandhuṃ gotamaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ namāmīti hi attho, ‘‘uṇhagū’’tiādīsu rasmiyaṃ, uṇhā gāvo rasmiyo etassāti hi uṇhagu, sūriyo. ‘‘Gosītacandana’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. ṭī. 1.49) pānīye , gosaṅkhātaṃ pānīyaṃ viya sītaṃ, tadeva candanaṃ tathā. Tasmiñhi uddhanato uddharitapakkuthitatelasmiṃ pakkhitte taṅkhaṇaññeva taṃ telaṃ sītalaṃ hotīti. Etesu pana atthesu goṇe vattamāno go-saddo yathārahaṃ itthiliṅgo ceva pulliṅgo ca, sesesu pana pulliṅgoyeva.
然则,所谓「族姓」为何?当知:它是异于他族传承、由该族始祖所成、为该族成员所共有的通名。因此通名实为该族成员所共有,且因共有而称通名。例如,生于该族的净饭大王等亦被称为「乔达摩」。故世尊称其父净饭大王为:「乔达摩,如来已超越诸胜者」(《大品》第105段);多闻天王亦赞世尊:「我等礼敬已觉悟、明行具足之乔达摩」(《长部》第3.288段);具寿鹏耆舍亦对具寿阿难言:「善哉,乔达摩,慈愍为怀,请说寂灭之道」(《相应部》第1.212段)。而此处,则专指世尊。故言「以族姓称呼世尊」。如此,便是回顾前述三种意义。于此,「沙门」一词乃通过称扬其已息灭他们范畴之诸恶,显示世尊为同修所尊崇;「乔达摩」一词则通过称扬其生于他们范畴之殊胜族姓,显示世尊为世间所尊崇。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ panetaṃ gottaṃ nāmāti? Aññakulaparamparāya asādhāraṇaṃ tassa kulassa ādipurisasamudāgataṃ taṃkulapariyāpannasādhāraṇaṃ sāmaññarūpanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sādhāraṇameva hi idaṃ taṃkulapariyāpannānaṃ sādhāraṇato ca sāmaññarūpaṃ. Tathā hi taṃkule jātā suddhodanamahārājādayopi ‘‘gotamo’’ tveva vuccanti, teneva bhagavā attano pitaraṃ suddhodanamahārājānaṃ ‘‘atikkantavarā kho gotama tathāgatā’’ti (mahāva. 105) avoca, vessavaṇopi mahārājā bhagavantaṃ ‘‘vijjācaraṇasampannaṃ, buddhaṃ vandāma gotama’’nti, (dī. ni. 3.288) āyasmāpi vaṅgīso āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ ‘‘sādhu nibbāpanaṃ brūhi, anukampāya gotamā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.212). Idha pana bhagavantameva. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavantaṃ gottavasena parikittetī’’ti. Tasmāti yathāvuttamatthattayaṃ paccāmasati. Ettha ca ‘‘samaṇo’’ti iminā sarikkhakajanehi bhagavato bahumatabhāvo dassito tabbisayasamitapāpatāparikittanato, ‘‘gotamo’’ti iminā lokiyajanehi tabbisayauḷāragottasambhūtatāparikittanato.
释迦族净饭大王之子,故称释迦子。此名号以赞叹其出生于崇高、显赫、广大的刹帝利家族,从而显明其种姓之高贵。谓自一切刹帝利之始祖大选出王以来,释迦王族相续无有间断,最为殊胜。如云:显示巴利原文
Sakyassa suddhodanamahārājassa putto sakyaputto, iminā pana uccākulaparidīpanaṃ uditoditavipulakhattiyakulasambhūtatāparikittanato. Sabbakhattiyānañhi ādibhūtamahāsammatamahārājato paṭṭhāya asambhinnaṃ uḷāratamaṃ sakyarājakulaṃ. Yathāha –
‘‘Mahāsammatarājassa, vaṃsajo hi mahāmuni; Kappādismiñhi rājāsi, mahāsammatanāmako’’ti. (mahāvaṃse dutiyaparicchede paṭhamagāthā);
如何显示凭信心出家之义?答曰“以某种”等。parijiyana、parihāyana即衰损;或者,parijirati(正在衰)即parijiṇṇa(已衰),其状态便是衰损,故以衰损称之。此谓:未被某种衰损——如亲属衰损、财富衰损等——所摧伏、所倾覆而出家。为以同义语阐明此义,故说“舍弃那尚未衰损的家族”。所谓“尚未衰损”,即未因亲属衰损、财富衰损等而有衰损。凭信心出家,即是唯凭信心而出家。如此,以“某种”等语所遮止的说法便十分妥帖。难道“从释迦族出家”这句话,仅是显示从高贵家族出家吗?因为此义可被了知,而凭信心出家之义便不可被了知?不应如此看待。因为舍弃庞大的亲族圈和巨量的财富蕴、凭信心出家之义,已然成立。正如世间主的家族,在彼之时并无任何衰损,唯有增长,其极为繁荣之状举世周知。所以,仅说“从释迦族出家”时,舍弃如此极盛的家族、凭信心出家之义便已确立。应知此答辩是以“以某种衰损”等语来阐明的。此后是“游行于拘萨罗国”等语。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ saddhāpabbajitabhāvaparidīpananti āha ‘‘kenacī’’tiādi. Parijiyanaṃ parihāyanaṃ pārijuññaṃ, parijiratīti vā parijiṇṇo, tassa bhāvo pārijuññaṃ, tena. Ñātipārijuññabhogapārijuññādinā kenaci pārijuññena parihāniyā anabhibhūto anajjhotthaṭo hutvā pabbajitoti attho. Tadeva pariyāyantarena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘aparikkhīṇaṃyeva taṃ kulaṃ pahāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aparikkhīṇanti hi ñātipārijuññabhogapārijuññādinā kenaci pārijuññena aparikkhayaṃ. Saddhāya pabbajitoti saddhāya eva pabbajito. Evañhi ‘‘kenacī’’tiādinā nivattitavacanaṃ sūpapannaṃ hoti. Nanu ca ‘‘sakyakulā pabbajito’’ti idaṃ uccākulā pabbajitabhāvaparidīpanameva siyā tadatthasseva viññāyamānattā, na saddhāpabbajitabhāvaparidīpanaṃ tadatthassa aviññāyamānattāti? Na kho panevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ mahantaṃ ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ, mahantañca bhogakkhandhaṃ pahāya saddhāpabbajitabhāvassa atthato siddhattā. Tathā hi lokanāthassa abhijātiyaṃ tassa kulassa na kiñci pārijuññaṃ, atha kho vuḍḍhiyeva, tato tassa samiddhatamabhāvo loke pākaṭo paññāto hoti, tasmā ‘‘sakyakulā pabbajito’’ti ettakeyeva vutte tathā samiddhatamaṃ kulaṃ pahāya saddhāpabbajitabhāvo siddhoyevāti, imaṃ parihāraṃ ‘‘kenaci pārijuññenā’’tiādinā vibhāvetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tato paranti ‘‘kosalesu cārikaṃ caramāno’’tiādivacanaṃ.
善哉,以法为喜之君王;善哉,具足智慧之人;
善哉,不欺朋友者;不造恶即是乐。」等语句中——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sādhu dhammaruci rājā, sādhu paññāṇavā naro; Sādhu mittānamadubbho, pāpassākaraṇaṃ sukha’’nti. ādīsu –
此处 sādhu 一词取“美好”之义,故说“然而,美好”。kho 为表决定义之助词,pana 则表另一方面义。注释书中引用这些词,正是为了说明其义。“美好”即善妙,而善妙者,因能为见者带来利益与安乐,故说“带来利益、带来安乐”。此中,“利益”指现世、来世、胜义三种利益,“安乐”亦指如是三种安乐。显示巴利原文
Viya sādhusaddo idha sundaratthoti āha ‘‘sundaraṃ kho panā’’ti. Khoti avadhāraṇatthe nipāto, panāti pakkhantaratthe. Evaṃ sātthakatāviññāpanatthañhi saṃvaṇṇanāyametesaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Sundaranti ca bhaddakaṃ, bhaddakatā ca passantānaṃ hitasukhāvahabhāvenāti vuttaṃ ‘‘atthāvahaṃ sukhāvaha’’nti. Attho cettha diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthavasena tividhaṃ hitaṃ sukhampi tatheva tividhaṃ sukhaṃ.
“Tathārūpānan”ti:依字面而言,意为“像那样的”;然而,为显示其纯粹的义理,则说“evarūpānaṃ”(这样的)。世尊所具足的正是那样一些功德——由于这些功德的真实体性,令具四种衡量标准的世间一切众生,都对世尊生起极度的信解与净信。为指出是就这些功德而说“像那样的阿拉汉”,故说“yathārūpo”等。“Laddhasaddhānan”ti:即已得信者,义为获得了他人信心的人;或者说“Laddhasaddānaṃ”(获得名声者),即已获得称誉名声的人。由此,显示了“arahataṃ”一词的意思是“阿拉汉们”,并突出了“阿拉汉”这一名称的殊胜状态。进而,以“yathārūpo so bhavaṃ gotamo”(那位乔达摩尊者是如此这般)一句,从非限定的方面显示“tathārūpānaṃ”的含义之后,为了再从自性限定的方面显示其义,而说“yathābhuccaguṇādhigamena loke arahantoti laddhasaddhānaṃ”(由于证得如实功德,世间称之为阿拉汉,已获此称誉者)。显示巴利原文
Tathārūpānanti tādisānaṃ, ayaṃ saddato attho. Atthamattaṃ pana dassetuṃ ‘‘evarūpāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Yādisehi ca guṇehi bhagavā samannāgato catuppamāṇikassa lokassa sabbakālampi-accantāya-saddhāya-pasādanīyo tesaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvattā, tādisehi guṇehi samannāgatabhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tathārūpānaṃ arahata’’nti vuttanti dassento ‘‘yathārūpo’’tiādimāha. Laddhasaddhānanti laddhasaddahānaṃ, parajanassa saddhaṃ paṭilabhantānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Laddhasaddānanti vā paṭiladdhakittisaddānaṃ, etena ‘‘arahata’’nti padassa arahantānanti attho, arahantasamaññāya ca pākaṭabhāvo dassito, apica ‘‘yathārūpo so bhavaṃ gotamo’’ti iminā ‘‘tathārūpāna’’nti padassa aniyamavasena atthaṃ dassetvā sarūpaniyamavasenapi dassetuṃ ‘‘yathābhuccaguṇādhigamena loke arahantoti laddhasaddhāna’’nti vuttaṃ, idampi hi ‘‘tathārūpāna’’nti padasseva atthadassanaṃ, ayameva ca nayo ācariyehi adhippeto idha ṭīkāyaṃ, (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.255) sāratthadīpaniyañca tatheva vuttattā. ‘‘Yathārūpā te bhavanto arahanto’’ti avatvā ‘‘yathārūpo so bhavaṃ gotamo’’ti vacanaṃ bhagavatiyeva garugāravavasena ‘‘tathārūpānaṃ arahata’’nti puthuvacananiddiṭṭhabhāvaviññāpanatthaṃ . Attani, garūsu ca hi bahuvacanaṃ icchanti saddavidū. ‘‘Yathābhucca…pe… arahata’’nti iminā ca dhammappamāṇānaṃ, lūkhappamāṇānañca sattānaṃ bhagavato pasādāvahataṃ yathārutato dasseti arahantabhāvassa tesaññeva yathārahaṃ visayattā, taṃdassanena pana itaresampi rūpappamāṇaghosappamāṇānaṃ pasādāvahatā dassitāyeva tadavinābhāvatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“Pasādasommānī”ti:即明净、清凉的,或者因明净而清凉,以此表明心的明亮状态。虽然说了“dassanaṃ”(见),但由于尚有比见更进一步的应行之事,此语便获得了赞叹或可能的意味,故说“dassanamattampi sādhu hotī”(即使仅是见到也是好的)。否则,就会产生非本意的理解:“仅仅见到才是好的,而非更进一步的行为”。在此,“pi”字或省略显示的“api”字,正具赞叹、可能的意义。“Brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetī”ti(开示梵行)这句话中的“iti”字,与“abbhuggato”(生起、传出)相关联。因此,这里的“sādhu hotī”ti(是好的)中的“iti”字,应与“婆罗门玻科罗娑提召唤学童阿摩昼”这一句相关联。由于该句的意思已很明显,所以存在“经文省略”(pāṭhasesa)。因为意义既已明了,词句虽未说出,即属省略。显示巴利原文
Pasādasommānīti pasannāni, sītalāni ca, pasādavasena vā sītalāni, anena pasannamanataṃ dasseti. ‘‘Dassana’’nti vuttepi taduttari kattabbatāsambhavato ayaṃ sambhāvanattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘dassanamattampi sādhu hotī’’ti. Itarathā hi ‘‘dassanaññeva sādhu, na taduttari karaṇa’’nti anadhippetattho āpajjati, sambhāvanattho cettha pi-saddo, api-saddo vā luttaniddiṭṭho. ‘‘Brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetī’’ti ettha iti-saddo ‘‘abbhuggato’’ti iminā sambandhamupagato, tasmā ayaṃ ‘‘sādhu hotī’’ti idha iti-saddo ‘‘brāhmaṇo pokkharasātī ambaṭṭhaṃ māṇavaṃ āmantesī’’ti iminā sambajjhitabbo, ‘‘ajjhāsayaṃ katvā’’ti ca pāṭhaseso tadatthassa viññāyamānattā. Yassa hi attho viññāyati, saddo na payujjati, so ‘‘pāṭhaseso’’ti vuccati, imamatthaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘dassanamattampi sādhu hotīti evaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ katvā’’ti. Mūlapaṇṇāsake cūḷasīhanādasuttaṭṭhakathāya (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.144) āgataṃ kosiyasakuṇavatthu cettha kathetabbaṃ.
阿摩昼学童谈话注释显示巴利原文
Ambaṭṭhamāṇavakathāvaṇṇanā
256 “Ajjhāyako”一词,在第一类用法中纯粹是呵斥语,在第二类用法中则用作赞叹语,正如为了显示“puriso naro”(人、人类)的用法而引用的《阿耨菩提经》文句那样。于此,“ime jhāyakā”是指那些被称为“jhāyaka”的人。他们并不修禅(na jhāyanti):不在叶屋中修习禅那、不成就禅那;意思是,他们只是退居到村落城镇的附近,以编撰吠陀典籍度日。然而,他们依循那些婆罗门禅修者的第一、第二名称,生起了这第三个名称,故说“ajjhāyakātveva tatiyaṃ akkharaṃ upanibbattaṃ”(唯由此生起‘ajjhāyaka’这第三个名称)。此处的“akkhara”是指名称、惯用语;因为该名称仅在此处通用,不用于他处,故名“akkhara”。“Mante parivattetī”ti:即诵习吠陀,意思是学习掌握。在此,由“adhi”与“i”字根构成连音,而其他情况下则由“jhe”字根构成。“Mante dhāretī”ti:令所学咒语不忘失。显示巴利原文
256. ‘‘Ajjhāyako’’ti idaṃ paṭhamapakatiyā garahāvacanameva, dutiyapakatiyā pasaṃsāvacanaṃ katvā voharanti yathā taṃ ‘‘puriso naro’’ti dassetuṃ aggaññasuttapada (dī. ni. 3.132) mudāhaṭaṃ. Tattha imeti jhāyakanāmena samaññitā janā. Na jhāyantīti paṇṇakuṭīsu jhānaṃ na appenti na nipphādenti, gāmanigamasāmantaṃ osaritvā vedaganthe karontāva acchantīti attho. Taṃ panetesaṃ brāhmaṇajhāyakasaṅkhātaṃ paṭhamadutiyanāmaṃ upādāya tatiyameva jātanti āha ‘‘ajjhāyakātveva tatiyaṃ akkharaṃ upanibbatta’’nti, akkharanti ca nirutti samaññā. Sā hi tasmiṃyeva niruḷhabhāvena aññattha asañcaraṇato ‘‘akkhara’’nti vuccati. Mante parivattetīti vede sajjhāyati, pariyāpuṇātīti attho. Idha hi adhiāpubbai-saddavasena padasandhi, itarattha pana jhe-saddavasena. Mante dhāretīti yathāadhīte mante asammūḷhe katvā hadaye ṭhapeti.
阿闼婆吠陀因为具有伤害他人的性质,不为善人所受用,因此只说为“梨俱吠陀、耶柔吠陀、沙摩吠陀”。其中,“梨俱”(iru):诸天以此而被称颂、赞叹,故名为iru——依“ica”字根,将c转为r,此词为阴性。“耶柔”(yaju):诸天以此而被祭祀、礼敬,故名为yaju——依中性及阳性两种性使用。“沙摩”(sāma):以此令恶法止息,或令恶法变得微薄,故名为sāma——依“so”字根,将o转为ā而成。“吠陀”(veda):他们以此了知法或业,故名为veda。这些即是咒语,因“他们以此通达善趣,亦以此而被听闻”,故如此称呼。“Paharaṇaṃ saṅghaṭṭanaṃ pahataṃ, oṭṭhānaṃ pahataṃ tathā, tassa karaṇavasena, oṭṭhāni cāletvā paguṇabhāvakaraṇavasena pāraṃ gato, na atthavibhāvanavasenāti vuttaṃ hoti.”:这便是所谓的“pārag”。显示巴利原文
Āthabbaṇavedo parūpaghātakarattā sādhūnamaparibhogoti katvā ‘‘iruvedayajuvedasāmavedāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha iccante thomīyante devā etāyāti iru ica-dhātuvasena ca-kārassa ra-kāraṃ katvā, itthiliṅgoyaṃ . Yajjante pujjante devā anenāti yaju punnapuṃsakaliṅgavasena. Soyanti antaṃ karonti, sāyanti vā tanuṃ karonti pāpamanenāti sāmaṃ so-dhātupakkhe o-kārassa ā-kāraṃ katvā. Vidanti dhammaṃ, kammaṃ vā etehīti vedā, te eva mantā ‘‘sugatiyopi munanti, suyyanti ca etehī’’ti katvā. Paharaṇaṃ saṅghaṭṭanaṃ pahataṃ, oṭṭhānaṃ pahataṃ tathā, tassa karaṇavasena, oṭṭhāni cāletvā paguṇabhāvakaraṇavasena pāraṃ gato, na atthavibhāvanavasenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāragūti ca niccasāpekkhatāya kitantasamāso.
“含词典”等语句,是依文句与词尾变化来展示构词分析。“词典(nighaṇṭu)等”中,nighaṇṭu是一种特殊的树名,意指以它为首的事物,由此表明以nighaṇṭu树门类为首,其余门类也在其中展示,因此该论书名为nighaṇṭu,正如“波罗夷犍度”、“善三法”等名所示,此义可依字面而得。然而诸阿阇梨说:“因可说与能说之性,揭示词与义,刺入、破开、分别而显示,故为nikhaṇḍu(破分),将kha音变为gha音,便成nighaṇḍu”(长部注释疏1.256)。此应理解为依注释宗义而展示的不同宗义。否则与注释相违,此须考量。然而字母论师的意趣是:“从各处收集的名称,确定地组合、聚集于此,因此带随音niggahita,称为nighaṇṭu。”“同义词展示”:即对同义词的说明,义为分别每一种意义的多种同义词。这仅是例示,因为该论书也依一义多词的解释方式而成立。“那是什么?”即今之《名相轨范宝鬘》、《名义灯》等。依语言分别等相状而被造作,故称kiriyākappo(造作分别);如是。显示巴利原文
‘‘Saha nighaṇṭunā’’tiādinā yathāvākyaṃ vibhatyantavasena nibbacanadassanaṃ. Nighaṇṭurukkhādīnanti nighaṇṭu nāma rukkhaviseso, tadādikānamatthānanti attho, etena nighaṇṭurukkhapariyāyaṃ ādiṃ katvā tappamukhena sesapariyāyānaṃ tattha dassitattā so gantho nighaṇṭu nāma yathā taṃ ‘‘pārājikakaṇḍo, kusalattiko’’ti ayamattho dassito iminā yathārutameva tadatthassa adhigatattā. Ācariyā pana evaṃ vadanti ‘‘vacanīyavācakabhāvena atthaṃ, saddañca nikhaḍati bhindati vibhajja dassetīti nikhaṇḍu, so eva kha-kārassa gha-kāraṃ katvā ‘nighaṇḍū’ti vutto’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.256), tadetaṃ aṭṭhakathānayato aññanayadassananti gahetabbaṃ. Itarathā hi so aṭṭhakathāya virodho siyā, vicāretabbametaṃ. Akkharacintakā pana evamicchanti ‘‘tattha tatthāgatāni nāmāni nissesato ghaṭenti rāsiṃ karonti etthāti nighaṇṭu niggahitāgamenā’’ti. Vevacanappakāsakanti pariyāyasaddadīpakaṃ, ekekassa atthassa anekapariyāyavacanavibhāvakanti attho. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ anekesampi atthānaṃ ekasaddavacanīyatāvibhāvanavasenapi tassa ganthassa pavattattā. Ko panesoti? Etarahi nāmaliṅgānusāsanaratanamālābhidhānappadīpikādi. Vacībhedādilakkhaṇā kiriyā kappīyati etenāti kiriyākappo, tatheva vividhaṃ kappīyati etenāti vikappo, kiriyākappo ca so vikappo cāti kiriyākappavikappo. So hi vaṇṇapadasambandhapadatthādivibhāgato bahuvikappoti katvā ‘‘kiriyākappavikappo’’ti vuccati, so ca ganthavisesoyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘kavīnaṃ upakārāvahaṃ sattha’’nti, catunnampi kavīnaṃ kavibhāvasampadābhogasampadādipayojanavasena upakārāvaho ganthoti attho . Ko panesoti? Kabyabandhanavidhividhāyako kabyālaṅkāragītāsubodhālaṅkārādi. Idaṃ pana mūlakiriyākappaganthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. So hi mahāvisayo satasahassagāthāparimāṇo, yaṃ ‘‘nayacariyādipakaraṇa’’ntipi vadanti. Vacanatthato pana kiṭayati gameti ñāpeti kiriyādivibhāganti keṭubhaṃ kiṭa-dhātuto abhapaccayavasena, a-kārassa ca ukāro. Atha vā kiriyādivibhāgaṃ anavasesapariyādānato kiṭento gamanto obheti pūretīti keṭubhaṃ kiṭa-saddūpapadaubhadhātuvasena. Apica kiṭanti gacchanti kavayo bandhesu kosallametenāti keṭubhaṃ, purimanayenevettha padasiddhi. Ṭhānakaraṇādivibhāgato, nibbacanavibhāgato ca akkharā pabhedīyanti etenāti akkharappabhedo, taṃ pana chasu vedaṅgesu pariyāpannaṃ pakaraṇadvayamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘sikkhā ca nirutti cā’’ti. Tattha sikkhanti akkharasamayametāyāti sikkhā, akārādivaṇṇānaṃ ṭhānakaraṇapayatanapaṭipādakasatthaṃ. Nicchayena, nissesato vā utti nirutti, vaṇṇāgamavaṇṇavipariyāyādilakkhaṇaṃ. Vuttañca –
“音的增加与音变”,
其余二者为音变与音灭;
词根与殊胜义相结合,
此称为五种声明。”(《波罗夷注·韦兰犍度释》;《清净道论》1.144;《大义释注》1.50)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Vaṇṇāgamo vaṇṇavipariyāyo, Dve cāpare vaṇṇavikāranāsā; Dhātussa atthātisayena yogo, Taduccate pañcavidhā niruttī’’ti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā; visuddhi. 1.144; mahāni. aṭṭha. 1.50);
此处,以彼为方便,从多方面阐明词源解释的论著,因省略后面的词(satthaṃ 中的 ṭhaṃ)而称为“尼禄多”。因为诸阿阇梨(《长部》复注1.256)已说词源分别也是字母分别,且词源分别已被语法支所摄。语法与尼禄多实各为一吠陀支,如说:显示巴利原文
Idha pana tabbasena anekadhā nibbacanaparidīpakaṃ satthaṃ uttarapadalopena ‘‘niruttī’’ti adhippetaṃ nibbacanavibhāgatopi akkharapabhedabhāvassa ācariyehi (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.256) vuttattā, tamantarena nibbacanavibhāgassa ca byākaraṇaṅgena saṅgahitattā. Byākaraṇaṃ, nirutti ca hi paccekameva vedaṅgaṃ yathāhu –
劫波、语法、星象论,式叉与尼禄多;
及阐陀,这些总称六吠陀支。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kappo byākaraṇaṃ joti-satthaṃ sikkhā nirutti ca; Chandoviciti cetāni, vedaṅgāni vadanti chā’’ti.
因此应知:此处依词源学理则所标示的构词分析,纯然不与语法支相杂;不像六辅音处那样属于二者共通的构词分析,因为那是吠陀支的范畴。这便是此处由《大义释注》(大义释注50)传来的词源学理则之决断。其中,如“如星宿王之于群星”(本生1.1.11, 25),如ra音的增加——原本不存在的字母增加,名为“音来”(vaṇṇāgamo)。因害义应说“hiṃso”而说成“sīho”,如已有字母的上下转换,名为“音转”(vaṇṇavipariyāyo)。如“给九张皮”(本生1.6.88),如a音变成e音,一字母变成其他字母,名为“音变”(vaṇṇavikāro)。应说“jīvanassa mūto jīvanamūto”而说“jīmūto”,如va音与na音的坏灭,已有字母的消失,名为“音灭”(vaṇṇavināso)。如“以粗恶之语而行,汝触恼我,童子言”(本生1.10.85),如“pakubbamāno”一词显示“abhibhavamāno”(胜伏)之义,又如于各处随顺显示特别之义,则是词根意义的殊胜结合(dhātussa atthā显示巴利原文
Tasmā byākaraṇaṅgena asaṅkarabhūtameva niruttinayena nibbacanamidhādhippetaṃ, na chasu byañjanapadesu viya tadubhayasādhāraṇanibbacanaṃ vedaṅgavisayattāti veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha mahāniddesaṭṭhakathāya (mahāni. aṭṭha. 50) āgataniruttinayavinicchayo . Tattha hi ‘‘nakkhattarājāriva tārakāna’’nti (jā. 1.1.11, 25) ettha ra-kārāgamo viya avijjamānassa akkharassa āgamo vaṇṇāgamo nāma. Hiṃsanattā ‘‘hiṃso’’ti vattabbe ‘‘sīho’’ti parivattanaṃ viya vijjamānānamakkharānaṃ heṭṭhupariyavasena parivattanaṃ vaṇṇavipariyāyo nāma. ‘‘Navachannakedāni diyyatī’’ti (jā. 1.6.88) ettha a-kārassa e-kārāpajjanaṃ viya aññakkharassa aññakkharāpajjanaṃ vaṇṇavikāro nāma. ‘‘Jīvanassa mūto jīvanamūto’’ti vattabbe ‘‘jīmūto’’ti va-kāra na-kārānaṃ vināso viya vijjamānakkharānaṃ vināso vaṇṇavināso nāma. ‘‘Pharusāhi vācāhi pakubbamāno, āsajja maṃ tvaṃ vadase kumārā’’ti (jā. 1.10.85) ettha ‘‘pakubbamāno’’ti padassa abhibhavamānoti atthapaṭipādanaṃ viya tattha tattha yathāyogaṃ visesatthapaṭipādanaṃ dhātūnamatthātisayena yogo nāmāti.
对于如上所述分类的三种吠陀,这第四种或许存在,那么与什么合为第五种呢?因此说“以阿闼婆吠陀为第四”。所谓阿闼婆吠陀,是阿闼婆吠陀师所制定的、用以伤害他人的咒术。然而,它只是为了表明“以历史传说为第五”这一事实,而仅以计数的方式被纳入,并非依其本身形态而被纳入。做了如此说明之后,“etesaṃ”一词的意义应被理解为仅指那三种吠陀,因为它是对“三种吠陀”的修饰。“Itiha asā”意为“在世间曾如此存在过”,有些地方读作“āsā”,其意义相同。在此处,iti 意为“如此”,或者指此业、此事,āsa 意为“愿望、欲求”,这也是一个意义。此处为了表明该典籍内容广博,而使用了表示分别的措辞,由此显示:与“itihāsā”这一措辞相关联的 itihāsa,是通过派生词缀的方式表达意义。也有人说:与“itiha āsa, itihā āsā”这样的语句相关联的 itihāsa,是通过词源学的方式显示意义。然而,文字学家们这样认为:“itiha 一词是表示师徒相承教说的一个不变词,as 意为‘存在’,i显示巴利原文
Yathāvuttappabhedānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ ayaṃ catutthoyeva siyā, atha kena saddhiṃ pañcamoti āha ‘‘āthabbaṇavedaṃ catutthaṃ katvā’’ti. Āthabbaṇavedo nāma āthabbaṇavedikehi vihito parūpaghātakaro manto, so pana itihāsapañcamabhāvappakāsanatthaṃ gaṇitatāmattena gahito, na sarūpavasena, evañca katvā ‘‘etesa’’nti padassa tesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vedānantveva attho gahetabbo. Tañhi ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ vedāna’’nti etassa visesananti. Itiha asāti evaṃ idha loke ahosi ‘‘āsā’’tipi katthaci pāṭho, soyevattho. Iha ṭhāne iti evaṃ, idaṃ vā kammaṃ, vatthuṃ vā āsa icchāhītipi attho. Tassa ganthassa mahāvisayatādīpanatthañcettha vicchāvacanaṃ, iminā ‘‘itihāsā’’ti vacanena paṭisaṃyutto itihāso taddhitavasenāti atthaṃ dasseti. Itiha āsa, itiha āsā’’ti īdisavacanapaṭisaṃyutto itihāso niruttinayenāti atthadassanantipi vadanti. Akkharacintakā pana evamicchanti ‘‘itiha-saddo pārampariyopadese ekova nipāto, asati vijjatīti aso, itiha aso etasminti itihāso samāsavasenā’’ti, tesaṃ mate ‘‘itiha asā’’ti ettha evaṃ pārampariyopadeso asa vijjamāno ahosīti attho. ‘‘Purāṇakathāsaṅkhāto’’ti iminā tassa ganthavisesabhāvamāha, bhāratanāmakānaṃ dvebhātikarājūnaṃ yuddhakathā, rāmarañño sītāharaṇakathā, narasīharājuppattikathāti evamādipurāṇakathāsaṅkhāto bhāratapurāṇarāmapurāṇanarasīhapurāṇādigantho itihāso nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Tesaṃ itihāsapañcamānaṃ vedāna’’nti iminā yathāvākyaṃ ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ vedāna’’nti ettha visesanabhāvaṃ dasseti.
意义通过它而被了知,故称为“句”(pada),即名词、动词、前缀、不变词等种种分类的、有语尾变化之词。此在语法学中亦已述及,故说“其剩余部分”,意指句之余者,也就是作为词根、词缀等词之特征的部分。对一一词及其意义进行分析、详细解说,由此而称为“语法”(byākaraṇa);或者,词根、词缀等在其中被特别地造就、产生,或通过它而被造就,故称为语法,即是阐明正确诸词的《月灯语法》《萨罗私伐底语法》《波你尼语法》《旃陀罗语法》等至今尚存的论书。他学习,故称为“学习者”(ajjhāyati)。他使人了知,即向他人讲说。“ca”一词为集合两种意义,或因其他意义作为选项,故表选择。因为派生词缀的用法确实多种多样。所谓“句者”(padaka),是就语法书中所说关于词的善巧而言;所谓“语法家”(veyyākaraṇa),是就其中其余的词根、词缀等词之规则的善巧而言。为了使人了知这一意义,故而将两词一起解释。因为诸阿阇梨的惯例,即是通过某种方式令人了知其余意显示巴利原文
Pajjati attho etenāti padaṃ, nāmākhyātopasagganipātādivasena anekavibhāgaṃ vibhattiyantapadaṃ. Tadapi byākaraṇe āgatamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘tadavasesa’’nti, padato avasesaṃ pakatipaccayādisaddalakkhaṇabhūtanti attho. Taṃ taṃ saddaṃ, tadatthañca byākaroti byācikkhati etenāti byākaraṇaṃ, visesena vā ākarīyante pakatipaccayādayo abhinipphādīyante ettha, anenāti vā byākaraṇaṃ, sādhusaddānamanvākhyāyakaṃ muddhabodhabyākaraṇa sārassatabyākaraṇa pāṇinībyākaraṇacandrabyākaraṇādi adhunāpi vijjamānasatthaṃ. Adhīyatīti ajjhāyati. Vedetīti paresaṃ vāceti. Ca-saddo atthadvayasamuccinanattho, vikappanattho vā atthantarassa vikappitattā. Vicitrā hi taddhitavutti. Padakoti byākaraṇesu āgatapadakosallaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, veyyākaraṇoti tadavasiṭṭhapakatipaccayādisaddavidhikosallanti imassatthassa viññāpanatthaṃ padadvayassa ekato atthavacanaṃ. Esā hi ācariyānaṃ pakati, yadidaṃ yena kenaci pakārena atthantaraviññāpanaṃ. Ayaṃ aṭṭhakathāto aparo nayo – te eva vede padaso kāyatīti padakoti. Tattha padasoti gajjabandhapajjabandhapadena. Kāyatīti katheti yathā ‘‘jātaka’’nti, iminā vedakārakasamatthataṃ dasseti. Evañhi ‘‘ajjhāyako’’tiādīhi imassa viseso pākaṭo hotīti.
未来的利益——即所称的愚者世间——不依此而精勤、不因此努力,故名为“顺世论”。因为依止那部论书,众生连行善之心都不会生起;再者,世间亦即愚者,因耽着论辩之味而于其中精进努力,故称顺世论。彼此相违、或与天界及解脱相违的言论于中展开,故称vitaṇḍa,依ḍa词缀并变na为ṇa;或者,论师们于其中以相违的诤论之杖互相打击,故称vitaṇḍa,依taḍi词根并插入随韵。即便不是其本处,但依之而开展论师的诤论,亦借处所之喻而立其名,如说“眼是世间可爱可悦的,当渴爱于此被断除时即被断除,于此被熄灭时即熄灭”(《长部》等)。又或,彼能特别地动摇、策励智者之心,故称vitaṇḍa;他们讲述此论,或他们的诤论即是此,故称vitaṇḍavādā,他们的论书亦是如此。通过省略后分或依派生词缀,将“相之照明论书”称为“相”,故以“相之照明”等句显示。佛性等因彼而得了知,故称为“相”,犹如榕树之……显示巴利原文
Āyatiṃ hitaṃ bālajanasaṅkhāto loko na yatati na īhati anenāti lokāyataṃ. Tañhi ganthaṃ nissāya sattā puññakiriyāya cittampi na uppādenti, lokā vā bālajanā āyatanti ussahanti vādassādena etthāti lokāyataṃ. Aññamaññaviruddhaṃ, saggamokkhaviruddhaṃ vā tanonti etthāti vitaṇḍo ḍa-paccayavasena, na-kārassa ca ṇa-kāraṃ katvā, viruddhena vādadaṇḍena tāḷenti vādino etthāti vitaṇḍo taḍi-dhātuvasena, niggahītāgamañca katvā. Adesampi yaṃ nissāya vādīnaṃ vādo pavatto, taṃ tesaṃ desatopi upacāravasena vuccati yathā ‘‘cakkhuṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhatī’’ti, (dī. ni. 2.401; ma. ni. 1.133; vibha. 204) visesena vā paṇḍitānaṃ manaṃ taḍenti cālenti etenāti vitaṇḍo, taṃ vadanti, so vādo vā etesanti vitaṇḍavādā, tesaṃ satthaṃ tathā. Lakkhaṇadīpakasatthaṃ uttarapadalopena, taddhitavasena vā lakkhaṇanti dasseti ‘‘lakkhaṇadīpaka’’ntiādinā. Lakkhīyati buddhabhāvādi anenāti lakkhaṇaṃ, nigrodhabimbatādi. Tenāha ‘‘yesaṃ vasenā’’tiādi. Dvādasasahassaganthapamāṇanti ettha bhāṇavārappamāṇādīsu viya bāttiṃsakkharaganthova adhippeto. Vuttañhi –
八个字母合为一词,一首偈由四句组成;
一首偈即为一部作品,该作品由三十二个字母组成。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Aṭṭhakkharā ekapadaṃ, ekā gāthā catuppadaṃ; Gāthā cekā mato gantho, gantho bāttiṃsatakkharo’’ti.
其义为:以十二乘一千的三十二字母论典之量。yattha 意为“在那部相论中”,这是处格,犹如“树上有枝”一般。一万六千,是指一万六千首偈颂的量,即超过一万六千首偈颂。这样,处所与所依之物的表述便极为妥当。以重点的方式阐明诸佛之相,故称为“佛之论典”。因为独觉佛等的相也在其中得到了阐明,所以有“依靠哪些”等语。显示巴利原文
Dvādasahi guṇitasahassabāttiṃsakkharaganthappamāṇanti attho. Yatthāti yasmiṃ lakkhaṇasatthe, ādhāre cetaṃ bhummaṃ yathā ‘‘rukkhe sākhā’’ti. Soḷasa ca sahassañca soḷasasahassaṃ, soḷasādhikasahassagāthāparimāṇāti attho. Evañhi ādhārādheyyavacanaṃ sūpapannaṃ hotīti. Padhānavasena buddhānaṃ lakkhaṇadīpanato buddhamantā nāma. Paccekabuddhādīnampi hi lakkhaṇaṃ tattha dīpitameva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yesaṃ vasenā’’tiādi.
“造作无缺圆满者”:这是仅就意义而示,为了表明从文句上所得之义,故说“并非缺失者”。那么,何为“缺失者”?为排除此问,便说“所谓缺失者……”等。此处的意趣是:能够持守那些经典者,称为“具力者”。而不能持守者,则名为“缺失者”。而“并非缺失者”,依“双重否定归于本义”之理,即是“具力者”。所谓“具力者”,即能贯通之义:在初、中、后各处,皆不疲厌、不滞着,能于那些经典的相续中运用、流通,此为其义。然而,这是律藏注释的传统解释(《波罗夷》第84页)——“无缺失者”即“随顺无缺失者”,因连音而省略了u音;“随顺无缺失者”即无不足、具备圆满技能,此为其义。所谓“缺失”,即如“增长与减损”等语中的减损;在这些如前所述的经典中,若没有减损、没有不足,即是“无缺失者”;随顺无缺失者,即是“无缺失者”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Anūnoparipūrakārī’’ti atthamattadassanaṃ, saddato pana adhigatamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘avayo na hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ko panesa avayoti anuyogamapaneti ‘‘avayo nāmā’’tiādinā. Ayamettādhippāyo – yo tāni sandhāretuṃ sakkoti, so ‘‘vayo’’ti vuccati. Yo pana na sakkoti, so avayo nāma. Yo ca avayo na hoti, so ‘‘dve paṭisedhā pakatiyatthagamakā’’ti ñāyena vayo evāti. Vayatīti hi vayo, ādimajjhapariyosānesu katthacipi aparikilamanto avitthāyanto te ganthe santāne paṇeti byavaharatīti attho. Ayaṃ pana vinayaṭṭhakathānayo (pārā. 84) – anavayoti anu avayo, sandhivasena u-kāralopo, anu anu avayo anūno, paripuṇṇasippoti attho. Vayoti hi hāni ‘‘āyavayo’’tiādīsu viya, natthi etassa yathāvuttaganthesu vayo ūnatāti avayo, anu anu avayo anavayoti.
为了显示“已被许可”一词依受动者施设之义,以及“已被承认”一词依主动者施设之义,注释者说“由老师……”等语。“其”指阿跋达的。为了显示经文中“我所知者,你亦知之”是表示许可之相,而“你所知者,我亦知之”是表示承认之相,故以“凡我……”等语说明。因为“是的,老师”这句话,依其含义,实为随顺所来之承认语。“那”指三明圣典。“其”指老师。给予回答本身就是承认,如此便自行承认了,此为其义。“自己的”等语,是显示许可与承认的范围。所谓“犹如为无教处者施设教处”,只是假名施设而已,故说“何者……”等语。自己的:属于自己的东西,即自有之物。老师的传承:从师承相传而来者,或由历代相传之师所传授者。三种明智,其总集称为三明典,即三吠陀。首要的话语,或最胜的话语,即阿达咖等的最胜言说,称为圣典。显示巴利原文
‘‘Anuññāto’’ti padassa kammasādhanavasena, ‘‘paṭiññāto’’ti padassa ca kattusādhanavasena atthaṃ dassento ‘‘ācariyenā’’tiādimāha. Assāti ambaṭṭhassa. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘yamahaṃ jānāmi, taṃ tvaṃ jānāsī’’ti idaṃ anujānanākāradassanaṃ, ‘‘yaṃ tvaṃ jānāsi, tamahaṃ jānāmī’’ti idaṃ pana paṭijānanākāradassananti dasseti ‘‘yaṃ aha’’ntiādinā. ‘‘Āma ācariyā’’ti hi yathāgataṃ paṭijānanavacanameva atthavasena vuttaṃ. Yanti tevijjakaṃ pāvacanaṃ. Tassāti ācariyassa. Paṭivacanadānameva paṭiññā tathā, tāya sayameva paṭiññātoti attho. ‘‘Sake’’tiādi anujānanapaṭijānanādhikāradassanaṃ. Adesassapi desamiva kappanāmattenāti vuttaṃ ‘‘katarasmi’’ntiādi. Sassa attano santakaṃ sakaṃ. Ācariyānaṃ paramparato, paramparabhūtehi vā ācariyehi āgataṃ ācariyakaṃ. Tisso vijjā, tāsaṃ samūho tevijjakaṃ, vedattayaṃ. Padhānaṃ vacanaṃ, pakaṭṭhānaṃ vā aṭṭhakādīnaṃ vacanaṃ pāvacanaṃ.
257 257. 现在,为阐明婆罗门沸伽罗娑提招呼阿跋达童子而说“此是父亲……”等语的用意,注释者便说了“据说此……”等语。其中,“出身高贵者”指往昔著名、享有声望的古代之人。“众多人”是指富兰那迦叶等辈。“某一类”指具有刹帝利等种姓者,或为世间所公认之人。“重”是沉重之义:即使仅仅让自己从中脱离、离去,也是难行之事,更何况更超乎其上的修行,这便是此处所要表达的意思。“无义”则指像这样离去等行为所招致的讥嫌、辱骂与呵责等。显示巴利原文
257. Idāni yenādhippāyena brāhmaṇo pokkharasātī ambaṭṭhaṃ māṇavaṃ āmantetvā ‘‘ayaṃ tātā’’tiādivacanamabrvi, tadadhippāyaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘esa kirā’’tiādimāha. Tattha uggatassāti pubbe pākaṭassa kittimato porāṇajanassa. Bahū janāti pūraṇakassapādayo sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ekaccanti khattiyādijātimantaṃ, lokasammataṃ vā janaṃ. Garūti bhāriyaṃ, attānaṃ tato mocetvā apagamanamattampi dukkaraṃ hoti, pageva taduttari karaṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Anattho nāma tathāpagamanādinā nindābyārosaupārambhādi.
在“已被传颂”一词中,由于与前缀“abhi”结合,“乔达摩”一词纯粹为描述其实际状态而用作受格。注释者以“彼具寿……既然如此”等语,显示在这些语句中,该词同样为描述其实际状态而用作受格——因为在这些语句中,它并非用作与格。因此才说“此处亦……”等语。“既然如此”:意思是,若具寿乔达摩确实以阿拉汉等状态如实安住于那名被传颂时的状态,那么这名声便是如实传颂——这便是它的含义。再者,“彼具寿乔达摩既然如此”——同一含义却以两次关联的方式表述,目的在于通过设立一般与特殊的区分,以阐明特定的意义。因此,“彼具寿乔达摩”应依一般关联之义独立划分,“既然如此”则应依特殊关联之义加以连结。此处“yadi”一词含有疑问意味,因为两种含义皆有待确认;“vā”一词含有选择意味,因为两者中有一项有待选定。然而,精通语法者如此说道:“如同‘此言或真或妄’等语句那样,这里‘yadi’与‘vā’两词皆用作选择义。”事实上,“yadi”一词在“无论到达何种集会——无论是刹帝利集会,还是婆罗门集会”等语句中(《显示巴利原文
‘‘Abbhuggato’’ti ettha abhisaddayogena itthambhūtākhyānatthavaseneva ‘‘gotama’’nti upayogavacanaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ bhavantaṃ, tathā santaṃyevā’’ti padesupi tassa anupayogattā tadatthavasenevāti dasseti ‘‘tassa bhoto’’tiādinā. Tenāha ‘‘idhāpī’’tiādi. Tathā satoyevāti yenākārena arahatādinā saddo abbhuggato, tenākārena santassa bhūtassa eva tassa bhavato gotamassa saddo yadi vā abbhuggatoti attho. Apica taṃ bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ tathā santaṃyevāti ekassapi atthassa dvikkhattuṃ sambandhabhāvena vacanaṃ sāmaññavisiṭṭhatāparikappanena atthavisesaviññāpanatthaṃ, tasmā ‘‘tassa bhoto gotamassā’’ti sāmaññasambandhabhāvena vicchinditvā ‘‘tathā satoyevā’’ti visesasambandhabhāvena yojetabbaṃ. Yadi-saddo cettha saṃsayattho dvinnampi atthānaṃ saṃsayitabbattā. Vā-saddo ca vikappanattho tesu ekassa vikappetabbattā. Saddavidū pana evaṃ vadanti – ‘‘imassa vacanaṃ saccaṃ vā yadi vā musā’’tiādīsu viya yadi-saddo vā-saddo ca ubhopi vikappatthāyeva. Yadi-saddopi hi ‘‘yaṃ yadeva parisaṃ upasaṅkamati yadi khattiyaparisaṃ yadi brāhmaṇaparisa’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 5.34) vā-saddattho dissati. ‘‘Appaṃ vassasataṃ āyu, idānetarahi vijjatī’’tiādīsu viya ca idha samānatthasaddapayogoti. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘yadi vā no tathā’’ti idampi ‘‘santaṃyeva saddo abbhuggato’’ti iminā sambajjhitvā yathāvuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Nanu ‘‘gotama’’nti padeyeva upayogavacanaṃ siyā, na etthāti codanāya ‘‘idhāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tassa anupayogattā, vicchinditvā sambandhavisesabhāvena yojetabbattā vā idhāpi itthambhūtākhyānatthavaseneva upayogavacanaṃ nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Itthambhūtākhyānaṃ attho yassa tathā, abhisaddo, itthambhūtākhyānameva vā attho tathā, soyevattho. Yadaggena hi saddayogo hoti, tadaggena atthayogopīti.
258 258. “尊者”是称呼自己的老师。为了使“如”一词具有意义,并与接下来的文句相连,故说“如所能……”等语。“他”指世尊。在前一种情况中,由于与表示相状的“如”词相应,所以仅是询问“如何”;而在此处,由于不与其相应,故说为“相状之问”。在外道传统中,对老师行依止师的仪礼,故说“于是,依止师……”,意思是指被称为依止师的老师婆罗门。显示巴利原文
258.Bhoti attano ācariyaṃ ālapati. Yathā-saddaṃ sātthakaṃ katvā saha pāṭhasesena yojetuṃ ‘‘yathā sakkā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Soti bhagavā. Purimanaye ākāratthajotanayathā-saddayogyato kathanti pucchāmattaṃ, idha pana tadayogyato ‘‘ākārapucchā’’ti vuttaṃ. Bāhirakasamaye ācariyamhi upajjhāyasamudācāroti āha ‘‘atha naṃ upajjhāyo’’ti, upajjhāyasaññito ācariyabrāhmaṇoti attho.
诚然,婆罗门,咒语与仪轨构成了三吠陀,然而,以阿他婆等所说的根本部分——即核心——为咒语,对其义理的阐明为梵书,其中依所说方式对祭祀行为的制定为仪轨。因为咒语是核心,其余二者依止于它而生起,所以通过提及咒语,梵书和仪轨的包含也就自然成立了——这是用“在三吠陀中”这句话来表明的。因为“咒语”正是由阿他婆等仙人所说的根本吠陀的名称,而“吠陀”则指全部,所以应当了知:当说“在吠陀中”时,便包含了一切。所谓“诸相”,即阐明诸相的咒语文句。以偈颂、韵律、组合、插入等方式编入后。即婆罗门的外相——诵持吠陀的婆罗门标志。“Vede”指关于大人相的咒语。“有大威德的众生”指具有大福德的有智众生。“他们将会知晓”——如此作意后而教授,这是句子的连接。“由此”即由于那样教授。“以前”指从应说“如来将出现”之时起,直至如来住世期间。它们以应被学习、应被教授的状态而流传,变得显著。以一首偈、两首偈等方式,次第隐没。显示巴利原文
Kāmañca manto, brahmaṃ, kappoti tibbidho vedo, tathāpi aṭṭhakādi vuttaṃ padhānabhūtaṃ mūlaṃ manto, tadatthavivaraṇamatthaṃ brahmaṃ, tattha vuttanayena yaññakiriyāvidhānaṃ kappoti mantasseva padhānabhāvato, itaresañca tannissayeneva jātattā mantaggahaṇena brahmakappānampi gahaṇaṃ siddhamevāti dasseti ‘‘tīsu vedesū’’ti iminā. Mantoti hi aṭṭhakādīhi isīhi vuttamūlavedasseva nāmaṃ, vedoti sabbassa, tasmā ‘‘vedesū’’ti vutte sabbesampi gahaṇaṃ sijjhatīti veditabbaṃ. Lakkhaṇānīti lakkhaṇadīpakāni mantapadāni. Pajjagajjabandhapavesanavasena pakkhipitvā. Brāhmaṇavesenevāti vedavācakabrāhmaṇaliṅgeneva. Vedeti mahāpurisalakkhaṇamante. Mahesakkhā sattāti mahāpuññavanto paṇḍitasattā. Jānissanti iti manasi katvā vācentīti sambandho. Tenāti tathā vācanato. Pubbeti ‘‘tathāgato uppajjissatī’’ti vattabbakālato pabhuti tathāgatassa dharamānakāle. Ajjhāyitabbavācetabbabhāvena āgacchanti pākaṭā bhavanti. Ekagāthādvigāthādivasena anukkamena antaradhāyanti. Na kevalaṃ lakkhaṇamantāyeva, atha kho aññepi vedā brāhmaṇānaṃ aññāṇabhāvena anukkamena antaradhāyanti evāti ācariyena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.258) vuttaṃ.
对佛位的希求是愿(paṇidhi),对波罗蜜的积累是正受(samādāna),对业自性等的智慧是智(ñāṇa)。论师说:‘应以大愿、大正受等,将“大”字分别与各项结合。’(长部疏1.258)如此,则慈等是那些信、戒等的起始,故为慈等;这些功德即是慈等功德。愿、正受、智以及慈等功德,由这些而成为大,故应解释为‘大愿、大正受、大智、大慈等功德’。这样,‘大’字在并列复合词之后,被分别结合于各项。再者,愿、正受、智与慈,以此为起始的那些即是如此,这些正是功德,由这些功德而成为大——以此解释,义理也很妥当。而其大愿性等,应依《佛种姓》(佛种姓9等)、《行藏》(行藏1等)来了解。然而在《大本经》的义注中则说:‘大人者,即由出身、种姓、家族、地域等而成为大的人。’(长部义注2.33)其中,‘刹帝利、婆罗门’等是出身。‘憍陈如、乔达摩’等是种姓。‘波尼迦、奇卡利迦、释迦、拘利’等是家族地域。应知这一切在此都被‘等’字所包含。如此,则‘只有两种趣向’这一对两者共通的说法便得到了合理的成立。显示巴利原文
Buddhabhāvapatthanā paṇidhi, pāramīsambharaṇaṃ samādānaṃ, kammassakatādipaññā ñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Paṇidhimahato samādānamahatotiādinā paccekaṃ mahantasaddo yojetabbo’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.258) ācariyena vuttaṃ. Evañca sati karuṇā ādi yesaṃ saddhāsīlādīnaṃ te karuṇādayo, te eva guṇā karuṇādiguṇā, paṇidhi ca samādānañca ñāṇañca karuṇādiguṇā ca, tehi mahanto paṇidhisamādānañāṇakaruṇādiguṇamahantoti nibbacanaṃ kātabbaṃ. Evañhi dvandatoparattā mahantasaddo paccekaṃ yojīyatīti. Apica paṇidhi ca samādānañca ñāṇañca karuṇā ca, tamādi yesaṃ te tathā, teyeva guṇā, tehi mahantoti nibbacanenapi attho sūpapanno hoti, paṇidhimahantatādi cassa buddhavaṃsa (bu. vaṃ. 9 ādayo) cariyāpiṭakādi (cariyā. 1 ādayo) vasena veditabbo. Mahāpadānasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘mahāpurisassāti jātigottakulapadesādivasena mahantassa purisassā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33) vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘khattiyo, brāhmaṇo’’ti evamādi jāti. ‘‘Koṇḍañño, gotamo’’ti evamādi gottaṃ. ‘‘Poṇikā, cikkhallikā, sākiyā, koliyā’’ti evamādi kulapadeso, tadetaṃ sabbampi idha ādisaddena saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evañhi sati ‘‘dveyeva gatiyo bhavantī’’ti ubhinnaṃ sādhāraṇavacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hotīti.
‘Niṭṭhā’即完成、成就。难道这个‘gati’一词不是多义的吗?为什么只说是‘完成’呢?——为了回答,说‘诚然,此词……’等。在‘有之差别’中,即地狱等有之差别中。因为那是众生依善恶业而受生所应去之处,故为‘趣’。‘所去之处’——于彼处而转起,故为‘趣’,即住处。‘以如实之性而了知’为‘趣’,即智慧。‘遍行、周遍’为‘趣’,即散布的状态,那正是遍及此处彼处而安住的状态。‘行、成就’为‘趣’,即完成。作为‘意趣、皈依处’之义,也以举例的方式被采用。正如:‘诸比丘,我不知这些具戒、有善法的比丘们的来处或去处。’(中部1.508)此处‘趣’用于‘意趣’。‘涅槃是阿罗汉的趣’(无碍解道339)此处用于‘皈依处’,即无有依着的庇护所之义。‘随其所欲而转起’为‘趣’,即意趣。‘去、入’,或依入处而转起于彼处,故为‘趣’,即皈依处。因为对于超越一切行、离一切想的阿罗汉,只有涅槃是皈依处。然而在此处,应知‘gati’是用于‘完成’之义,因为其他义在此不适用。显示巴利原文
Niṭṭhāti nipphattiyo siddhiyo. Nanvāyaṃ gati-saddo anekattho, kasmā niṭṭhāyameva vuttoti āha‘‘kāmañcāya’’ntiādi. Bhavabhedeti nirayādibhavavisese. So hi sucaritaduccaritakammena sattehi upapajjanavasena gantabbāti gati. Gacchati pavattati etthāti gati, nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ. Gamati yathāsabhāvaṃ jānātīti gati. Paññā, gamanaṃ byāpanaṃ gati, vissaṭabhāvo, so pana ito ca etto ca byāpetvā ṭhitatāva. Gamanaṃ nipphattanaṃ gati, niṭṭhā , ajjhāsayapaṭisaraṇatthāpi nidassananayena gahitā. Tathā hesa ‘‘imesaṃ kho ahaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sīlavantānaṃ kalyāṇadhammānaṃ neva jānāmi āgatiṃ vā gatiṃ vā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.508) ettha ajjhāsaye vattati, ‘‘nibbānaṃ arahato gatī’’ti (pari. 339) ettha paṭisaraṇe, parāyaṇe apassayeti attho. Gacchati yathāruci pavattatīti gati, ajjhāsayo. Gacchati avacarati, avacaraṇavasena vā pavattati etthāti gati, paṭisaraṇaṃ. Sabbasaṅkhatavisaññuttassa hi arahato nibbānameva paṭisaraṇaṃ, idha pana niṭṭhāyaṃ vattatīti veditabbo tadaññesamavisayattā.
有人质疑:两种成就的相状——作为其征相的诸相好——难道不是各不相同的吗?那为何又以“凡具足这些相好者……”等说法,称它们具有相似性呢?在点出这一问难的苗头之后,为了消除它,便说“其中,虽……”等。为了表明即使在尼拘律树身、频婆果色等相好上存在共同点,二者之间仍有一定差别,因此说“并非单凭那些相好就成为佛陀”。至于“诸佛的相好极为清晰、极为分明、极为圆满,而转轮圣王的相好则不是这样”——这一差别由阿阇梨法护长老阐明。‘jāti’(种类):就算所指的意义不同,能指的名称却可无差别地用于其上,因此称为“种类”,即仅仅是相好共性的状态。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Nanu dvinnaṃ nipphattīnaṃ nimittabhūtāni lakkhaṇāni visadisāneva, atha kasmā ‘‘yehi samannāgatassā’’tiādinā tesaṃ sadisabhāvo vuttoti codanālesaṃ dassetvā sodhento ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādimāha. Samānepi nigrodhabimbatādilakkhaṇabhāve attheva koci nesaṃ visesoti dassetuṃ ‘‘na teheva buddho hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yathā hi buddhānaṃ lakkhaṇāni suvisadāni, suparibyattāni, paripuṇṇāni ca honti, na evaṃ cakkavattīna’’nti ayaṃ pana viseso ācariyadhammapālattherena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.258) pakāsito. Jāyanti bhinnesupi atthesu abhinnadhīsaddā etāyāti jāti, lakkhaṇabhāvamattaṃ. Vuttañhi –
“面对花斑等种种相异之物, 此中何者运转而无差别之认知—— 那些词语,即是‘种类’, 恰如花鬘之线贯穿其中。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabalādīsu bhinnesu, yāya vattantubhinnadhī; Saddā sā jātiresā ca, mālāsuttamivanvitā’’ti.
因此,此语之义为:以具足相状为其共同的本质,虽那些诸相原本各不相同,却因同为转轮王成就之缘相,而视之如一类;由此,将其说为佛陀成就之缘相。又,于“adhi”前缀结合时,处格之义用业格来表达,故说“住于家中”——即以四种稀有之法:端严之相、长寿、少病、为婆罗门及居士所敬爱,以此四种具稀有性的神变而住。如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Tasmā lakkhaṇatāmattena samānabhāvato visadisānipi tāniyeva cakkavattinipphattinimittabhūtāni lakkhaṇāni sadisāni viya katvā tāni buddhanipphattinimittabhūtāni lakkhaṇāni nāmāti idaṃ vacanaṃ vuccatīti attho. Adhiāpubbavasayoge bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘agāre vasatī’’ti catūhi acchariyadhammehīti abhirūpatā, dīghāyukatā, appābādhatā, brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṃ piyamanāpatāti imehi catūhi acchariyasabhāvabhūtāhi iddhīhi. Yathāha –
“阿难,大善见王具足四种神变。何等为四?阿难,大善见王容貌端严、可观、令人欢喜……”等(《长部》第2册第252段)。显示巴利原文
‘‘Rājā ānanda, mahāsudassano catūhi iddhīhi samannāgato ahosi. Katamāhi catūhi iddhīhi? Idhānanda, rājā mahāsudassano abhirūpo ahosi dassanīyo pāsādiko’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.252).
又依《支提本生经》(本生义注 3.8.44)所述之理,亦作如是说:“身上散发栴檀香,此为第一神变;口中散发优钵罗花香,此为第二神变;四位天子于四方恒时持剑守护,此为第三神变;行于虚空,此为第四神变。”然于《未来种姓释》中说:“端严之相为一神变,具足等熟消化力为第二神变,尽形寿令一切世间观之无厌的相状为第三神变,行于虚空的相状为第四神变。”其中,“具足等熟消化力”者,即具足能令食物平等消化的业生火界。盖有人食后随即消化,有人则如囊中贮食,停滞不化,此二者皆不名为具足等熟消化力。若于受食之时仍复生起食欲者,乃名具足等熟消化力,其相如是。至于摄事,即是布施、爱语、利行、同事这些摄受之法。如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Cetiyajātake (jā. aṭṭha. 3.8.44) āgatanayaṃ gahetvāpi evaṃ vadanti ‘‘sarīrato candanagandho vāyati, ayaṃ ekā iddhi. Mukhato uppalagandho vāyati, ayaṃ dutiyā. Cattāro devaputtā catūsu disāsu sabbakālaṃ khaggahatthā ārakkhaṃ gaṇhanti, ayaṃ tatiyā. Ākāsena vicarati, ayaṃ catutthī’’ti. Anāgatavaṃsasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ pana ‘‘abhirūpabhāvo ekā iddhi, samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā samannāgatabhāvo dutiyā, yāvatāyukampi sakalalokassa dassanātittikabhāvo tatiyā, ākāsacāribhāvo catutthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā samannāgatabhāvoti samavipācaniyā kammajatejodhātuyā sampannatā. Yassa hi bhuttamattova āhāro jīrati, yassa vā pana puṭabhattaṃ viya tatheva tiṭṭhati, ubhopete na samavepākiniyā samannāgatā. Yassa pana puna bhattakāle bhattacchando uppajjateva, ayaṃ samavepākiniyā samannāgato nāma, tathārūpatāti attho. Saṅgahavatthūhīti dānaṃ, piyavacanaṃ, atthacariyā, samānattatāti imehi saṅgahopāyehi. Yathāha –
布施与爱语,以及此世间之利行;
于诸法中行同事,处处随宜而行;
这些乃世间之摄事,犹如车行时之轮轴。
如果没有这些摄事,母亲不会因为子女
得到恭敬或供养,父亲也不会因为子女。
因此,他们获得崇高,成为可称赞者。」(长部3.273)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dānañca peyyavajjañca, atthacariyā ca yā idha; Samānattatā ca dhammesu, tattha tattha yathārahaṃ; Ete kho saṅgahā loke, rathassāṇīva yāyato. Ete ca saṅgahā nāssu, na mātā puttakāraṇā; Labhetha mānaṃ pūjaṃ vā, pitā vā puttakāraṇā. Yasmā ca saṅgahā ete, samapekkhanti paṇḍitā; Tasmā mahattaṃ papponti, pāsaṃsā ca bhavanti te’’ti. (dī. ni. 3.273);
「令欢喜」:是以喜与悦令欢喜,非以贪爱令欢喜,意指生起喜与悦。而以四种摄事令欢喜之义称为“王”,是一切国王的通称;即使他们并未如此实行,也如同将竹篾扇等称为“多罗叶扇”一样,是依惯用而转起的。因此,将「以希有之法」作为不共通的词释,应如此了知。显示巴利原文
Rañjanatoti pītisomanassavasena rañjanato, na rāgavasena, pītisomanassānaṃ jananatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi rañjanaṭṭhena rājāti pana sabbesaṃ rājūnaṃ samaññā tathā akarontānampi vilīvabījanādīsu tālavaṇṭavohāro viya ruḷhivasena pavattito, tasmā ‘‘acchariyadhammehī’’ti asādhāraṇanibbacanaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
为了显示「转轮王」一词依词力而有多种词义,先阐明其主要词义,故说「轮宝」等。此即主要者,因为若无轮宝的转动,便不成其为转轮王。正如义释中所说:“怎样是转轮王?轮宝升入空中转动,乃至一、二指许。”(长部义释2.243;中部义释3.256)然而,因为转轮王偏袒上衣,以左手举起如象鼻的金瓶,以右手掬水洒轮宝,说:“尊贵的轮宝,请转动!尊贵的轮宝,请征服!”(长部2.244)以此语令轮宝升入空中转动,故从令其转动之义而说“令轮宝转”。如经所说:“那时,阿难,大善见王从座而起……乃至……掬水洒轮宝:‘尊贵的轮宝,请转动!’”等(长部2.244)。再者,“轮”字并非仅用于轮宝,也用于成就轮等,因此依据各各表义之词力,显示其词义,而说“以成就轮”等。其中,“以成就轮”者——显示巴利原文
Saddasāmatthiyato anekadhā cakkavattīsaddassa vacanatthaṃ dassento padhānabhūtaṃ vacanatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cakkaratana’’ntiādimāha. Idameva hi padhānaṃ cakkaratanassa pavattanamantarena cakkavattibhāvānāpattito. Tathā hi aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ ‘‘kittāvatā cakkavattī hotīti? Ekaṅguladvaṅgulamattampi cakkaratane ākāsaṃ abbhuggantvā pavatte’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.243; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.256). Yasmā pana rājā cakkavattī ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā vāmahatthena hatthisoṇḍasadisapanāḷiṃ suvaṇṇabhiṅkāraṃ ukkhipitvā dakkhiṇahatthena cakkaratanaṃ udakena abbhukkiritvā ‘‘pavattatu bhavaṃ cakkaratanaṃ, abhivijinātu bhavaṃ cakkaratana’’nti (dī. ni. 2.244) vacanena cakkaratanaṃ vehāsaṃ abbhuggantvā pavattesi, tasmā tādisaṃ pavattāpanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘cakkaratanaṃ vattetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘atha kho ānanda rājā mahāsudassano uṭṭhāyāsanā…pe… cakkaratanaṃ abbhukkiri ‘pavattatu bhavaṃ cakkaratana’nti’’ādi (dī. ni. 2.244). Na kevalañca cakkasaddo cakkarataneyeva vattati atha kho sampatticakkādīsupi, tasmā taṃtadatthavācakasaddasāmatthiyatopi vacanatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘sampatticakkehī’’tiādinā. Tattha sampatticakkehīti –
住于适宜之地,亲近善友,
人具足正愿,往昔曾作福业,
谷米、财宝、名声、称誉与安乐,皆随逐此人。」(增支部 4.31)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Patirūpe vase dese, ariyamittakaro siyā; Sammāpaṇidhisampanno, pubbe puññakato naro; Dhaññaṃ dhanaṃ yaso kitti, sukhañcetaṃdhivattatī’’ti. (a. ni. 4.31) –
即以之前所说的住于适宜之地等成就轮而转起。‘转’即转起、成就,或修习更为殊胜的善法。‘以他们’即以这些成就轮。‘令转’即令转起、令成就,或令向上修习善法。当知如同‘自’字唯表纯粹作者之义,‘他’字(此处指经文中的“令转”之主语)亦表因作者之义,即对有情的聚合令他转起。显示巴利原文
Vuttehi patirūpadesavāsādisampatticakkehi. Vattatīti pavattati sampajjati, uparūpari kusaladhammaṃ vā paṭipajjati. Tehīti sampatticakkehi. Paranti sattanikāyaṃ, yathā sayaṃsaddo suddhakattutthassa jotako, tathā paraṃsaddopi hetukattutthassāti veditabbaṃ. Vattetīti pavatteti sampādeti, uparūpari kusaladhammaṃ vā paṭipajjāpeti. Yathāha –
大善见王如是说:‘不得杀生,不得取不与物,不得于欲邪行,不得说妄语,不得饮酒,并应如量而食。’阿难,东方等地的诸小王,皆成为大善见王的随从。”(长部 2.244)显示巴利原文
‘‘Rājā mahāsudassano evamāha ‘pāṇo na hantabbo, adinnaṃ na ādātabbaṃ, kāmesu micchā na caritabbā, musā na bhaṇitabbā, majjaṃ na pātabbaṃ, yathābhuttañca bhuñjathā’ti. Ye kho panānanda puratthimāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rañño mahāsudassanassa anuyantā ahesu’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 2.244).
‘威仪轮’意为作为威仪的轮。因为威仪也被称为‘轮’,如‘四轮、九门’等(相应部 1.29, 109)。如经所说:显示巴利原文
Iriyāpathacakkānanti iriyāpathabhūtānaṃ cakkānaṃ. Iriyāpathopi hi ‘‘cakka’’nti vuccati ‘‘catucakkaṃ navadvāra’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.29, 109). Yathāha –
在车辋、相、法轮、威仪路中,
轮在成就、轮宝、圆轮、力中,
在陶师器、命令、幻术、布施之堆聚中。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Rathaṅge lakkhaṇe dhammo-racakkesviriyāpathe; Cakkaṃ sampattiyaṃ cakka-ratane maṇḍale bale; Kulālabhaṇḍe āṇāya-māyudhe dānarāsisū’’ti.
“Vattoti”的意思是转动、生起,由此也显示其词源:转动四威仪之轮,为利他而生起,因为意义相同。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Vattoti pavattanaṃ uppajjanaṃ, imināva iriyāpathacakkaṃ vatteti parahitāya uppādetīti nibbacanampi dasseti atthato samānattā. Tathā cāha –
“那时,阿难,轮宝转向东方,转轮王摩诃须达善即率领四支军队一同随行。阿难,在轮宝停驻之处,转轮王摩诃须达善便与四支军队一同安住。”等等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha kho taṃ ānanda cakkaratanaṃ puratthimaṃ disaṃ pavatti, anvadeva rājā mahāsudassano saddhiṃ caturaṅginiyā senāya. Yasmiṃ kho panānanda, padese cakkaratanaṃ patiṭṭhāsi, tattha rājā mahāsudassano vāsaṃ upagacchi saddhiṃ caturaṅginiyā senāyā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.244).
这是与注释书不同的另一种解释:转动无可阻挡的敕令之轮,故为转轮王。如所说——显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ aṭṭhakathāto aparo nayo – appaṭihataṃ āṇāsaṅkhātaṃ cakkaṃ vattetīti cakkavattī. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
诸比丘,具足五法的转轮王依法转动轮宝,此轮宝不为任何人类怨敌以手所逆转。哪五种?诸比丘,于此,转轮王是知义者、知法者、知量者、知时者、知众者。具足这些……以手……”等等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pañcahi bhikkhave dhammehi samannāgato rājā cakkavattī dhammeneva cakkaṃ vatteti, taṃ hoti cakkaṃ appaṭivattiyaṃ kenaci manussabhūtena paccatthikena pāṇinā. Katamehi pañcahi? Idha bhikkhave rājā cakkavattī atthaññū ca hoti, dhammaññū ca mattaññū, ca kālaññū ca parisaññū ca. Imehi kho…pe… pāṇinā’’tiādi (a. ni. 5.131).
又因他使名为刹帝利众等的“轮”,即部众,在自己掌控下运转、随转,故为转轮王。如曾说:“阿难,东方诸敌国国王,皆成为摩诃须达善王的随从。”等等。因轮相现于此身,故为转轮王。故说:“尊者,此王子足下生有千辐、辋、毂,一切形相圆满之轮宝。”等等。又因大人之轮相现于此身,故为转轮王。亦曾言:“尊者,此王子身有七处隆满……尊者,此王子上半身如狮子。”等等。以此相可知其有大力量。又因他行持十种或十二种轮转之法,故为转轮王。故说:“孩子,天界的那轮宝并非你父的遗产。来吧,孩子,你当行持圣者的转轮王之行。”等等。又因他转动、推行大布施之轮,故为转轮王。并说——显示巴利原文
Khattiyamaṇḍalādisaññitaṃ cakkaṃ samūhaṃ attano vase vatteti anuvattetītipi cakkavattī. Vuttañhi ‘‘ye kho panānanda puratthimāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rañño mahāsudassanassa anuyantā ahesu’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 2.244). Cakkalakkhaṇaṃ vattati etassātipi cakkavattī. Tenāha ‘‘imassa deva kumārassa heṭṭhā pādatalesu cakkāni jātāni sahassārāni sanemikāni sanābhikāni sabbākāraparipūrānī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.35). Cakkaṃ mahantaṃ kāyabalaṃ vattati etassātipi cakkavattī. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘ayañhi deva kumāro sattussado…pe… ayañhi deva kumāro sīhapubbaddhakāyo’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.35). Tena hissa lakkhaṇena mahabbalabhāvo viññāyati. Cakkaṃ dasavidhaṃ, dvādasavidhaṃ vā vattadhammaṃ vattati paṭipajjatīti cakkavattī. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘na hi te tāta dibbaṃ cakkaratanaṃ pettikaṃ dāyajjaṃ , iṅgha tvaṃ tāta ariye cakkavattivatte vattāhī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 3.83). Cakkaṃ mahantaṃ dānaṃ vatteti pavattetītipi cakkavattī. Vuttañca –
阿难,摩诃须达善王在那些莲花池岸边设立了如是布施:施食与求食者,施饮与求饮者,施衣与求衣者,施车乘与求车乘者,施卧具与求卧具者,施女与求女者,施金与求金者,施黄金与求黄金者。”等等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Paṭṭhapesi kho ānanda rājā mahāsudassano tāsaṃ pokkharaṇīnaṃ tīre evarūpaṃ dānaṃ annaṃ annatthikassa, pānaṃ pānatthikassa, vatthaṃ vatthatthikassa, yānaṃ yānatthikassa, sayanaṃ sayanatthikassa, itthiṃ itthitthikassa, hiraññaṃ hiraññatthikassa, suvaṇṇaṃ suvaṇṇatthikassā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.254).
“王”是通称,因与其他(诸王)共通。“转轮王”是别称,因不与其他人共通。“法”字指如理、平等,而如理即名为平等,故说“以如理、平等”。“转动”意为生起,或行持。即使未明说“行此”,由于通称的指示确立于别称,且别称应运用别义,故结合为“自利与利他”。若不取其部分,则所取者便被理解为没有部分,如“受戒者不布施”的说法。因为转轮王唯依法获得王位,而非以非法、伤害他人等方式。故说“依法得王位后”等,“依法”即如理,或以善法。王的状态即王位、自在。显示巴利原文
Rājāti sāmaññaṃ tadaññasādhāraṇato. Cakkavattīti visesaṃ anaññasādhāraṇato. Dhammasaddo ñāye, samo eva ca ñāyo nāmāti āha ‘‘ñāyena samenā’’ti. Vattati uppajjati, paṭipajjatīti vā attho. ‘‘Idaṃ nāma caratī’’ti avuttepi sāmaññajotanāya visese avaṭṭhānato, visesatthinā ca visesassa payujjitabbattā ‘‘sadatthaparatthe’’ti yojīyati. Padesaggahaṇe hi asati gahetabbassa nippadesatā viññāyati yathā ‘‘dikkhito na dadātī’’ti. Yasmā cakkavattirājā dhammeneva rajjamadhigacchati, na adhammena parūpaghātādinā. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammena rajjaṃ labhitvā’’tiādi, dhammenāti ca ñāyena, kusaladhammena vā. Rañño bhāvo rajjaṃ, issariyaṃ.
作利益他人之方便的法,或行持此法,故为“有法者”。作利益自己之方便的法,或行持此法的王,故为“法王”——以此显示这含有差别的意义,即“以作利他之法故”等。而这是《大本经》注释书的方法:致力于十种善法,或不离无过失的王法,故为“有法者”;即以此法令世人欢喜,故为“法王”。其实这两个词是同义语。然而阿阇梨这样说:“行持称为转轮王行的法,或称为转轮王行的法属于他、存在于他,故为‘有法者’;因不离法,故是‘法’,且以令欢喜之义是‘王’,故为‘法王’。”由于说“是转轮王”,故“四边”一词阐明四洲之自在,所以说“四边……”等。以四大海为边际、为究竟,故为“四边”,即大地。因为大地在四方以东海等四大海为究竟,故如此说。因此说“以四大海为界”,而它是以四种洲为组成部分所庄严的、属于一个世界的大地——以此句“以四种洲所庄严的大地”显示。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Paresaṃ hitopāyabhūtaṃ dhammaṃ karoti, caratīti vā dhammiko. Attano hitopāyabhūtassa dhammassa kārako, carako vā rājāti dhammarājāti imaṃ savisesaṃ atthaṃ dasseti ‘‘parahitadhammakaraṇena vā’’tiādinā. Ayaṃ pana mahāpadānaṭṭhakathānayo – dasavidhe kusaladhamme, agatirahite vā rājadhamme niyuttoti dhammiko; teneva dhammena lokaṃ rañjetīti dhammarājā. Pariyāyavacanameva hi idaṃ padadvayanti. Ācariyena pana evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘cakkavattivattasaṅkhātaṃ dhammaṃ carati, cakkavattivattasaṅkhāto vā dhammo etassa, etasmiṃ vā atthīti dhammiko, dhammato anapetattā dhammo ca so rañjanaṭṭhena rājā cāti dhammarājā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.258). ‘‘Rājā hoti cakkavattī’’ti vacanato ‘‘cāturanto’’ti idaṃ catudīpissarataṃ vibhāvetīti āha ‘‘cāturantāyā’’tiādi. Cattāro samuddā antā pariyosānā etissāti cāturantā, pathavī. Sā hi catūsu disāsu puratthimasamuddādicatusamuddapariyosānattā evaṃ vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘catusamudda antāyā’’ti, sā pana avayavabhūtehi catubbidhehi dīpehi vibhūsitā ekalokadhātupariyāpannā pathavīyevāti dasseti ‘‘catubbidhadīpavibhūsitāya pathaviyā’’ti iminā. Yathāha –
“凡是日月所运行之处,光芒四射,照耀诸方;
一切众生,乃至依地而住的所有有情,皆为曼达度王之奴仆。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yāvatā candimasūriyā, pariharanti disā bhanti virocanā; Sabbeva dāsā mandhātu, ye ca pāṇā pathavissitā’’ti.
此处,不说“以四洲庄严”,而说“以四种洲庄严”。取“种”字,意在将各各五百小岛也摄入大洲之中:因为词语的过剩显示了意义的过剩,又或以表示部分的“种”字摄取了同类部分,应如此理解。“以忿怒等为怨敌”中,“等”字摄取了贪欲、愚痴、慢、骄等。“战胜”是依彼时而说的现在时动词,意为已战胜,因为通晓音韵者对于过去时也期望用“tāvī”字。说“战胜一切王”时,虽然转轮王实际上并无战斗,但为了成就须通过战斗而得的胜利,故说“已战胜战斗”。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ‘‘catudīpavibhūsitāyā’’ti avatvā catubbidhadīpavibhūsitāyāti vidhasaddaggahaṇaṃ paccekaṃ pañcasataparittadīpānampi mahādīpeyeva saṅgahaṇatthaṃ saddātirittena atthātirittassa viññāyamānattā, koṭṭhāsavācakena vā vidhasaddena samānabhāgānaṃ gahitattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kopādipaccatthiketi ettha ādisaddena kāmamohamānamadādike saṅgaṇhāti. Vijetīti taṃkālāpekkhāya vattamānavacanaṃ, vijitavāti attho. Saddavidū hi atīte tāvīsaddamicchanti. ‘‘Sabbarājāno vijetī’’ti vadanto kāmaṃ cakkavattino kenaci yuddhaṃ nāma natthi, yuddhena pana sādhetabbassa vijayassa siddhiyā ‘‘vijitasaṅgāmo’’ tveva vuttoti dasseti.
“稳固、恒常的状态”称为“稳固性”,如说“在国土中获得稳固性”。为显示此义,而说“不能被任何……所……”等语。以“不能被任何所动摇”之义,显示“在国土中获得稳固性”,这是依主释(tappurisa)复合词;另一种复合词,则是以“国土于此(国王)中,因坚固的忠诚而获得稳固性”来解释,此为多财释(aññapadatthasamāsa)。“在此中”即指在这位国王之中。为显示国土如何于彼中获得稳固性,又说“随侍”等语。其中,“随侍”指常时随从。“专精己业”指恒常致力于转轮王之事。“不动”与“不震”是同义词;或者可解为:因盗贼仅有劫掠而不动,因叛乱而不震;或因盗贼而不动,因敌对国王而不震;或因不过于柔软而不动,因不过于严酷而不震。因为,过于严酷的国王以强征税收等压迫人民时,人们会舍弃中部国土,依止于山岳、海岸等处,迁居边地;过于柔弱的国王,其人民被盗贼、暴徒劫掠所压迫时,则会舍弃边地,而居于国土中部。像这样的国王,其国土不能获得稳固性。然而,当这位国王远离此两者,如同金秤般达到平等状态时——显示巴利原文
Thāvarassa dhuvassa bhāvo thāvariyaṃ, yathā janapade thāvariyaṃ patto, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘na sakkā kenacī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, iminā kenaci akampiyaṭṭhena janapade thāvariyappattoti tappurisasamāsaṃ dasseti, itarena ca daḷhabhattibhāvato janapado thāvariyappatto etasminti aññapadatthasamāsaṃ. Tamhīti asmiṃ rājini. Yathā janapado tasmiṃ thāvariyaṃ patto, tadāvikaronto ‘‘anuyutto’’tiādimāha. Tattha anuyuttoti niccapayutto. Sakammaniratoti cakkavattino rajjakamme sadā pavatto . Acalo asampavedhīti pariyāyavacanametaṃ, corānaṃ vā vilopanamattena acalo, dāmarikattena asampavedhī. Corehi vā acalo, paṭirājūhi asampavedhī. Anatimudubhāvena vā acalo, anaticaṇḍabhāvena asampavedhī. Tathā hi aticaṇḍassa rañño balikhaṇḍādīhi lokaṃ pīḷayato manussā majjhimajanapadaṃ chaḍḍetvā pabbatasamuddatīrādīni nissāya paccante vāsaṃ kappenti, atimudukassa ca rañño corasāhasikajanavilopapīḷitā manussā paccantaṃ pahāya janapadamajjhe vāsaṃ kappenti, iti evarūpe rājini janapado thāvarabhāvaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Etasmiṃ pana tadubhayavirahite suvaṇṇatulā viya samabhāvappatte rājini rajjaṃ kārayamāne janapado pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhapetvā ayopaṭṭena parikkhitto viya acalo asampavedhī thāvariyappattoti.
“Seyyathidaṃ”是一个不变词,它根据情况,随性、格、数的不同,而以“那个是什么,那个是什么,那个是什么”等方式被使用。在此处,它与“那些是什么”相搭配,故说“他的这些”等语。“轮”,因转轮王的宝轮能随其所欲旋转、行于空中等处,故称为“轮”。因为轮宝是依其内在生起的风界之力,在转轮圣王话语刚落时即刻运转,而非如日月天宫等那样依赖外在生起的风界之力。“能生喜乐之义”,即能产生喜悦与满足之义。因为见到、听到它时,由于其稀有之法性,会产生无量的喜悦与满足。而在词源学上,“令喜乐,作喜乐”,故为“宝”;或说“喜乐”为“rata”,引导彼者为“ratana”;或说产生“喜乐”者为“ratana”,通过省略“ja”字母而形成,词源学家做此说。“于一切处”,指于象宝等之中。显示巴利原文
Seyyathidanti ekova nipāto, ‘‘so katamo, taṃ katamaṃ, sā katamā’’tiādinā yathārahaṃ liṅgavibhattivacanavasena payojiyamānova hoti, idha tāni katamānīti payuttoti āha ‘‘tassa cetānī’’tiādi. Cacati cakkavattino yathāruci ākāsādigamanāya paribbhamatīti cakkaṃ. Cakkaratanañhi antosamuṭṭhitavāyodhātuvasena rañño cakkavattissa vacanasamanantarameva pavattati, na candasūriyavimānādi viya bahisamuṭṭhitavāyodhātuvasenāti vimānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vi. va. aṭṭha. 1.paṭhamapīṭhavimānavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ. Ratijananaṭṭhenāti pītisomanassuppādanaṭṭhena. Tañhi passantassa, suṇantassa ca anappakaṃ pītisomanassaṃ uppajjati acchariyadhammattā. Vacanatthato pana rameti ratiṃ karotīti ratanaṃ, ramanaṃ vā rataṃ, taṃ netīti ratanaṃ, rataṃ vā janetīti ratanaṃ ja-kāralopavasenātipi neruttikā. Sabbatthāti hatthiratanādīsu.
轮的“宝”之义,也可通过“被尊重”等含义来理解。然而,由于它被“能生喜乐”这一含义所统一涵盖,故未单独列出。何以故?因为“被尊重”等状态也是喜乐之因。或者,也应理解为,为了避免论著冗长,作者未列出“被尊重”等状态的含义。而在其他注释书中,则有如下表述:显示巴利原文
Cittīkatabhāvādināpi cakkassa ratanaṭṭho veditabbo, so pana ratijananaṭṭheneva ekasaṅgahatāya visuṃ na gahito. Kasmā ekasaṅgahoti ce? Cittīkatādibhāvassapi ratinimittattā. Atha vā ganthabyāsaṃ pariharitukāmena cittīkatādibhāvo na gahitoti veditabbaṃ. Aññāsu pana aṭṭhakathāsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.223; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 6.3.yānīdhātigāthāvaṇṇanā; su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.226; mahāni. aṭṭha. 156) evaṃ vuttaṃ –
“以能生喜乐的含义而称为‘宝’。再者——显示巴利原文
‘‘Ratijananaṭṭhena ratanaṃ. Apica –
恭敬尊重、价值巨大、无可比拟、难得一见
为最胜有情所受用,故称为‘宝’。
显示巴利原文 Cittīkataṃ mahagghañca, atulaṃ dullabhadassanaṃ; Anomasattaparibhogaṃ, ratanaṃ tena vuccati.
自轮宝出现之时起,世人便不再另行供养其他天神,皆以香、花等物唯对轮宝作供养、礼拜,由此具足‘恭敬尊重’之义,故名为宝。轮宝的价值无可估量,由此具足‘价值巨大’之义,亦名为宝。轮宝与世间存在的任何宝物皆不相似,由此具足‘无可比拟’之义,亦名为宝。又,唯有佛陀出世之劫,转轮王方出现于世,而佛陀出世甚为稀有难得,故轮宝具足‘难得一见’之义,亦名为宝。且此轮宝唯生于具足无上出身、家族、财富等的最胜、伟大有情,而非其他有情,由此具足‘为最胜有情所受用’之义,亦名为宝。如同轮宝,其余诸宝也是如此。显示巴利原文
‘‘Cakkaratanassa ca nibbattakālato paṭṭhāya aññaṃ devaṭṭhānaṃ nāma na hoti, sabbepi gandhapupphādīhi tasseva pūjañca abhivādanādīni ca karontīti cittīkataṭṭhena ratanaṃ. Cakkaratanassa ca ettakaṃ nāma dhanaṃ agghatīti aggho natthi, iti mahagghaṭṭhenapi ratanaṃ. Cakkaratanañca aññehi loke vijjamānaratanehi asadisanti atulaṭṭhena ratanaṃ. Yasmā pana yasmiṃ kappe buddhā uppajjanti, tasmiṃyeva cakkavattino uppajjanti, buddhā ca kadāci karahaci uppajjanti, tasmā dullabhadassanaṭṭhenapi ratanaṃ. Tadetaṃ jātirūpakulaissariyādīhi anomassa uḷārasattasseva uppajjati, na aññassāti anomasattaparibhogaṭṭhenapi ratanaṃ. Yathā ca cakkaratanaṃ, evaṃ sesānipī’’ti.
在此,依该复注及其他处所述之理,阐明其义:此“受尊重”等语,并非从语源释的角度而说;那么是依何而说呢?是就世间所公认的“宝”,以其应受尊重的状态而说。从自体形态而言,这是指被世间大众认可的黄金、白银等,转轮王所现的轮宝等,知恩感恩之人等,以及以最上判别而言的佛、法等三皈依处。“受尊重”指因“啊!真令人心怡!”而应置于心中,此尊重即因其应受供养,故其义为“应受供养”。然而,有人说“受尊重”是“被作得美妙”之义,此不应采纳,因为此处的“citta”是“心”义,如“请用心听我说”这一经典原句中那样。他们也如此说:“如同在‘bhū’等字中可有适当的音变。”但在“请看这以宝石和耳环作得美妙的色身”等句中,则应是“以前不美妙,今被作得美妙”之义,故为“被作得美妙”,因为那里的“citta”一词是“美妙”的意思。“价值巨大”指价值广大、无量、不可计量。“无可比拟”指没有与之显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ taṭṭīkāya, aññattha ca vuttanayena atthavibhāvanā – idañhi ‘‘cittīkata’’ntiādivacanaṃ nibbacanatthavasena vuttaṃ na hoti, atha kinti ce? Loke ‘‘ratana’’nti sammatassa vatthuno garukātabbabhāvena vuttaṃ. Sarūpato panetaṃ lokiyamahājanena sammataṃ hiraññasuvaṇṇādikaṃ, cakkavattirañño uppannaṃ cakkaratanādikaṃ, kataññukatavedipuggalādikaṃ, sabbukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena buddhādisaraṇattayañca daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Aho manohara’’nti citte kattabbatāya cittīkataṃ, svāyaṃ cittīkāro tassa pūjanīyatāyāti katvā pūjanīyanti atthaṃ vadanti. Keci pana ‘‘vicitrakataṭṭhena cittīkata’’nti bhaṇanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ idha cittasaddassa hadayavācakattā ‘‘cittīkatvā suṇātha me’’ti (bu. vaṃ. 1.80) āhaccabhāsitapāḷiyaṃ viya. Tathā cāhu ‘‘yathārahamivaṇṇāgamo bhūkaresū’’ti. ‘‘Passa cittīkataṃ rūpaṃ, maṇinā kuṇḍalena cā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.302) pana pubbe avicitraṃ idāni vicitraṃ katanti cittīkatanti attho gahetabbo tattha cittasaddassa vicitravācakattā. Mahantaṃ vipulaṃ aparimitaṃ agghatīti mahagghaṃ. Natthi etassa tulā upamā, tulaṃ vā sadisanti atulaṃ. Kadācideva uppajjanato dukkhena laddhabbadassanattā dullabhadassanaṃ. Anomehi uḷāraguṇeheva sattehi paribhuñjitabbato anomasattaparibhogaṃ.
今为显示轮宝等具有“受尊重”等义的特胜,并以此类推其余诸宝,故说“如轮宝”等。此处,所谓“其他天处”实不存在,因为国王是获得非他共有的主权等成就之因,而其他众生则是获得所愿之因。该宝最为殊胜,光芒闪耀,具足奇妙稀有之法,故为无价;最胜故极昂贵,最胜故无等伦。众生厌患恶行,远离黑垢,由修集福德而得清净,如是堪逢佛出世之时期;转轮王亦于此时出现,故说“然而由于”等。“有时、极少时”是方便说,或“有时”指如上所说之时,“极少时”指赡部洲洲所摄之地。故说:显示巴利原文
Idāni nesaṃ cittīkatādiatthānaṃ savisesaṃ cakkaratane labbhamānataṃ dassetvā itaresupi te atidisituṃ ‘‘yathā ca cakkaratana’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha aññaṃ devaṭṭhānaṃ nāma na hoti rañño anaññasādhāraṇissariyādisampattipaṭilābhahetuto, aññesaṃ sattānaṃ yathicchitatthapaṭilābhahetuto ca. Aggho natthi ativiya uḷārasamujjalaratanattā, acchariyabbhutadhammatāya ca. Yadaggena ca mahagghaṃ, tadaggena atulaṃ. Sattānaṃ pāpajigucchanena vigatakāḷako puññapasutatāya maṇḍabhūto yādiso kālo buddhuppādāraho, tādise eva cakkavattīnampi sambhavoti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Kadāci karahacīti pariyāyavacanaṃ, ‘‘kadācī’’ti vā yathāvuttakālaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, ‘‘karahacī’’ti jambusiridīpasaṅkhātaṃ desaṃ. Tenāha –
时节、方域与宗族,以及母系;
观察此五事,便生大名声。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kālaṃ dīpañca desañca, kulaṃ mātarameva ca; Ime pañca viloketvā, uppajjati mahāyaso’’ti. (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.1.10);
这是以譬喻而说的。而譬喻与所喻之事并非全然相似,因此,诸佛是“有时、极少时”才出现于世,转轮王则并非如此。应理解为:转轮王在佛陀出世的劫中会出现多次。虽然如此,由于履行转轮王的义务极其难行,其出世亦是极为稀有。以此出世之极难得性相同,所以说他们难得见。再者,依轮宝之力所成就的功德,虽是转轮王随从众人所共有的,但转轮王以主人之尊受用他们,所以理当说他们正是为此而出现。为彰显此义,故说“这些”等。上述五事或六事,在其余诸宝中也可以得到,因此说“其余诸宝亦然”。显示巴利原文
Upamāvasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Upamopameyyānañca na accantameva sadisatā, tasmā yathā buddhā kadāci karahaci uppajjanti, na tathā cakkavattino, cakkavattino pana anekadāpi buddhuppādakappe uppajjantīti attho gahetabbo. Evaṃ santepi cakkavattivattapūraṇassa dukkarabhāvato dullabhuppādoyevāti iminā dullabhuppādatāsāmaññena tesaṃ dullabhadassanatā vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Kāmaṃ cakkaratanānubhāvena samijjhamāno guṇo cakkavattiparivārajanasādhāraṇo, tathāpi cakkavattī eva naṃ sāmibhāvena visavitāya paribhuñjatīti vattabbataṃ arahati tadatthameva uppajjanatoti dassento ‘‘tadeta’’ntiādimāha. Yathāvuttānaṃ pañcannaṃ, channampi vā atthānaṃ sesaratanesupi labbhanato ‘‘evaṃ sesānipī’’ti vuttaṃ.
然而,转轮王受用这些宝物的目的为何?难道缺少其中任何一宝,就不能成为转轮王吗?为了回应这种质难,并显示若无这些宝物,彼王便无法受用与之相应的功效,以阐明其间的不可分离性,故开示“而于这些”等文句。他凭借不可战胜之势,征服东方等处的刹帝利王族,这是感得大威势力之业果所致。象宝可随心游涉;他乘坐象宝与马宝,依其威力,仅半日即游遍以海为际的大地,而后还归王都。以主兵臣宝守护已征服的领土,由他妥善处理各处应行之事。至于珠宝、女宝、居士宝,则用以受用,如理享受由他们提供的受用乐,并以此如理受用而成就自身。即,凭珠宝在一由旬范围内驱散黑暗,由见光明等而受用乐;凭女宝,由超越人间的形貌等而受用乐;凭居士宝,由获得所欲的珠宝、黄金、财物等而受用乐。显示巴利原文
Imehi pana ratanehi rājā cakkavattī kimatthaṃ paccanubhoti, nanu vināpi tesu kenaci raññā cakkavattinā bhavitabbanti codanāya tassa tehi hathārahamatthapaccanubhavanadassanena kenacipi avinābhāvitaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘imesu panā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Ajitaṃ puratthimādidisāya khattiyamaṇḍalaṃ jināti mahesakkhatāsaṃvattaniyakammanissandabhāvato. Yathāsukhaṃ anuvicarati hatthiratanaṃ, assaratanañca abhiruhitvā tesaṃ ānubhāvena antopātarāsaṃyeva samuddapariyantaṃ pathaviṃ anupariyāyitvā rājadhāniyā eva paccāgamanato. Pariṇāyakaratanena vijitamanurakkhati tattha tattha kattabbakiccasaṃvidahanato. Avasesehi maṇiratanaitthiratanagahapatiratanehi upabhuñjanena pavattaṃ upabhogasukhaṃ anubhavati yathārahaṃ tehi tathānubhavanasiddhito. So hi maṇiratanena yojanappamāṇe padese andhakāraṃ vidhametvā ālokadassanādinā sukhamanubhavati, itthiratanena atikkantamānusakarūpadassanādivasena, gahapatiratanena icchiticchitamaṇikanakarajatādidhanapaṭilābhavasena sukhamanubhavati.
现在,为了以“力”与“力果”阐明上述义理,故说“以第一”等。力有三种,即:“诸王凭此得以胜任、得以成办,故称为力。”如说:显示巴利原文
Idāni sattiyā, sattiphalena ca yathāvuttamatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘paṭhamenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tividhā hi sattiyo ‘‘sakkonti samatthenti rājāno etāyā’’ti katvā. Yathāhu –
“势力乃我等之主,力有三种;
生起力属于刑罚之火,威慑力属于库藏。”
而谋略即是思维力,它具有四耳、二境;
三境六耳者,则称为秘密、隐秘。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pabhāvussāhamantānaṃ, vasā tisso hi sattiyo; Pabhāvo daṇḍajo tejo, patāpo tu ca kosajo. Manto ca mantanaṃ so tu, catukkaṇṇo dvigocaro; Tigocaro tu chakkaṇṇo, rahassaṃ guyhamuccate’’ti.
其中,精进力即是勇猛力。此以第一之轮宝而修习圆满。何以故?以勇猛力故,所应推动之轮无障碍,而得成就。慧力即是谋略力。此以后之主兵臣宝而修习圆满。何以故?由彼于一切王事善巧,如谋略力般无谬失故。依于调伏与财富而生起者,即财富力。其以象宝、马宝、居士宝而修习圆满。何以故?由象宝、马宝之大威势,及由居士宝所得库藏成就,如财富力般获得财富成就故。以女宝与珠宝,令三力修习之果圆满。此为连贯之义:即由前述三力修习所应得之果,皆由他们圆满。何以故?由他们即能成办受用乐故。显示巴利原文
Tattha vīriyabalaṃ ussāhasatti. Paṭhamena cassa cakkaratanena tadanuyogo paripuṇṇo hoti. Kasmāti ce? Tena ussāhasattiyā pavattetabbassa appaṭihatāṇācakkabhāvassa siddhito. Paññābalaṃ mantasatti. Pacchimena cassa pariṇāyakaratanena tadanuyogo. Kasmāti ce ? Tassa sabbarājakiccesu kusalabhāvena mantasattiyā viya avirajjhanapayogattā. Damanena, dhanena ca pabhuttaṃ pabhūsatti. Hatthiassagahapatiratanehi cassa tadanuyogo paripuṇṇo hoti. Kasmāti ce? Hatthiassaratanānaṃ mahānubhāvatāya, gahapatiratanato paṭiladdhakosasampattiyā ca pabhāvasattiyā viya pabhāvasamiddhisiddhito. Itthimaṇiratanehi tividhasattiyogaphalaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ hotīti sambandho, yathāvuttāhi tividhāhi sattīhi payujjanato yaṃ phalaṃ laddhabbaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ tehi paripuṇṇaṃ hotīti attho. Kasmāti ce? Teheva upabhogasukhassa sijjhanato.
为了从两种乐的角度阐明前述义理,故说“他以女宝、摩尼宝……”等。受用乐,是指将(宝)置于近处后,依受用而生起的乐。其余(宝),是指除彼之外的轮宝等五宝。依无怨敌性而生起的乐,即是自在乐。现在,为了从这些宝成就之因的角度,阐明它们与某种(善根)的不离性,故说“特别是……”等。由无嗔善根所生业之威力,也就是说,由名为无嗔的善根——依俱生等缘之力——所生之业的威力而成就,因为它们是更为柔和的宝种。业果大多与业相似。中间的摩尼宝、女宝、居士宝,乃由无贪善根所生业之威力而成就,因为殊胜的财富以及获得殊胜财富之因,是以具足舍离为因的。最后的向导宝,是由无痴善根所生业之威力而成就,因为转轮王的事业唯有大慧方能引导,而大慧的状态正是无痴善根所生业的等流果。这在《觉支相应》中,即《大品》第二的《觉支相应》中(有说明)。关于《宝经》,即在那里第五品中结集的第二《宝经》。所谓“指导”,是指为了详细分别七宝而展开的方法。显示巴利原文
Duvidhasukhavasenapi yathāvuttamatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘so itthimaṇiratanehī’’tiādi kathitaṃ. Bhogasukhanti samīpe katvā paribhogavasena pavattasukhaṃ. Sesehīti tadavasesehi cakkādipañcaratanehi. Apaccatthikatāvasena pavattasukhaṃ issariyasukhaṃ. Idāni tesaṃ sampannahetuvasenapi kenaci avinābhāvitameva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘visesato’’tiādimāha. Adosakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvenāti adosasaṅkhātena kusalamūlena sahajātādipaccayavasena uppāditakammassa ānubhāvena sampajjanti sommatararatanajātikattā. Kammaphalañhi yebhuyyena kammasarikkhakaṃ. Majjhimāni maṇiitthigahapatiratanāni alobhakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvena sampajjanti uḷāradhanassa, uḷāradhanapaṭilābhakāraṇassa ca pariccāgasampadāhetukattā. Pacchimaṃ pariṇāyakaratanaṃ amohakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvena sampajjati mahāpaññeneva cakkavattirājakiccassa parinetabbattā, mahāpaññabhāvassa ca amohakusalamūlajanitakammanissandabhāvato. Bojjhaṅgasaṃyutteti mahāvagge dutiye bojjhaṅgasaṃyutte (saṃ. ni. 5.223). Ratanasuttassāti tattha pañcamavagge saṅgītassa dutiyassa ratanasuttassa (saṃ. ni. 5.223). Upadeso nāma savisesaṃ sattannaṃ ratanānaṃ vicāraṇavasena pavatto nayo.
“时令、光明及地域、族姓母亲;显示巴利原文
Saraṇato paṭipakkhavidhamanato sūrā sattivanto, nibbhayāvahāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘abhīrukajātikā’’ti. Asure vijinitvā ṭhitattā sakko devānamindo dhīro nāma, tassa senaṅgabhāvato devaputto ‘‘aṅga’’nti vuccati, dhīrassa aṅgaṃ, tassa rūpamiva rūpaṃ yesaṃ te dhīraṅgarūpā, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘devaputtasadisakāyā’’ti. Eketi sārasamāsanāmakā ācariyā, tadakkhamanto āha ‘‘ayaṃ panetthā’’tiādi. Sabhāvoti sabhāvabhūto attho. Uttamasūrāti uttamayodhā. Sūrasaddo hi idha yodhattho. Evañhi purimanayato imassa visesatā hoti, ‘‘uttamattho sūrasaddo’’tipi vadanti, ‘‘uttamā sūrā vuccantī’’tipi hi pāṭho dissati. Vīrānanti vīriyavantānaṃ. Aṅganti kāraṇaṃ ‘‘aṅgīyati ñāyati phalametenā’’ti katvā. Yena vīriyena ‘‘dhīrā’’ti vuccanti, tadeva dhīraṅgaṃ nāmāti āha ‘‘vīriyanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Rūpanti sarīraṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vīriyamayasarīrā viyā’’ti. Vīriyameva vīriyamayaṃ yathā ‘‘dānamaya’’nti, (dī. ni. 3.305; itivu. 60; netti. 34) tasmā vīriyasaṅkhātasarīrā viyāti attho. Vīriyaṃ pana na ekantarūpanti viya-saddaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Apica dhīraṅgena nibbattaṃ dhīraṅganti atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vīriyamayasarīrā viyā’’ti vuttaṃ, evampi vīriyato rūpaṃ na ekantaṃ nibbattanti viya-saddena dasseti. Atha vā rūpaṃ sarīrabhūtaṃ dhīraṅgaṃ vīriyametesanti yojetabbaṃ, tathāpi vīriyaṃ nāma kiñci saviggahaṃ na hotīti dīpeti ‘‘vīriyamayasarīrā viyā’’ti iminā, idhāpi mayasaddo sakattheyeva daṭṭhabbo, tasmā saviggahavīriyasadisāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – saviggahaṃ ce vīriyaṃ nāma siyā, te cassa puttā taṃsadisāyeva bhaveyyunti ayameva cattho ācariyena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.258) anumato. Mahāpadānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘dhīraṅgaṃ rūpametesanti dhīraṅgarūpā, vīriyajātikā vīriyasabhāvā vīriyamayā akilāsuno ahesuṃ, divasampi yujjhantā na kilamantīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti, (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.34) tadetaṃ rūpasaddassa sabhāvatthataṃ sandhāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Idha ceva aññattha katthaci ‘‘dhitaṅgarūpā’’ti pāṭho dissati. Vīriyatthopi hi dhitisaddo hoti ‘‘saccaṃ dhammo dhiti cāgo, diṭṭhaṃ so ativattatī’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.1.57) dhitisaddo viya. Katthaci pana ‘‘vīraṅga’’nti pāṭhova diṭṭho. Yathā ruccati, tathā gahetabbaṃ.
观此五者,名声伟大即生。”(《法句经.一.一》)显示巴利原文
Nanu ca rañño cakkavattissa paṭisenā nāma natthi, ya’massa puttā pamaddeyyuṃ, atha kasmā ‘‘parasenappamaddanā’’ti vuttanti codanaṃ sodhento ‘‘sace’’tiādimāha, parasenā hotu vā, mā vā, ‘‘sace pana bhaveyyā’’ti parikappanāmattena tesaṃ evamānubhāvataṃ dassetuṃ tathā vuttanti adhippāyo, ‘‘parasenappamaddanā’’ti vuttepi parasenaṃ pamaddituṃ samatthāti attho gahetabbo pakaraṇatopi atthantarassa viññāyamānattā, yathā ‘‘sikkhamānena bhikkhave bhikkhunā aññātabbaṃ paripucchitabbaṃ paripañhitabba’’nti (pāci. 434) etassa padabhājanīye (pāci. 436) ‘‘sikkhitukāmenā’’ti atthaggahaṇanti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘taṃ parimaddituṃ samatthā’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hi te parasenaṃ pamaddantā tiṭṭhanti, atha kho pamaddanasamatthā eva honti . Evamaññatrapi yathārahaṃ. Parasenaṃ pamaddanāya samatthentīti parasenappamaddanāti atthaṃ dassetītipi vadanti.
这只是譬喻中的一种说法,并非绝对不存在差异。因此应知:佛陀虽于某时某地出现,但转轮圣王未必每时都现;而转轮圣王在诸佛出现时可多次现出,所以说转轮圣王的出现偶有多生。转轮圣王难可值遇,实因其善根具足的轮宝极为难得。想要享用轮宝善德的人,必须先断除恶根之业,成就纯净善根与殊胜福德,才堪与转轮圣王共世而生、共享妙宝。由此,佛陀才说“因此”。偶因轮宝的感召,有善根随缘生起,虽然转轮圣王及贵族未必都能亲临受用,但阿拉汉也能获此宝。说明“五事既得,余宝亦可得”之意,所以说“如轮宝所言,余宝也是如此”。显示巴利原文
Pubbe katūpacitassa etarahi vipaccamānakassa puññadhammassa cirataraṃ vipaccituṃ paccayabhūtaṃ cakkavattivattasamudāgataṃ payogasampattisaṅkhātaṃ dhammaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dhammenā’’ti padassa ‘‘pāṇona hantabbotiādinā pañcasīladhammenā’’ti atthamāha. Ayañhi attho ‘‘ye kho panānanda puratthimāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rājānaṃ mahāsudassanaṃ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṃsu ‘ehi kho mahārāja, svāgataṃ te mahārāja, sakaṃ te mahārāja, anusāsa mahārājā’ti. Rājā mahāsudassano evamāha ‘pāṇo na hantabbo, adinnaṃ na ādātabbaṃ, kāmesu micchā na caritabbā, musā na bhaṇitabbā, majjaṃ na pātabbaṃ, yathābhuttañca bhuñjathā’ti. Ye kho panānanda puratthimāya disāya paṭirājāno, te rañño mahāsudassanassa anuyantā ahesu’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. 2.244) āgataṃ rañño ovādadhammaṃ sandhāya vutto. Evañhi ‘‘adaṇḍena asatthenā’’ti idampi visesanavacanaṃ susamatthitaṃ hoti. Aññāsupi suttanipātaṭṭhakathādīsu (su. ni. aṭṭha. 226; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 6.3; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.223) ayamevattho vutto.
然而,在《大本经注释》中这样说:“‘不用杖’——凡对犯罪过的众生罚取一百、一千者,名为以财罚治世;凡施以割截等刑罚者,名为以刀罚治世。而这位(转轮王)舍弃了这两种罚,不用杖而统治。‘不用刀’——凡以单刃等刀伤害他人者,名为以刀治世。而这位(转轮王)不用刀,连对一只小苍蝇也不让流出一滴血,唯以法——‘来吧,大王!’——如此受诸敌王迎接而来,征服如前所述的大地而统治,这便是征服后成为主人而住之义。”这是针对“以法”一词,意在说明“以过去所造、所积、现今成熟的某种福德法”。正因如此,才说“以法受诸敌王迎接而来,征服如前所述的大地而统治”。阿阇梨(在《长部注疏》中)也说:“以法,即以所造、所积的自己的福德法。因为以此福德法所策励,大地上的所有国王都出来迎接,说‘善来,大王!’等语,然后将自己的王国奉献给转轮王。因此说:‘他不用杖、不用刀,唯以法征服此海围绕的大地而统治。’”这也显示了如前所述的同样含义。所以,应知此处两种解释的意义都是合理的。因为如果缺少转轮王义务的圆满等精勤成就,仅凭过去所造显示巴利原文
Mahāpadānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘adaṇḍenāti ye katāparādhe satte satampi sahassampi gaṇhanti, te dhanadaṇḍena rajjaṃ kārenti nāma, ye chejjabhejjaṃ anusāsanti, te satthadaṇḍena. Ayaṃ pana duvidhampi daṇḍaṃ pahāya adaṇḍena ajjhāvasati. Asatthenāti ye ekatodhārādinā satthena paraṃ vihesanti, te satthena rajjaṃ kārenti nāma. Ayaṃ pana satthena khuddakamakkhikāyapi pivanamattaṃ lohitaṃ kassaci anuppādetvā dhammeneva, ‘ehi kho mahārājā’ti evaṃ paṭirājūhi sampaṭicchitāgamano vuttappakāraṃ pathaviṃ abhivijinitvā ajjhāvasati abhibhavitvā sāmī hutvā vasatīti attho’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.34) vuttaṃ, tadetaṃ ‘‘dhammenā’’ti padassa ‘‘pubbe katūpacitena etarahi vipaccamānakena yena kenaci puññadhammenā’’ti atthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Teneva hi ‘‘dhammena paṭirājūhi sampaṭicchitāgamano vuttappakāraṃ pathaviṃ abhivijinitvā ajjhāvasatī’’ti. Ācariyenapi (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.258) vuttaṃ dhammenāti katūpacitena attano puññadhammena. Tena hi sañcoditā pathaviyaṃ sabbarājāno paccuggantvā ‘‘svāgataṃ te mahārājā’’tiādīni vatvā attano rajjaṃ rañño cakkavattissa niyyātenti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘so imaṃ pathaviṃ sāgarapariyantaṃ adaṇḍena asatthena dhammena abhivijiya ajjhāvasatī’’ti, tenapi yathāvuttamevatthaṃ dasseti, tasmā ubhayathāpi ettha attho yutto evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Cakkavattivattapūraṇādipayogasampattimantarena hi pubbe katūpacitakammeneva evamajjhāvasanaṃ na sambhavati, tathā pubbe katūpacitakammamantarena cakkavattivattapūraṇādipayogasampattiyā evāti.
如此开示了一种成就之后,为开示第二种成就,而说了“然而,若……”等语。在此,为显示其中之义,说:“阿拉汉……已揭开覆盖者,在此处……”等。因为贪等七种恶法生起于世间,生起时覆盖、缠缚众生的相续,阻碍善法的生起,所以这里以“覆盖”一词来指称它们,如“贪、嗔……”等所示。“恶行”是指从邪见开始,连同其余意恶行一起的三种恶行,而邪见由于特别能覆盖众生,且为最重罪,故被单独列出。经中也说:“所有这些都被这六十二种事所网罗,沉没其中,偶尔浮出……”等。同样地,以迷惑义为“痴”,以令不知义为“无明”,这是依现行状态的差别,将同一“无知”分为两种。同样,其覆盖之义也以两种方式被说明:“当人被痴所征服时,那时便是大暗”,“世间被无明所覆,因悭吝与放逸而不显耀”。如此,贪、嗔等的覆盖之义也应了知。然而,在《大本经注释》中,以贪、嗔、痴、慢、见、烦恼、渴爱,摄取了七种恶法。其中,以染著义为“贪”,以渴求义为“渴爱”,这是依现行状态的差别,将同一“贪”分为两种。同样,其覆盖之义也唯是一味。如所说:“当人被贪所征”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ekaṃ nipphattiṃ kathetvā dutiyaṃ nipphattiṃ kathetuṃ yadetaṃ ‘‘sace kho panā’’tiādivacanaṃ vuttaṃ, tattha anuttānamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘arahaṃ…pe… vivaṭṭacchadoti etthā’’tiādimāha . Yasmā rāgādayo satta pāpadhammā loke uppajjanti, uppajjamānā ca te sattasantānaṃ chādetvā pariyonandhitvā kusalappavattiṃ nivārenti, tasmā te idha chadasaddena vuttāti dasseti ‘‘rāgadosā’’tiādinā. Duccaritanti micchādiṭṭhito aññena manoduccaritena saha tīṇi duccaritāni, micchādiṭṭhi pana visesena sattānaṃ chadanato, paramasāvajjattā ca visuṃ gahitā. Vuttañca ‘‘sabbe te imeheva dvāsaṭṭhiyā vatthūhi antojālīkatā, ettha sitāva ummujjamānā ummujjantī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.146). Tathā muyhanaṭṭhena moho, aviditakaraṇaṭṭhena avijjāti pavattiākārabhedena aññāṇameva dvidhā vuttaṃ. Tathā hissa dvidhāpi chadanattho kathito ‘‘andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ moho sahate nara’’nti, (mahāni. 5, 156, 195) ‘‘avijjāya nivuto loko, vevicchā pamādā nappakāsatī’’ti (su. ni. 1039; cūḷani. pārāyanavagga.2) ca. Evaṃ rāgadosādīnampi chadanattho vattabbo. Mahāpadānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33) pana rāgadosamohamānadiṭṭhikilesataṇhāvasena satta pāpadhammā gahitā. Tatra rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo, taṇhāyanaṭṭhena taṇhāti pavattiākārabhedena lobho eva dvidhā vutto. Tathā hissa dvidhāpi chadanattho ekantikova. Yathāha ‘‘andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ rāgo sahate nara’’nti, ‘‘kāmandhā jālasañchannā, taṇhāchadanachāditā’’ti (udā. 94) ca, kilesaggahaṇena ca vuttāvasiṭṭhā vicikicchādayo vuttā.
“被七者所覆”是含因的语句,意思是:因为被七种恶法所覆,世间便处于烦恼的黑暗中。“彼覆盖”即指那七恶法构成的覆盖。“揭开”即令其揭开、令其除去。又用另一种方式说:“成为从一切方所生起光明者”。因为除去烦恼的覆盖就是光明,所以,应被揭开、应被除去者为“揭开”,覆盖、遮蔽者为“覆盖”;由此,已揭开覆盖者即是“已揭开覆盖者”,或说为“已揭开覆盖者”之义。这个“已揭开覆盖者”一词,就像“坚定法者”、“现证法者”等词,既有阳性词尾,也有阴性词尾。正如《大本经注释》所说:“所谓贪、嗔、痴、慢、见、烦恼、渴爱的覆盖、障碍,已被揭开、已被破坏、已被摧毁,因此称为‘已揭覆盖者’,也有读作‘已揭开覆盖者’的,意义相同。”在其《疏解》中也说:“‘已揭开覆盖者’是将阴性词尾变为阳性词尾的表述。”而语法家们则说:“依‘持弓者’等规则,在与‘弓’等词构成复合词时,有时附加‘a’后缀”,并举出“持箭弓者、现证法者、已揭开覆盖者”等例。显示巴利原文
Sattahi paṭicchanneti hetugabbhavacanaṃ, sattahi pāpadhammehi paṭicchannattā kilesavasena andhakāre loketi attho. Taṃ chadananti sattapāpadhammasaṅkhātaṃ chadanaṃ. Vivaṭṭetvāti vivaṭṭaṃ katvā vigametvā. Tadeva pariyāyantarena vuttaṃ ‘‘samantato sañjātāloko hutvā’’ti. Kilesachadanavigamo eva hi āloko, etena vivaṭṭayitabbo vigametabboti vivaṭṭo, chādeti paṭicchādetīti chado, vivaṭṭo chado anenāti vivaṭṭacchadā,vivaṭṭacchado vāti atthaṃ dasseti. Ayañhi vivaṭṭacchadasaddo daḷhadhammapaccakkhadhammasaddādayo viya pulliṅgavasena ākāranto, okāranto ca hoti. Tathā hi mahāpadānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘rāgadosamohamānadiṭṭhikilesataṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ chadanaṃ āvaraṇaṃ vivaṭaṃ viddhaṃsitaṃ vivaṭakaṃ etenāti vivaṭacchado, ‘vivaṭṭacchadā’tipi pāṭho, ayamevattho’’ti, (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33) tassā līnatthappakāsaniyampi vuttaṃ ‘‘vivaṭṭacchadāti okārassa ākāraṃ katvā niddeso’’ti. Saddavidū pana ‘‘ādhanvāditoti lakkhaṇena samāsantagatehi dhanusaddādīhi kvaci āpaccayo’’ti vatvā ‘‘kaṇḍivadhanvā, paccakkhadhammā, vivaṭṭacchadā’’ti payogamudāharanti.
为何说了这三个词?以因庄严的方式来解答此问,而说“在此……”等,“在此”即于三处之义。“应受特殊供养”即“阿罗汉”,以此义说应供养性。因为是正等觉者,所以有应供养性,这是说彼应供养性的因。由于成佛是以断除一切烦恼及习气为前提,故说“已揭开覆盖者”为成佛之因。依业等有三种轮转,依贪等有七种覆盖,合为“轮转覆盖”;已离轮转覆盖者,或彼之轮转覆盖已离去者,为“已揭开覆盖者”或“已揭开覆盖者”,而前置的“离”字应通于两处,为显此义,说“已揭开且已离覆盖”。也有这样的说法:“‘已揭开且彼为已离覆盖者’即‘已揭开覆盖者’,这是显示后分中前分省略之义。”“阿罗汉,因无轮转”——这是就“远离烦恼”、“已杀烦恼敌及轮回之辐”、“于作恶无隐秘”等义而说。这是由果推因的显示——如由烟知火,由洪水知上游降雨。依此义,阿罗汉性是因,无轮转是果,这是阿阇梨的见解。而“因应受供养等,及应受特殊供养”则是依因推果的显示,如由火知烟,由上游降雨知洪水。“正等觉者,因无覆盖”——这是由因推果的显示,因为正等觉性是以无一切烦恼习气覆盖为前提的。因为以阿罗汉道而离覆盖,以一切知智而为正等觉者。“已揭开且已离覆盖”这是二因。虽然依阿阇梨的见解,在由果推因的显示中,“已揭开性”只是果,但由于它是推因之知及彼智的因,故应知亦名为因。显示巴利原文
Kasmā padattayametaṃ vuttanti anuyogaṃ hetālaṅkāranayena pariharanto ‘‘tatthā’’tiādimāha, tatthāti ca tīsu padesūti attho. Pūjāvisesaṃ paṭiggaṇhituṃ arahatīti arahanti atthena pūjārahatā vuttā. Yasmā sammāsambuddho, tasmā pūjārahatāti tassā pūjārahatāya hetu vutto. Savāsanasabbakilesappahānapubbakattā buddhabhāvassa buddhattahetubhūtā vivaṭṭacchadatā vuttā. Kammādivasena tividhaṃ vaṭṭañca rāgādivasena sattavidho chado ca vaṭṭacchadā, vaṭṭacchadehi vigato, vigatā vā vaṭṭacchadā yassāti vivaṭṭacchado,vivaṭṭacchadā vā, dvandapubbago pana vi-saddo ubhayattha yojetabboti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vivaṭṭo ca vicchado cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evampi vadanti ‘‘vivaṭṭo ca so vicchado cāti vivaṭṭacchado, uttarapade pubbapadalopoti atthaṃ dassetī’’ti. ‘‘Arahaṃ vaṭṭābhāvenā’’ti idaṃ kilesehi ārakattā, kilesārīnaṃ saṃsāracakkassārānañca hatattā, pāpakaraṇe ca rahābhāvāti atthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Idañhi phalena hetānumānadassanaṃ – yathā taṃ dhūmena aggissa, udakoghena upari vuṭṭhiyā, etena ca atthena arahabhāvo hetu, vaṭṭābhāvo phalanti ayaṃ ācariyamati. ‘‘Paccayādīnaṃ, pūjāvisesassa ca arahattā’’ti pana hetunā phalānumānadassanampi siyā yathā taṃ agginā dhūmassa, upari vuṭṭhiyā udakoghassa. ‘‘Sammāsambuddho chadanābhāvenā’’ti idaṃ pana hetunā phalānumānadassanaṃ savāsanasabbakilesacchadanābhāvapubbakattā sammāsambuddhabhāvassa. Arahattamaggena hi vicchadatā, sabbaññutaññāṇena sammāsambuddhabhāvo. ‘‘Vivaṭṭo ca vicchado cā’’ti idaṃ hetudvayaṃ. Kāmañca ācariyamatiyā phalena hetuanumānadassane vivaṭṭatā phalameva hoti, hetuanumānadassanassa, pana tathāñāṇassa ca hetubhāvato hetuyeva nāmāti veditabbaṃ.
如此,在三个词的说法中,以因由庄严的方式显示了用意之后,现在也以四无畏的方式显示,而说“以第二……”等。其中,以第二无畏,即依世尊所说的次第——如“诸比丘,有这些如来的四无畏,具足这些无畏的如来自称牛王之位,于众中作狮子吼,转梵轮”(《增支部》4.8;《中部》1.150)——而成为第二的那个无畏,即由“对于自称漏尽者的你,若说‘这些漏未断尽’,那么,比丘们,我不见有沙门、婆罗门、天、魔、梵或世间任何人能以法如理呵责我的相;比丘们,我不见彼相,故住于安稳、无畏、得无畏”所阐明的无畏。前义成就,即前一个词“阿罗汉”的义理成就,即阿罗汉性成就;由于第二无畏即是彼义,故说以此无畏成就彼义。因为第二无畏正是以“对于自称漏尽者的你,若说‘这些漏未断尽’……”等所说,而以“远离烦恼故”等所说的“阿罗汉”一词之义。由此也得以了知:“正如以第二无畏成就前义,同样,以前面的义也成就第二无畏。”如此,以此方式,以四无畏之力显示三个词的说法中的用意,便成为合理的。否则,由于缺少某种用意,这句话在此处就不应说了。其余各处亦同此理。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ padattayavacane hetālaṅkāranayena payojanaṃ dassetvā idāni catuvesārajjavasenapi dassento ‘‘dutiyenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha dutiyena vesārajjenāti ‘‘cattārimāni bhikkhave tathāgatassa vesārajjāni, yehi vesārajjehi samannāgato tathāgato āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadati, brahmacakkaṃ pavattetī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 4.8; ma. ni. 1.150) bhagavatā vuttakkamena dutiyabhūtena ‘‘khīṇāsavassa te paṭijānato ‘ime āsavā aparikkhīṇā’ti, tatra vata maṃ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā devo vā māro vā brahmā vā koci vā lokasmiṃ saha dhammena paṭicodessatīti nimittametaṃ bhikkhave na samanupassāmi, etamahaṃ bhikkhave nimittaṃ asamanupassanto khemappatto abhayappatto vesārajjappatto viharāmī’’ti paridīpitena vesārajjena. Purimasiddhīti purimassa ‘‘araha’’nti padassa atthasiddhi arahattasiddhi, dutiyavesārajjassa tadatthabhāvato tena vesārajjena tadatthasiddhīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Khīṇāsavassa te paṭijānato ‘ime āsavā aparikkhīṇā’ ti’’ādinā vuttameva hi dutiyavesārajjaṃ ‘‘kilesehi ārakattā’’tiādinā vutto ‘‘araha’’nti padassa atthoti . Tato ca viññāyati ‘‘yathā dutiyena vesārajjena purimasiddhi, evaṃ purimenapi atthena dutiyavesārajjasiddhī’’ti. Evañca katvā iminā nayena catuvesārajjavasena padattayavacane payojanadassanaṃ upapannaṃ hoti. Itarathā hi kiñcipayojanābhāvato idaṃyeva vacanaṃ idha avattabbaṃ siyāti. Esa nayo sesesupi.
第一无畏,即依前述方式,由“对于自称正自觉者的你,若说‘这些法你并未觉悟’,于此……我安住”所阐明的第一无畏。第二成就,即第二个词“正自觉者”的义理成就,亦即佛性成就,因为彼无畏即是其义。第三与第四无畏,即依前述方式,由“凡所说的那些障碍法,对于受用者而言不足以成为障碍,于此……我安住”以及“凡为彼义所宣说的法,对于如法行者并不导向正尽苦,于此……我安住”(《增支部》4.8;《中部》1.150)所阐明的无畏。第三成就,即第三个词“揭开覆盖者”的义理成就,亦即揭开覆盖义成就,因为借助这些无畏,彼义得以显明——这是其含义。正如轨范师所说:“由如实教示障碍法与导向出离法,导师揭开覆盖之性于世间得以显明。”(《长部注》1.258)正是以揭开覆盖性而成就障碍法与导向出离法的教说,故说“以第三无畏成就第三、第四义”亦为合理。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamenāti vuttanayena paṭhamabhūtena ‘‘sammāsambuddhassa te paṭijānato ‘ime dhammā anabhisambuddhā’ti, tatra…pe… viharāmī’’ti paridīpitena vesārajjena. Dutiyasiddhīti dutiyassa ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti padassa atthasiddhi buddhattasiddhi tassa tadatthabhāvato. Tatiyacatutthehīti vuttanayeneva tatiyacatutthabhūtehi ‘‘ye kho pana te antarāyikā dhammā vuttā, te paṭisevato nālaṃ antarāyāyāti, tatra…pe… viharāmī’’ti ca ‘‘yassa kho pana te atthāya dhammo desito, so na niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyāti, tatra…pe… viharāmī’’ti (a. ni. 4.8; ma. ni. 1.150) ca paridīpitehi vesārajjehi. Tatiyasiddhīti tatiyassa ‘‘vivaṭṭacchadā’’ti padassa atthasiddhi vivaṭṭacchadatthasiddhi tehi tassa pākaṭabhāvatoti attho. ‘‘Yāthāvato antarāyikaniyyānikadhammāpadesena hi satthu vivaṭṭacchadabhāvo loke pākaṭo ahosī’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.258) ācariyena vuttaṃ, vivaṭṭacchadabhāveneva antarāyikaniyyānikadhammadesanāsiddhito ‘‘tatiyena tatiyacatutthasiddhī’’tipi vattuṃ yujjati.
如此,在以三个词的表述中,依四无畏之力说明用意之后,现在更依三眼之力加以显示,故说“前一个词……”等。其中,“而”字表引出之义。前一个词“阿拉汉”,成就了世尊的下三分道果智所摄的法眼,因其显示了烦恼之敌及轮回轮辐的已坏灭。第二个词“正自觉者”,成就了意乐、随眠、根器上下智所摄的佛眼,因为唯正自觉者方有此智。此二智非声闻、独觉所有。第三个词“揭开覆盖者”,成就了一切知智所摄的一切眼,因其显示了连同习气的一切烦恼的断除。其实,在说了“正自觉者”之后再说“揭开覆盖者”,正是为了阐明正自觉性所必不可少的、连同习气的一切烦恼的断除。“我确实是,亲爱的庵婆咤,诸咒的授予者”此为次要,“你是诸咒的领受者”方为主要激励之语,因此说“以‘你是诸咒的领受者’之语,于其心中生起于诸咒的勇健性”,意即生起名为“对于相之显现而明净智性”的勇健性。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ padattayavacane catuvesārajjavasena payojanaṃ dassetvā idāni cakkhuttayavasenapi dassento ‘‘purimañcā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ca-saddo upanyāsattho. Purimaṃ ‘‘araha’’nti padaṃ bhagavato heṭṭhimamaggaphalattayañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ sādheti kilesārīnaṃ, saṃsāracakkassa arānañca hatabhāvadīpanato. Dutiyaṃ ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti padaṃ āsayānusayaindriyaparopariyattañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ buddhacakkhuṃ sādheti sammāsambuddhasseva taṃsambhavato. Tadetañhi ñāṇadvayaṃ sāvakapaccekabuddhānaṃ na sambhavati. Tatiyaṃ ‘‘vivaṭṭacchadā’’ti padaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇasaṅkhātaṃ samantacakkhuṃ sādheti savāsanasabbakilesappahānadīpanato. ‘‘Sammāsambuddho’’ti hi vatvā ‘‘vivaṭṭacchadā’’ti vacanaṃ sammāsambuddhabhāvāya savāsanasabbakilesappahānaṃ vibhāvetīti. ‘‘Ahaṃ kho pana tāta ambaṭṭha mantānaṃ dātā’’ti idaṃ appadhānaṃ, ‘‘tvaṃ mantānaṃ paṭiggahetā’’ti idameva padhānaṃ samuttejanāvacananti sandhāya ‘‘tvaṃ mantānaṃ paṭiggahetāti iminā’ssa mantesu sūrabhāvaṃ janetī’’ti vuttaṃ, lakkhaṇavibhāvane visadañāṇatāsaṅkhātaṃ sūrabhāvaṃ janetīti attho.
259 “如是尊者”一句中,“如是”是表示接受话语的不变词。此处接受话语,即接受沸伽罗娑底所发出的“我们将如此了知那位乔达摩尊者,你是诸咒的领受者”等语。因为“其义……”等也显示了该含义。同样,有说“婆罗门沸伽罗娑底应诺后”,他之所以这样说,是因为他以于诸相无迷惑的状态,见到佛陀的咒语而激励轨范师;为显示此义,故说“他也……”等。其中,轨范师说:“‘以此’即以此如前所说的激励。”(《长部注》1.259)但现在书本中见有“以此轨范师语”的文句。从义理上说,这并不矛盾。因为于诸咒中生起念的言说,即是激励。显示巴利原文
259.Evaṃbhoti ettha evaṃ-saddo vacanasampaṭicchane nipāto, vacanasampaṭicchanañcettha tathā mayaṃ taṃ bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ vedissāma, tvaṃ mantānaṃ paṭiggahetāti ca evaṃ pavattassa pokkharasātino vacanassa sampaṭiggaho. ‘‘Tassattho’’tiādināpi hi tadevatthaṃ dasseti. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇassa pokkharasātissa paṭissutvā’’ti, taṃ panesa ācariyassa samuttejanāya lakkhaṇesu vigatasammohabhāvena buddhamante sampassamānattā vadatīti dassento ‘‘sopī’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘tāyāti tāya yathāvuttāya samuttejanāyā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.259) ācariyena vuttaṃ, adhunā pana potthakesu ‘‘tāya ācariyakathāyā’’ti pāṭho dissati. Atthato cesa aviruddhoyeva. Mantesu satisamuppādikā hi kathā samuttejanāti.
“非车行道”指车不能通行之处,即车辆无法到达的地方,意为抵达门楼附近。显示巴利原文
Ayānabhūminti yānassa abhūmiṃ, yānena yātumasakkuṇeyyaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ, dvārakoṭṭhakasamīpaṃ gantvāti attho.
即使对于概括性的表述,其含义也应根据注释书的准量来具体理解,因此说“在正午时分”。先依一切比丘的惯例说明了第一种方式,再依专修头陀者的特有惯例说明了第二种方式。“日间专修者”即日间致力于专修者,意为他们在白昼时段为履行沙门法而如此经行。因此说“因为那样的……”等。“从一处精舍到另一处精舍往来会引发戏论,我要问过之后再进入”——为了阐明安巴塔如此前往的意图,而说“据说他……”等。显示巴利原文
Avisesena vuttassapi vacanassa attho aṭṭhakathāpamāṇato visesena gahetabboti āha ‘‘ṭhitamajjhanhikasamaye’’ti. Sabbesamāciṇṇavasena paṭhamanayaṃ vatvā padhānikānameva āveṇikāciṇṇavasena dutiyanayo vutto. Divāpadhānikāti divāpadhānānuyuñjanakā, divasabhāge samaṇadhammakaraṇatthaṃ te evaṃ caṅkamantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘tādisānañhī’’tiādi. ‘‘Pariveṇato pariveṇamāgacchanto papañco hoti, pucchitvāva pavisissāmī’’ti ambaṭṭhassa tadupasaṅkamanādhippāyaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘so kirā’’tiādimāha.
260 生于知名家族者,即为知名家族出身。虽然依后文所述,往昔安巴塔家族并不知名,但那时已变得知名,因此说“据说那时……”等。容色、出身、财富、家族这些可资宣称的方面,即作为“他是如此这般”这一宣称之因的容色、出身、财富、家族。为了显示那些比丘们所思的意图,而说“因为凡是……”等。为了表明即便是概括性的表述,也是针对具体可理解的含义而说的,因此用“指香室而言”这一句来显示。如这些等。显示巴利原文
260. Abhiññātakule jāto abhiññātakolañño. Kāmañca vakkhamānanayena pubbe ambaṭṭhakulamapaññātaṃ, tadā pana paññātanti āha ‘‘tadā kirā’’tiādi. Rūpajātimantakulāpadesehīti ‘‘ayamīdiso’’ti apadisanahetubhūtehi catūhi rūpajātimantakulehi. Yena te bhikkhū cintayiṃsu, tadadhippāyaṃ āvi kātuṃ ‘‘yo hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Avisesato vuttampi visesato viññāyamānatthaṃ sandhāya bhāsitavacananti dasseti ‘‘gandhakuṭiṃ sandhāyā’’ti iminā. Evamīdisesu.
“不匆忙”即不急躁。也有“aturanto”的异读,含义相同。怎样进入才算不慌不忙地进入呢?因此说“轻缓地……”等。其中,“一步量之处”指两步之间约一拃手宽的地方。“辛杜瓦罗”是一种开花的树,开白花,也称为“尼衮迪”。“面前”指香室房间的门口。为了阐明“在钥匙孔附近”这句话,而说“据说门……”等。显示巴利原文
Aturitoti avegāyanto, ‘‘aturanto’’tipi pāṭho, soyevattho. Kathaṃ pavisanto ataramāno pavisati nāmāti āha ‘‘saṇika’’ntiādi. Tattha padappamāṇaṭṭhāneti dvinnaṃ padānaṃ antare muṭṭhiratanapamāṇaṭṭhāne. Sinduvāro nāma eko pupphūpagarukkho, yassa setaṃ pupphaṃ hoti, yo ‘‘nigguṇḍī’’ tipi vuccati. Pamukhanti gandhakuṭigabbhapamukhaṃ. ‘‘Kuñcikacchiddasamīpe’’ti vuttavacanaṃ samatthetuṃ ‘‘dvāraṃ kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
261 这句“当他们布施时”,显示了由波罗蜜的威力,门自动敞开。显示巴利原文
261.‘‘Dānaṃ dadamānehī’’ti iminā pāramitānubhāvena sayameva dvāravivaraṇaṃ dasseti.
“与世尊互相问候”这一句,为了揭示由前缀“sam”所表达的、世尊与那些比丘之间首先生起的喜悦这一引申义,而说“如同……”等。因为世尊也以“诸贤者,是否堪忍?是否过得去?”等语问候那些比丘,由于他先开口,彼此间便首先生起了喜悦。“同时生起喜悦”即与世尊的举动同时生起的互相问候。为了连同譬喻一起阐明其义,而说“犹如冷水……”等。其中,由于世尊的烦恼尘垢已彻底止息,应视作与冷水相似;由于那些比丘的烦恼尘垢尚未止息,应视作与热水相似。“sammoditaṃ”即互相融合。此处“muda”一词只取互相融合之义,而非喜悦之义,因为只有这样,前述的譬喻之言才能成立。正如所说“成为一体”,即问候行为中的平等性、同一性之义。显示巴利原文
Bhagavatā saddhiṃ sammodiṃsūti ettha samatthena saṃ-saddena viññāyamānaṃ bhagavato tehi saddhiṃ paṭhamaṃ pavattamodatāsaṅkhātaṃ neyyatthaṃ dassento ‘‘yathā’’tiādimāha. Bhagavāpi hi ‘‘kacci bho māṇavā khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīya’’ntiādīni pucchanto tehi māṇavehi saddhiṃ pubbabhāsitāya paṭhamaññeva pavattamodo ahosi. Samappavattamodāti bhagavato tadanukaraṇena samaṃ pavattasaṃsandanā. Tadatthaṃ saha upamāya dassetuṃ ‘‘sītodakaṃ viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paramanibbutakilesadarathatāya bhagavato sītodakasadisatā, anibbutakilesadarathatāya ca māṇavānaṃ uṇhodakasadisatā daṭṭhabbā. Sammoditanti saṃsanditaṃ. Mudasaddo hettha saṃsandaneyeva, na pāmojje, evañhi yathāvuttaupamāvacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘ekībhāva’’nti, sammodanakiriyāya samānataṃ ekarūpatanti attho.
“堪忍否”,即问:“这四轮九门的身体机关,本性多苦、本来难忍,还能堪忍吗?”“过得去否”,即问:“依赖食物等资具维持、名为长久延续的生命,还能延续吗?”“少病否”,即问:“是否没有头痛等疾病?”“少恼否”,即问:“是否没有困苦的生活?”“轻安否”,即问:“于种种事务中起身轻便,是否轻安?”“有力否”,即问:“因有相应体力,是否有气力?”“安稳住否”,即问:“因有安稳住的果报,是否有安稳的住处?”所有这些词,都应结合“是否”来理解其义。“得力的喜”就是喜本身。“年轻的喜”是欢悦。“能产生问候”即能作问候,也就是sammodanikaṃ,亦即sammodaniyaṃ——将ka变为ya。为表明“因应被问候而称为sammodanīyaṃ”这层意思,故说“由于适合问候”。这是诸师长所说。还应看到,这也显示了“值得问候的是sammodanikaṃ,依前述方式也就是sammodaniyaṃ”这一含义。“令忆念”一词的意思是“持续不断地进行”。显示巴利原文
Khamanīyanti ‘‘catucakkaṃ navadvāraṃ sarīrayantaṃ dukkhabahulatāya sabhāvato dussahaṃ kacci khamituṃ sakkuṇeyya’’nti pucchanti, yāpanīyanti āhārādipaccayapaṭibaddhavuttikaṃ cirappabandhasaṅkhātāya yāpanāya kacci yāpetuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṃ, sīsarogādiābādhābhāvena kacci appābādhaṃ, dukkhajīvikābhāvena kacci appātaṅkaṃ, taṃtaṃkiccakaraṇe uṭṭhānasukhatāya kacci lahuṭṭhānaṃ, tadanurūpabalayogato kacci balaṃ, sukhavihāraphalasabbhāvena kacciphāsuvihāro atthīti sabbattha kacci-saddaṃ yojetvā attho veditabbo. Balappattā pīti pītiyeva. Taruṇā pīti pāmojjaṃ. Sammodanaṃ janeti karotīti sammodanikaṃ, tadeva sammodaniyaṃ ka-kārassa ya-kāraṃ katvā. Sammodetabbato sammodanīyanti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘sammodituṃ yuttabhāvato’’ti iminā. Evaṃ ācariyehi vuttaṃ. Sammodituṃ arahatīti sammodanikaṃ, tadeva sammodaniyaṃ yathāvuttanayenāti imamatthampi dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Sāretu’’nti etassa ‘‘nirantaraṃ pavattetu’’nti atthavacanaṃ. Saritabbabhāvatoti anussaritabbabhāvato. ‘‘Sāretuṃ arahatī’’ti atthe yathāpadaṃ dīghena ‘‘sāraṇīya’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Saritabba’’nti atthe pana ‘‘saraṇīya’’nti vattabbe dīghaṃ katvā ‘‘sāraṇīya’’nti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ saddato atthaṃ dassetvā idāni atthamattato dassetuṃ ‘‘suyyamānasukhato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha suyyamānasukhatoti āpāthamadhurattamāha, anussariyamānasukhatoti vimaddaramaṇīyattaṃ. Byañjanaparisuddhatāyāti sabhāvaniruttibhāvena tassā kathāya vacanacāturiyaṃ, atthaparisuddhatāyāti atthassa nirupakkilesattaṃ. Anekehi pariyāyehīti anekehi kāraṇehi.
“我要贬抑他”,意思是“我要使他难堪”。“挂在颈上”,指将布搭在两肩,在颈部悬挂,故说“挂在颈上”。“抓住布角”,指用一只手抓住所穿下衣的边角。“登上经行处”,指登上经行处经行,故说“登上经行处”。“界平衡”,指味等诸界平衡的状态,即无病。“为了令人净信”,与“在所到之处”一句相连。也有读作“由于令人净信”的,意思是:由于肢节能带来净信,与“生起广大尊敬”相连。“讥嫌之谈”,指应被嘲笑的那种谈话。“以无行仪之状态而应被忆念”是它的定语,意思是:因无行仪的状态而应被忆念,即应被记起为“这实在是无行仪啊”。显示巴利原文
Apasādessāmīti maṅkuṃ karissāmi. Ubhosu khandhesu sāṭakaṃ āsajjetvā kaṇṭhe olambanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘kaṇṭhe olambitvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dussakaṇṇaṃ gahetvāti nivatthasāṭakassa koṭiṃ ekena hatthena gahetvā. Caṅkamitumāruhanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘caṅkamaṃ abhiruhitvā’’ti āha. Dhātusamatāti rasādidhātūnaṃ samāvatthatā, arogatāti attho. Pāsādikatthanti pasādajananatthaṃ ‘‘gatagataṭṭhāne’’ti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Pāsādikattā’’tipi pāṭho, tassattho – aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ pasādāvahattāti, ‘‘uppannabahumānā’’ti iminā sambandho. Uppaṇḍanakathanti avahasitabbatāyuttakathaṃ. ‘‘Anācārabhāvasāraṇīya’’nti tassa visesanaṃ, anācārabhāvena sāraṇīyaṃ ‘‘anācāro vatāya’’nti saritabbakanti attho.
262 为表明“他着手做这件难以达成、不可能的事”,故说“犹如想要抓住有顶天”等。因为即使与诸天同在的世间,也不可能做成这件事——贬抑世尊。所以说“他在不可能的地方用功”。“好吧,我与他交谈吧”——世尊心想:这个愚人虽在不可能处如此用功,如果我不开口,他就会更加傲慢,认为“他什么也不说,甚至不敢再与我交谈”;如果我说了,在交谈中,当他的出身种姓被揭示时,他的傲慢就会被降伏。因此,“好吧,我与他交谈吧”是世尊对青年安拔陀说这句话的用意。透过教导行仪与正行而成为老师,而这些老师中更卓越的老师称为“老师的老师”,如同“曾祖父”。为显示此义,所以说“由老师们以及他们的老师们”。显示巴利原文
262. Kātuṃ dukkaramasakkuṇeyyaṃ kiccamayaṃ ārabhīti dassetuṃ ‘‘bhavaggaṃ gahetukāmo viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asakkuṇeyyañhetaṃ sadevakenapi lokena, yadidaṃ bhagavato apasādanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aṭṭhāne vāyamatī’’ti. Handa tena saddhiṃ mantemīti evaṃ aṭṭhāne vāyamantopi ayaṃ bālo ‘‘mayi kiñci akathente mayā saddhiṃ uttari kathetumpi na visahatī’’ti mānameva paggaṇhissati, kathente pana kathāpasaṅgenassa jātigotte vibhāvite mānaniggaho bhavissati, ‘‘handa tena saddhiṃ mantemī’’ti bhagavā ambaṭṭhaṃ māṇavaṃ etadavocāti attho. Ācārasamācārasikkhāpanena ācariyā, tesaṃ pana ācariyānaṃ pakaṭṭhā ācariyāti pācariyā yathā ‘‘papitāmaho’’ti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ācariyehi ca tesaṃ ācariyehi cā’’ti vuttaṃ.
初品释义显示巴利原文
Paṭhamaibbhavādavaṇṇanā
263 虽然“或躺着”等语本不应说,但为显示他因傲慢而作对抗性的言论,故说“诚然,在三者中”等。其中,“在三威仪中”指站立、行走、坐下。唯有在这些威仪中才宜与老师交谈,而躺卧时则不当,因为对于应受尊敬者,即使他们躺卧,也不应在其面前以躺卧之姿行恭敬之举。“谈话应对”是指以谈话方式作对抗性的交谈。与躺着的老师一同躺着谈话,这确实非正行,然而此处将那种情况与其他情况相等同,称为“谈话应对”。显示巴利原文
263. Kiñcāpi ‘‘sayāno vā’’tiādivacanaṃ na vattabbaṃ, mānavasena pana yugaggāhaṃ karonto vadatīti dassento ‘‘kāmaṃ tīsū’’tiādimāha. Tattha tīsu iriyāpathesūti ṭhānagamananisajjāsu. Tesveva hi ācariyena saddhiṃ sallapitumarahati, na tu sayane garukaraṇīyānaṃ sayānānampi sammukhā garukārehi sayanassa akattabbabhāvato. Kathāsallāpanti kathāvasena yugaggāhakaraṇatthaṃ sallapanaṃ. Sayānena hi ācariyena saddhiṃ sayānassa kathā nāma ācāro na hoti, tathāpetaṃ itarehi sadisaṃ katvā kathanaṃ idha kathāsallāpo.
然而,关于“乔达摩尊者啊,难道躺着的婆罗门适合与躺着的婆罗门交谈吗”这一谈话不合威仪的说明,是导师在与安拔陀交谈时所阐明,虽未依经文纳入结集,但由无过失的师承相传至今。为了显示它与“乔达摩尊者啊,那些人……”等后续经文的关联,故说“据说从那时起”等。“牛形”是因为“牛”一词依形态而说,而“形”字亦是表示其状态。若他不是轻蔑,便会说“秃头的沙门”;但因是轻蔑,故用表示谴责的“ka”音扩展词语,说“秃头家伙们,沙门家伙们”。为显示这一点,所以说“对秃头,说秃头”等。“伊巴”是指居士,这只是就含义而言。从构词上看,“伊巴”的运用是通过省略后半部分而成为“伊巴”,那些配得上“伊巴”之称的,叠用一次便成“伊巴们”。这是什么意思呢?正如因行走优美而被称为“伊巴”的象乘,随他人意愿而行,不能自主;同样,这些服务于婆罗门的首陀罗,亦是随他人意愿而行,不能自主,因此由于与“伊巴”有相似的运用状态而称为“伊巴们”。但他们因拥有家产而成为居家之主,为了显示这层意思,故说“居士们”。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ panetaṃ ‘‘sayāno vā hi bho gotama brāhmaṇo sayānena brāhmaṇena saddhiṃ sallapitumarahatī’’ti vuttassa sallāpassa anācārabhāvavibhāvanaṃ satthārā ambaṭṭhena saddhiṃ kathentena kataṃ, taṃ pāḷivasena saṅgītimanāruḷhampi agarahitāya ācariyaparamparāya yāvajjatanā samābhatanti ‘‘ye ca kho te bho gotamā’’tiādikāya uparipāḷiyā sambandhabhāvena dassento ‘‘tato kirā’’tiādimāha. Gorūpanti go nūna rūpakavasena vuttattā, rūpasaddassa ca tabbhāvavuttito. Yadi ahīḷento bhaveyya, ‘‘muṇḍā samaṇā’’ti vadeyya, hīḷento pana garahatthena ka-saddena padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā ‘‘muṇḍakā samaṇakā’’ti vadatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘muṇḍe muṇḍā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ibbhāti gahapatikāti atthamattavacanaṃ, saddato pana ibhassa payogo ibho uttarapadalopena, taṃ ibhaṃ arahantīti ibbhā dvittaṃ katvā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā sobhanaṃ gamanato ibhasaṅkhāto hatthivāhanabhūto parassa vasena pavattati, na attano, evametepi brāhmaṇānaṃ sussūsakā suddā parassa vasena pavattanti, na attano, tasmā ibhasadisapayogatāya ibbhāti. Te pana kuṭumbikatāya gharavāsino gharasāmikā hontīti atthamattaṃ dasseti ‘‘gahapatikā’’ti iminā.
“黑色的”即生于黑色种姓者。他的用意是:唯再生族才是纯种姓,其余皆非。因此说“黑皮肤的”。因祖父身份而有亲属关系,故称“亲属”。因此说“他们称为祖父”。“子孙”指儿子们。“从口出生”是说婆罗门的祖先从梵天之口出生,此乃他们的最初起源,这便是他的意图。其余词句同理。此处有一特殊之处:在说了“伊巴们是黑色的”之后,又说“亲属脚生的子孙”,是为了显示:就家族而言,沙门属于吠舍家族;但从最初起源来说,他们是从梵天的脚背出生,而非如同普通吠舍那样从肚脐出生。然而,与“从口出生”等说法相比,他此说实为极其未经审察的前语,因为沙门身份只可能存在于四种种姓之中。“不限定”即不加以区分,意为无差别者。显示巴利原文
Kaṇhāti kaṇhajātikā. Dvijā eva hi suddhajātikā, na itareti tassādhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘kāḷakā’’ti. Pitāmahabhāvena ñātibandhavattā bandhu. Tenāha ‘‘pitāmahoti voharantī’’ti. Apaccāti puttā. Mukhato nikkhantāti brāhmaṇānaṃ pubbapurisā brahmuno mukhato nikkhantā, ayaṃ tesaṃ paṭhamuppattīti adhippāyo. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ panettha viseso – ‘‘ibbhā kaṇhā’’ti vatvā ‘‘bandhupādāpaccā’’ti vadanto kulavasena samaṇā vessakulapariyāpannā, paṭhamuppattivasena pana brahmuno piṭṭhipādato nikkhantā, na pakativessā viya nābhitoti dassetīti, idaṃ panassa ‘‘mukhato nikkhantā’’tiādivacanatopi ativiya asamavekkhitapubbavacanaṃ catuvaṇṇapariyāpannasseva samaṇabhāvasambhavato. Aniyametvāti avisesetvā, anuddesikabhāvenāti attho.
“他依凭傲慢而说”,是指他以傲慢为依怙,抬高自己、贬低他人,而说出“秃头沙门”等言语。“我要让他知道”,是指通过如实揭示自己的种姓分量而使他明白。“目的”,是指利益,或所希求之事,而那正是应做之事,因此说“来后应做之事称为目的”。他具有此目的,故称“有目的者”,如同“有杖者”。至于第二个指人的词,既然表示“他具有此”的后缀也存在,那么通过第一个词就能了知,那是以此为所缘的心。因此说“那个青年的心”。他有目的,所以是“有目的者”,如同“有德者”。显示巴利原文
Mānameva nissāya kathesīti mānamevāpassayaṃ katvā attānaṃ ukkaṃsento, pare ca vambhento ‘‘muṇḍakā samaṇakā’’tiādivacanaṃ kathesi. Jānāpessāmīti attano gottapamāṇaṃ yāthāvato vibhāvanena viññāpessāmi. Atthoti hitaṃ, icchitavatthu vā, taṃ pana kattabbakiccamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘āgantvā kattabbakiccasaṅkhāto attho’’ti, so etassa atthīti atthikaṃ yathā ‘‘daṇḍiko’’ti. Dutiyassapi puggalavācakassa tadassatthipaccayassa vijjamānattā paṭhamena tadārammaṇikacittameva viññāyatīti āha ‘‘tassa māṇavassa citta’’nti. Atthikamassa atthīti atthikavā yathā ‘‘guṇavā’’ti.
“正是为了那个目的”一句,通过“正是为了那个意义”来显示它是由于词性颠倒而说的。因此他说:“‘就是那个意义’——这是纯粹以阳性词性来说的。”因为在那句当中,是通过显示原本的词性,来成立此处非原本的词性。然而,此处还有不同于注释书的另一种理解方式:“为了那个目的”(yāya atthāya),是纯粹以阳性词性来表达与格,即“为了那个被称为意义的、应做之事的目的”。所谓“她的”,是指“展示给安巴特哈的”,这是关联。所谓“来到其他人面前的”,是指来到应受尊敬者面前的、具足行仪的人。所谓“实行”,是指他们所遵行的做法。仅从上下文即可了知“在老师家中”的意义,而“未住满者”和“未受训练的状态”,只是依随顺世俗的说法而说,如同“他以三衣覆盖了衣的布施”一般。因此他说:“在老师家中未住满者、未受训练者。”正因为未受训练,所以是少闻者;进而为了与“自认为已住满者”这一句相呼应,显示“虽是未完成学业者”是剩余的文句,故说“虽是少闻者”。因为所谓多闻,确实只应为寂静而希求;由于缺乏多闻,这位安巴特哈应被理解为未住满者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāyeva kho panatthāyā’’ti liṅgavipallāsavasena vuttanti dasseti ‘‘yeneva kho panatthenā’’ti iminā. Tenevāha ‘‘tameva atthanti idaṃ purisaliṅgavaseneva vutta’’nti. Tattha hi sābhāvikaliṅgatādassanena idha asābhāvikaliṅgatāsiddhīti. Ayaṃ panettha aṭṭhakathāto aparo nayo – yāya atthāyāti pulliṅgavaseneva tadatthe sampadānavacanaṃ, yassa kattabbakiccasaṅkhātassa atthassa atthāyāti atthoti. Assāti ambaṭṭhassa dassetvāti sambandho. Aññesaṃ santikaṃ āgatānanti garuṭṭhāniyānaṃ santikamupagatānaṃ sādhurūpānaṃ. Vattanti tesaṃ samāciṇṇaṃ. Pakaraṇatoyeva ‘‘ācariyakule’’ti attho viññāyati, ‘‘avusitavā’’ti ca asikkhitabhāvoyeva vohāravasena vutto yathā taṃ cīvaradānaṃ ticīvarena acchādesīti. Tenāha ‘‘ācariyakule avusitavā asikkhito’’ti. Asikkhitattā eva appassuto, ‘‘vusitamānī’’ti ca padāpekkhāya apariyositavacanattā samānoti pāṭhasesoti dasseti ‘‘appassutova samāno’’ti iminā. Bāhusaccañhi nāma yāvadeva upasamatthaṃ icchitabbaṃ, tadabhāvato panāyaṃ ambaṭṭho avusitavā asikkhito appassutoti viññāyatīti evampi atthāpattito kāraṇaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘kimaññatra avusitattā’’ti. Imampi sambandhaṃ dīpeti ‘‘etassa hī’’tiādinā. Yathārutato pana pharusavacanasamudācārena anupasamakāraṇadassanametaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – ‘‘kimaññatra avusitattā’’ti idaṃ kāraṇaṃ etassa ambaṭṭhassa pharusavacanasamudācāre kāraṇanti. ‘‘Pharusavacanasamudācārenā’’tipi pāṭho, tathā samudācāravasena vuttaṃ kāraṇanti attho. Evampi yojenti – avusitattā avusitabhāvaṃ aññatra ṭhapetvā etassa evaṃ pharusavacanasamudācāre kāraṇaṃ kimaññaṃ atthīti. Purimayojanāvettha yuttatarā yathāpāṭhaṃ yojetabbato. ‘‘Aññatrā’’ti nipātayogato avusitattāti upayogatthe nissakkavacanaṃ. Tadeva kāraṇaṃ samattheti ‘‘ācariyakule’’tiādinā.
264 264. 由于心随顺于名为“忿怒”的他人,所以是不自在的。“为了摧破慢”,是指为了摧破慢、为了粉碎慢,或者为了无慢,也就是为了离慢与离醉。“吐出过失”,是指通过饮用润泽之物,令被润湿的、由风、胆、痰所成的过失上涌而吐出。“以姓氏对姓氏”,是指用安巴特哈自己向世尊所问、所说、有过失的旧姓氏,来对治现在所说的无过失的姓氏。“以家族称呼对家族称呼”,此处也是同样的方法。“使之起来”,是指从有过失的状态中使之站立起来,即将其拔出。在这里,姓氏应依始祖来理解,而家族称呼则应依其传承中出现的著名人物来理解,例如“阿提车是摩伽婆”。因为释迦族的阿提车族姓,是以一位名为阿提底的天女之子为始祖,而他也被称为“乔达摩族姓”。如《出家经》中所说:显示巴利原文
264. Kodhasaṅkhātassa parassa vasānugatacittatāya asakamano. Mānanimmadanatthanti mānassa nimmadanatthaṃ abhimaddanatthaṃ, amadanatthaṃ vā, mānamadavirahatthanti attho. Dosaṃ uggiletvāti sinehapānena kilinnaṃ vātapittasemhadosaṃ ubbamanaṃ katvā. Gottena gottanti ambaṭṭheneva bhagavatā puṭṭhena vuttena sāvajjena purātanagottena adhunā anavajjasaññitaṃ gottaṃ. Kulāpadesena kulāpadesanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Uṭṭhāpetvāti sāvajjato uṭṭhahanaṃ katvā, uddharitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Gottañcettha ādipurisavasena, kulāpadeso pana tadanvaye uppannābhiññātapurisavasena gahetabbo yathā ‘‘ādicco māghavo’’ti. Sākiyānañhi ādiccagottaṃ aditiyā nāma devadhītāya puttabhūtaṃ ādipurisaṃ pati hoti, taṃ ‘‘gotamagotta’’ntipi vadanti. Yathāha pabbajjāsutte –
‘‘Ādiccā nāma gottena, sākiyā nāma jātiyā; Tamhā kulā pabbajitomhi, na kāme abhipatthaya’’nti. (su. ni. 425);
摩伽婆族,则以该传承中那位著名的马卡拉村人为始祖。由于乔达摩的根源本身应受责备,表明它不能作为慢的所依,因此说:‘我将从根部砍断傲慢之旗,令其倒下。’所谓‘撞击’,是以出生与族姓而轻蔑的意思。所谓‘轻蔑’,是轻蔑、责备的意思。其用意是:当有人以‘乔达摩尊者!释迦族是凶暴的’等语将凶暴等过失加于释迦族时,沙门乔达摩也将随之被加罪。显示巴利原文
Māghavakulaṃ pana tadanvaye abhiññātaṃ macalagāmikapurisaṃ pati hotīti. Gottamūlassa gārayhatāya amānavatthubhāvapavedanato ‘‘mānaddhajaṃ mūle chetvā nipātessāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ghaṭṭentoti jātigottavasena omasanto. Hīḷentoti hīḷanaṃ garahaṃ karonto. ‘‘Caṇḍā bho gotama sakyajātī’’tiādinā sākiyesu caṇḍabhāvādidosaṃ pāpitesu samaṇopi gotamo pāpito bhavissatīti adhippāyo.
为了显示:当慢随眠与忿怒随眠相互增长时,那人便被称为“凶暴者”,故说“与依于慢的忿怒相结合”。此处,“依止”是就自然亲依止和所缘而言,并非就俱生等而言。“粗硬”是指心与语的粗硬。“轻率”是指幼稚、不成熟的行为,因此他说:“以很少的……”等。“葫芦碗”,是指葫芦果不可破的硬壳。为了显示注释书之外的方法,论师说:“有些人说‘bhassā’是鲁莽的,另一些人则说是好斗的”(《长部注疏》1.264)。“虽是”,即“成为、存在”之义,依“as”词根的意义,他说:“‘santā’正是前一词的同义词。”“不尊重”,正是显示“不尊重婆罗门”等的意思。“恭敬的行为”,是指合掌的行为。在后句“那些释迦族”中,关系代词“ya”的所指并不确定,而在前句“乔达摩尊者啊,那件事”中,则用指示代词“ta”加以限定,这是应知的,因此他说:“那些释迦族”等。“不随顺”,是指与自己的出身不相应。显示巴利原文
Yasmiṃ mānussayakodhussayā aññamaññūpatthaddhā, so ‘‘caṇḍo’’ti vuccatīti dasseti ‘‘mānanissitakodhayuttā’’ti iminā, pakatūpanissayārammaṇavasena cettha nissitabhāvo, na sahajātādivasena. Kharāti cittena, vācāya ca kakkhaḷā. Lahukāti taruṇā avuddhakammā. Tenāha ‘‘appakenevā’’tiādi. Alābukaṭāhanti lābuphalassa abhejjakapālaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāmuttakanayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhassāti sāhasikāti keci vadanti, sārambhakāti apare’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.264) ācariyena vuttaṃ. Samānāti hontā bhavamānāti asasaddavasenatthoti āha ‘‘santāti purimapadasseva vevacana’’nti. Na sakkarontīti sakkāraṃ na karontīti atthameva viññāpeti ‘‘na brāhmaṇāna’’ntiādinā. Apacitikammanti paṇipātakammaṃ. ‘‘Yadime sakyā’’ti pacchimavākye ya-saddassa kiriyāparāmasanassa aniyamassa ‘‘tayidaṃ bho gotamā’’ti purimavākye ta-saddena niyamanaṃ veditabbanti āha ‘‘yaṃ ime sakyā’’tiādi. Nānulomanti attano jātiyā na anucchavikaṃ.
第二“仆役”之说注释显示巴利原文
Dutiyaibbhavādavaṇṇanā
265 265. “议事堂”一词的解释,前面已说。那时,也针对许多已灌顶的释迦王而说“已灌顶的释迦王们”。因为,在释迦王族中,虽是最年长而有才能者获得灌顶;然而,有些已灌顶者心想:“这王权确实事务繁多、麻烦重重”,便对此生起厌离,将其交给次于己者;有时,那人又转交给另一人。如此,因辗转交付,那时便有许多曾受灌顶的释迦王——这是论师所认可的(《长部注疏》1.265)。此外,也可以说,是针对许多在各职位上如法灌顶的释迦王而这样说的,这也合理。因为他们被称为“王”。如他所说:显示巴利原文
265. Sandhāgārapadanibbacanaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Tadā abhisittasakyarājūnampi bahutaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘abhisittasakyarājāno’’ti. Kāmañhi sakyarājakule yo sabbesaṃ vuddhataro, samattho ca, so eva abhisekaṃ labhati . Ekacco pana abhisitto samāno ‘‘idaṃ rajjaṃ nāma bahukiccaṃ bahubyāpāra’’nti tato nibbijja rajjaṃ vayasā anantarassa niyyāteti, kadāci sopi aññassāti evaṃ paramparāniyyātanavasena tadā bahū abhisittapubbā sakyarājāno hontīti idaṃ ācariyassābhimataṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.265). Apica yathārahaṃ ṭhānantaresu abhisittasakyarājūnampi bahutaṃ sandhāya evamāhātipi yujjati. Te hi ‘‘rājāno’’ti vuccanti. Yathāha –
“所谓诸王,即大地王、地方王、领主、中域主、判官、大臣,以及任何行使裁决权而进行统治的人,这些即称为王。”(《波罗夷》92)显示巴利原文
‘‘Rājāno nāma pathabyārājā, padesarājā, maṇḍalikā, antarabhogikā, akkhadassā, mahāmattā, ye vā pana chejjabhejjaṃ karontā anusāsanti, ete rājāno nāmā’’ti (pārā. 92).
以凶兽皮制成的床、吉祥凳、藤座。微笑,即仅微微而笑。轻笑,即仅轻轻而笑。“随笑”是指她们针对我所指示之事发出大笑,因为这是对“anujagghantā(随笑)”一词的注释。“jaggha(笑)”这个字也用于表示大笑,就像在“我将不以哈哈大笑的方式行于村落中”等(《巴帝摩卡》586)文句中那样。显示巴利原文
Saṃhārimehi vāḷarūpehi kato pallaṅko, bhaddapīṭhaṃ vettāsanaṃ. Mihitamattaṃ hasitamattaṃ. Anuhasantīti mamuddesikaṃ mahāhasitaṃ karonti, idañhi ‘‘anujagghantā’’ti etassa saṃvaṇṇanāpadaṃ. Jagghasaddo ca mahāhasane pavattati ‘‘na ujjagghikāya antaraghare gamissāmī’’tiādīsu (pāci. 586) viya.
从迦那延那开始,代代相传的家族世系,他们仅凭传闻而知晓。那些以家族为傲的人,大多会那样那般地引述他人或高或低的家族,而他们自己的家族世系,他们自己知道。阿摩昼也是如此,正因如此,当他被世尊这样追问时,出于对金刚手的畏惧,便如实讲述了自己的家族世系。“垂下”是指他那如同象鼻等形状一般垂下的衣服。“于彼”即由于如是了知而前往。“唯我想”即这仅仅是我想的,意思就是“她们只是在对我随笑、取乐,我这样想”。显示巴利原文
Kaṇhāyanato paṭṭhāya paramparāgataṃ kulavaṃsaṃ anussavavasena jānanti. Kulābhimānino hi yebhuyyena paresaṃ uccāvacaṃ kulaṃ tathā tathā udāharanti, attano ca kulavaṃsaṃ jānanti, evaṃ ambaṭṭhopi, tathā hesa parato bhagavatā pucchito vajirapāṇi bhayena attano kulavaṃsaṃ yāthāvato kathesīti. Olambetvāti hatthisoṇḍasaṇṭhānādinā sāṭakaṃ avalambetvā. Tatoti tathājānanato, gamanato ca. Mamaññeva maññeti mamameva anujagghantā maññe.
第三“富者说”之注释显示巴利原文
Tatiyaibbhavādavaṇṇanā
266 266.“田中土块”:指在田中因耕作而翻起的土块碎片。由于居住在土块之间,便以“土块鸟”之名称呼它们(《长部义注》1.266),是一种小鸟。在《中部·中分五十》的《土块鸟喻经注释》中,称其为“乞雨鸟”(《中部义注》3.150),而在各类词典中,则称之为“拉巴鸟”。“由嗔怒而附着”即去附着,意为结下怨恨。显示巴利原文
266.Khettaleḍḍūnanti khette kasanavasena uṭṭhāpitamattikākhaṇḍānaṃ. Leḍḍukānamantare nivāsitattā ‘‘leḍḍukikā’’ icceva (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.266) saññātā khuddakasakuṇikā. Majjhimapaṇṇāsake leḍḍukikopamasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘cātakasakuṇikā’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.150) vuttā, nighaṇṭusatthesu pana taṃ ‘‘lāpasakuṇikā’’ti vadanti. Kodhavasena laggitunti upanayhituṃ, āghātaṃ bandhitunti attho.
说“他将我们作鹅、孔雀、野鹅”者,是指先前所取的“没有任何鹅、孔雀或野鹅来对你‘你在嚷什么’而遮止”,这也显示此言并未编入结集的诵本,而是当时世尊亲口所说的。因为那时正在说者本身就应该说“他如此作”。“‘如此对你’等语”及“‘唯未修习’等语”,是阿摩昼认为沙门乔达摩出于傲慢所说,以此意趣而说出“今慢已生,作如是想”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Amhe haṃsakoñcamorasame karotī’’ti vadanto heṭṭhā gahitaṃ ‘‘na taṃ koci haṃso vā koñco vā moro vā āgantvā kiṃ tvaṃ lapasīti nisedhetī’’ti idampi vacanaṃ saṅgītimanāruḷhaṃ tadā bhagavatā vuttamevāti dasseti. Tadā vadantoyeva hi evaṃ karotīti vattumarahati. ‘‘Evaṃ nu te’’tiādivacanaṃ, ‘‘avusitavāyevā’’tiādivacanañca mānavasena samaṇena gotamena vuttanti ambaṭṭho maññatīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘nimmāno dāni jātoti maññamāno’’ti.
“奴子说”之注释显示巴利原文
Dāsiputtavādavaṇṇanā
267 “Nimmādetī(令发狂)”:将a音变为ā音,此异读显示其由mada(醉慢)之音转成ummāda(狂)之义,故以此“nimmadetī(令离慢)”显示。“Nimmāneti”即离慢。“若我问族姓则善哉”正是此义。为令其显明,便以大声三度宣说。为何宣说?虽知其不清净,仍询问他如此说的因由。所指的正是成为族姓的那个名字,而非另外的族姓,故说“父母所属”。因为族姓本应从父方获得,即唯父方所属,并非父母双方所属。因为婆罗门并不期望与同族姓者通婚,而族姓之名是生来即有的,并非施设,亦非以德为名;生系属双方,故是父母所属,非仅父方。“名族姓”即成为族姓之名,非施设,亦非以德为名,因为是依修饰语后缀而说,如“不降甘露”。因其此名依传承而流转,故亦是族姓,即称为名族姓。其中,“迦那延那”之名施设是已确立的,依此而说“依施设为名”。然而此名是从迦那伊沙那起依此家族代代相传而来,并非仅在此处确立,故说“依传承为族姓”。族姓一词的文义已于下文说毕。显示巴利原文
267.Nimmādetīti a-kārassa ā-kāraṃ katvā niddeso ummāde madasaddena nipphannattāti dasseti ‘‘nimmadetī’’ti iminā. Nimmāneti vigatamāne. Yadi panāhaṃ gottaṃ puccheyyaṃ sādhu vatāti attho. Pākaṭaṃ kātukamyatāya tikkhattuṃ mahāsaddena avoca. Kasmā avocāti pana asuddhabhāvaṃ jānantassāpi tathāvacane kāraṇapucchā. Gottabhūtaṃ nāmameva adhippetaṃ, na visuṃ gottanti āha ‘‘mātāpettikanti mātāpitūnaṃ santaka’’nti. Gottañhi pitito laddhabbaṃ pettikameva, na mātāpettikaṃ. Na hi brāhmaṇānaṃ sagottāya eva āvāhavivāho icchito, gottanāmaṃ pana jātisiddhaṃ, na kittimaṃ, na guṇanāmaṃ vā, jāti ca ubhayasambandhinīti mātāpettikameva, na pettikamattaṃ. Nāmagottanti gottabhūtaṃ nāmaṃ, na kittimaṃ, na guṇanāmaṃ vā visesanaparanipātavasena vuttattā yathā ‘‘agyāhito’’ti. Nāmañca tadeva paveṇīvasena pavattattā gottañcāti hi nāmagottaṃ. Tattha yā ‘‘kaṇhāyano’’ti nāmapaṇṇatti niruḷhā, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘paṇṇattivasena nāma’’nti. Taṃ panetaṃ nāmaṃ kaṇhaisito paṭṭhāya tasmiṃ kulaparamparāvasena āgataṃ, na etasmiṃyeva niruḷhanti vuttaṃ ‘‘paveṇīvasena gotta’’nti. Gottapadassa vacanattho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.
“随念”者,此处不仅仅意指随念而已,而是唯依考察家族清净之故,说“澄清家族端绪者”,即澄清家族最上端之义。“圣子”者,此处“圣”一词即“圣女”,说为“主人之子”。在四婢女中,西方胜迦王的婢女是家生婢,故说“家婢之子”。此处,因阿摩昼依出身而骄慢,若不如实显明其出身,则不能折伏其慢;若未折伏慢,他将因慢而错失三宝;若折伏了慢,后来他将于三宝生起净信,而且他的言语不可称为粗恶语,因其心已变得柔软。《中分五十》的《无畏经》(《中部》2.83)也是此处的例证。有些人虽以粗语被呵责,却如火等变得柔软,因此世尊欲令阿摩昼谦逊,便说:“释迦族是圣子,你是释迦族的奴子。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Anussarato’’ti ettha na kevalaṃ anussaraṇamattaṃ adhippetaṃ, atha kho kulasuddhivīmaṃsanavasenevāti āha ‘‘kulakoṭiṃ sodhentassā’’ti, kulaggaṃ visodhentassāti attho. ‘‘Ayyaputtā’’ti ettha ayyasaddo ayyiraketi vuttaṃ ‘‘sāmino puttā’’ti. Catūsu dāsīsu disā okkākarañño antojātadāsī. Tenāha ‘‘gharadāsiyā putto’’ti. Ettha ca yasmā ambaṭṭho jātiṃ nissāya mānathaddho, na ca tassa yāthāvato jātiyā avibhāvitāya mānaniggaho karīyati, akate ca mānaniggahe mānavasena ratanattayaṃ aparajjhissati, kate pana mānaniggahe aparabhāge ratanattaye pasīdissati, na cedisī vācā pharusavācā nāma hoti cittassa saṇhabhāvato. Majjhimapaṇṇāsake abhayasuttañca (ma. ni. 2.83) ettha nidassanaṃ . Keci ca janā kakkhaḷāya vācāya vuttā agginā viya lohādayo mudubhāvaṃ gacchanti, tasmā bhagavā ambaṭṭhaṃ nibbisevanaṃ kattukāmo ‘‘ayyaputtā sakyā bhavanti, dāsiputto tvamasi sakyāna’’nti avoca.
此处“daha”一词,如“此有某个邪恶比丘,学习了如来所宣说的法、律之后,将其用于自身”等语句中(《波罗夷》195)那样,是“执持”的意思;而此处的执持,是以“祖先”的方式来认知,故说“欧卡卡是我们的祖先”等。因为精通音声者认为“daha”一词兼有“焚烧”与“执持”二义。“光芒发出(pabhā niccharati)”即意指“有光(pabhās)”,因那样的善业,牙齿变得光亮而发出光芒。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idhekacco pāpabhikkhu tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammavinayaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā attano dahatī’’tiādīsu (pārā. 195) viya dahasaddo dhāraṇattho, dhāraṇañcettha pubbapurisavasena saññāpananti āha ‘‘okkāko no pubbapuriso’’tiādi. Dahasaddañhi bhasmīkaraṇe, dhāraṇe ca icchanti saddavidū. Pabhā niccharatīti pabhassaraṃ hutvā nikkhamati tathārūpena puññakammena dantānaṃ pabhassarabhāvato.
“Te”指长子们。“Paṭhamakappikānaṃ”指生于最初劫初的人们。此处以“据说”之义使用“kira”一词,是为了点出在所叙述的这套王统传承中,有人存在意见分歧。正是通过“据说”一词,排除了优多罗毗诃罗住者等未曾听闻此说者的意见分歧。“Mahāsammatassa”指依照《阿含经》中将叙述的方式,由大众认可并确立为“此即我们的王”,因而被称为“大众认可者”的那位。关于他,人们这样说——显示巴利原文
Teti jeṭṭhakumāre. Paṭhamakappikānanti paṭhamakappassa ādikāle nibbattānaṃ. Kirasaddena cettha anussavatthena, yo vuccamānāya rājaparamparāya kesañci matibhedo, taṃ ulliṅgeti. Anussavavacaneneva hi ananussuto uttaravihāravāsiādīnaṃ matibhedo nirākarīyatīti. Mahāsammatassāti aggaññasutte vakkhamānanayena ‘‘ayaṃ no rājā’’ti mahājanena sammannitvā ṭhapitattā ‘‘mahāsammato’’ti evaṃ sammatassa. Yaṃ sandhāya vadanti –
“生于太阳族,具备清净功德;”
他是一位具大威德的国王,名为大选王。
他是世间之眼目,以功德光芒而璀璨照耀;
他驱散黑暗,照亮世间,犹如第二个太阳。
那位寻求世间利益者,已在世间设立了界限;
人们无法逾越他所确立的界限。
他具足名声与威德,是世间界限的守护者;
人们称这位最初的大英雄为‘摩奴’。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ādiccakulasambhūto, suvisuddhaguṇākaro; Mahānubhāvo rājāsi, mahāsammatanāmako. Yo cakkhubhūto lokassa, guṇaraṃsisamujjalo; Tamonudo virocittha, dutiyo viya bhāṇumā. Ṭhapitā yena mariyādā, loke lokahitesinā; Vavatthitā sakkuṇanti, na vilaṅghayitu janā. Yasassinaṃ tejassinaṃ, lokasīmānurakkhakaṃ; Ādibhūtaṃ mahāvīraṃ, kathayanti ‘manū’ti ya’’nti. (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.267);
关于他的子孙后裔的传承,人们这样说——显示巴利原文
Tassa ca puttapaputtaparamparaṃ sandhāya evaṃ vadanti –
‘‘Tassa putto mahātejo, rojo nāma mahīpati;
“Teti”意为“长兄”,而“初代国王”指国王世系最初的产生。此处暗示了不同传说中所出生的种种国王,即论及王系谱时的诸不同意见。此处意在强调不认可那些自居为国王后裔或上层大族的异说。此人被称为“大公认者”,即《大起世经》中所说“这是我们的王”。以上即是其所指。显示巴利原文
Tassa putto vararojo, pavaro rājamaṇḍale.
他有一个具足善德的儿子,名叫迦罗耶那;
那位国王有一子,名为瓦拉迦罗耶那。
他的儿子是大雄,是享受欲乐者中的曼陀多王;
他是无上士,受大因陀罗以半国领地供养。
他的儿子具大威光,名为瓦拉曼陀多;
其子名为“优波萨他”,声名远播。
其子名为“瓦拉”,具大威光,亦称“大瓦拉”;
其子优波瓦拉王,力大无比。
显示巴利原文 Tassāsi kalyāṇaguṇo, kalyāṇo nāma atrajo; Rājā tassāsi tanayo, varakalyāṇanāmako. Tassa putto mahāvīro, mandhātā kāmabhoginaṃ; Aggabhūto mahindena, aḍḍharajjena pūjito. Tassa sūnu mahātejo, varamandhātunāmako; ‘Uposatho’ti nāmena, tassa putto mahāyaso. Varo nāma mahātejo, tassa putto mahāvaro; Tassāsi upavaroti, putto rājā mahābalo. Tassa putto maghadevo, devatulyo mahīpati; Caturāsīti sahassāni, tassa puttaparamparā. Tesaṃ pacchimako rājā, ‘okkāko’iti vissuto; Mahāyaso mahātejo, akhuddo rājamaṇḍale’’ti. (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.267);
此是不违注疏之说。而《岛史》中则说——显示巴利原文
Idaṃ aṭṭhakathānuparodhavacanaṃ. Yaṃ pana dīpavaṃse vuttaṃ –
初受灌顶的国王,乃执持光明的护地者;
他以“大众所认可”之名,作为刹帝利统理王国。
其子名为罗阇,及瓦拉罗阇,皆为刹帝利;
迦逻耶那、瓦拉迦逻耶那、优波萨他,是为大自在者。
曼陀多是他们中的第七位,为四洲之主;
瓦拉王、优波瓦拉王,以及支提耶,是大自在者”等。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Paṭhamābhisitto rājā, bhūmipālo jutindharo; Mahāsammato nāmena, rajjaṃ kāresi khattiyo. Tassa putto rojo nāma, vararojo ca khattiyo; Kalyāṇo varakalyāṇo, uposatho mahissaro. Mandhātā sattamo tesaṃ, catudīpamhi issaro; Varo upavaro rājā, cetiyo ca mahissaro’’tiādi.
以及《大史》等中所说的——显示巴利原文
Yañca mahāvaṃsādīsu vuttaṃ –
大牟尼乃大众认可者王的后裔;
劫初之时,有一位国王名为大众认可者。
罗阇与瓦拉罗阇,以及两位迦罗耶那;
“优波娑陀与曼陀多,瓦拉卡与两位帕瓦拉”等。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Mahāsammatarājassa, vaṃsajo hi mahāmuni; Kappādismiṃ rājāsi, mahāsammatanāmako. Rojo ca vararojo ca, tathā kalyāṇakā duve; Uposatho ca mandhātā, varako pavarā duve’’tiādi.
所有这类说法大多与注疏相违。因为注疏中,曼陀多王被说为第六位,摩伽提婆王是第十一位,其子孙传承中八万四千国王的最后一位是甘蔗王;然而在那些说法中,曼陀多王被说为第七位,摩伽提婆王是数千国王的最后一位,其子孙传承中数千国王的最后一位是甘蔗王。如这些等,注疏以种种方式破斥了这些相违之说。难道我们没有说过:‘此处以“据说”之义使用“kira”一词,是为了显示在所叙述的王统传承中存在某些人的意见分歧’吗?‘在他们之后’是指:在摩伽提婆传承的、以迦罗罗阇那迦为终点的八万四千刹帝利之后的部分,是导师依传闻所说。然而在《岛史》等中则说:‘迦罗罗阇那迦王的子孙传承中,数千刹帝利的最后一位国王名为苏阇多,他的儿子是甘蔗王。’在摩伽提婆传承的数千国王之后,有第一位甘蔗王;在其传承的数千国王之后,有第二位甘蔗王;在其传承的数千国王之后,有第三位甘蔗王。对此,他说:‘有三个甘蔗王族’等。显示巴利原文
Sabbametaṃ yebhuyyato aṭṭhakathāvirodhavacanaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyañhi mandhāturājā chaṭṭho vutto, maghadevarājā ekādasamo, tassa ca puttaparamparāya caturāsītisahassarājūnaṃ pacchimako okkākarājā, tesu pana mandhāturājā sattamo vutto, maghadevarājā anekesaṃ rājasahassānaṃ pacchimako, tassa ca puttaparamparāya anekarājasahassānaṃ pacchimako okkākarājāti evamādinā anekadhā virodhavacanaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ nirākaroti. Nanu avocumha ‘‘kirasaddena cettha anussavatthena, yo vuccamānāya rājaparamparāya kesañci matibhedo, taṃ ulliṅgetī’’ti. Tesaṃ pacchatoti maghadevaparamparābhūtānaṃ kaḷārajanakapariyosānānaṃ caturāsītikhattiyasahassānaṃ aparabhāgeti yathānussutaṃ ācariyena vuttaṃ. Dīpavaṃsādīsu pana ‘‘kaḷārajanakarañño puttaparamparāya anekakhattiyasahassānaṃ pacchimako rājā sujāto nāma, tassa putto okkāko rājā’’ti vuttaṃ. Maghadevaparamparāya anekasahassarājūnaṃ aparabhāge paṭhamo okkāko nāma rājā ahosi, tassa paramparābhūtānaṃ pana anekasahassarājūnaṃ aparabhāge dutiyo okkāko nāma rājā ahosi, tassapi paramparāya anekasahassarājūnaṃ aparabhāge tatiyo okkāko nāma rājā ahosi. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tayo okkākavaṃsā ahesu’’ntiādi.
据说,在出生后的第五天举行命名等庆典是世间通行的习俗,因此说‘于第五天,妆点之后’。‘他匆忙地给予恩赐’意思是:因见到儿子而心生极强的喜悦,他便急速地、未经审察地出于欢喜而赐予恩赐,说道:‘你想要什么,就拿去吧。’‘她’是指禅度王子的母亲。‘她想转移王位’意思是:她想以我的恩赐作为机会,将此王位转移。显示巴利原文
Jātiyā pañcamadivase nāmakammādimaṅgalaṃ lokāciṇṇanti vuttaṃ ‘‘pañcamadivase alaṅkaritvā’’ti. Sahasā varaṃ adāsinti puttadassanena balavasomanassappatto turitaṃ avīmaṃsitvā tuṭṭhidāyavasena varaṃ adāsiṃ ‘‘yaṃ icchasi, taṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti. Sāti jantukumāramātā. Rajjaṃ pariṇāmetuṃ icchatīti mama varadānaṃ antaraṃ katvā imaṃ rajjaṃ pariṇāmetuṃ icchati.
“将令统治”意为:将让大众居于王位,或让大众执行统治。“不能承受”意为:作为住处,将不敷使用。显示巴利原文
Rajjaṃkāressantīti rājabhāvaṃ mahājanena mahājanaṃ vā kārāpessanti. Nappasaheyyāti nivāsatthāya pariyatto na bhaveyya.
因肤色黝黑,故称迦毗罗婆罗门。“出离”指离开在家生活与诸欲。“萨迦”是一种材质极佳的殊胜树木,用以建造宫殿等,此处指由该树聚集而成的树林。“地”指发生于地面的,“地网”意为能燃烧、照亮其优劣性质,或藉此而燃烧、照亮、显现。在“下方”一词之后,以“ca”字引出“八十肘”的表述。“于此地”指萨迦树林。就树干排列而言,向右旋绕;就树枝排列而言,面向东方。“他们”指野猪、鹿,以及蛙、鼠等。“他们”指狮子、老虎等,以及蛇、猫等。显示巴利原文
Kaḷāravaṇṇatāya kapilabrāhmaṇo nāma ahosi. Nikkhammāti gharāvāsato kāmehi ca nikkhamitvā. Sāko nāma sabbasāramayo rukkhaviseso, yena pāsādādi karīyate, taṃsamudāyabhūte vanasaṇḍeti attho. Bhūmiyā pavattaṃ bhummaṃ, taṃ guṇadosaṃ jāleti joteti, taṃ vā jalati jotati pākaṭaṃ bhavati etāyāti bhummajālā. Heṭṭhā cāti ettha ca-saddena ‘‘asītihatthe’’ti idamanukaḍḍhati. Etasmiṃ padeseti sākavanasaṇḍamāha. Khandhapantivasena dakkhiṇāvaṭṭā. Sākhāpantivasena pācīnābhimukhā. Tehīti migasūkarehi, maṇḍūkamūsikehi ca. Teti sīhabyagghādayo sappabiḷārā ca.
“于此”指在如此建造的城市中。综合句义为:你们的人中,任何一人也无力战胜成为敌人的其他百人乃至千人。“以转轮王之力”指以转轮王之力的状态。“最胜”意为成为最为殊胜的。因为是迦毗罗仙人的住处,故称迦毗罗卫。显示巴利原文
Etthāti evaṃ māpiyamāne nagare. Tumhākaṃ purisesu pariyāpannaṃ ekekampi purisaṃ paccatthikabhūtaṃ aññaṃ purisasatampi purisasahassampi abhibhavituṃ na sakkhissatīti yojanā. Cakkavattibalenāti cakkavattibalabhāvena. Atiseyyoti ativiya uttamo bhaveyya. Kapilassa isino vasanaṭṭhānattā kapilavatthu.
“应存在于他们之中”是句义连结。“不匹配的结合”指种姓不相似者,以在家生活的结合为因。“与其余者”指与各自的妹妹。显示巴利原文
Nesaṃ santike bhaveyyāti sambandho. Asadisasaṃyogeti jātiyā asadisānaṃ gharāvāsapayoge hetubhūte. Avasesāhi attano attano kaṇiṭṭhāhi.
“正在增长者”是不尊重格的主格形式,意指:在无有障碍地增长子女的过程中,就在他们增长之时出生了。“因血色”指类似紫矿花的颜色。麻风病如同肺痨、天花等病,大多具有传染性,因此说“此病会传染”。用木板覆盖其上,堆土后给予。称为“舞女”者即跳舞的女子。国王的妻妾称为“后宫”。“其”指孔穴。在“鹿、鸟等”中,“等”字包含林中游行者、饿鬼等。显示巴利原文
Vaḍḍhamānānanti anādare sāmivacanaṃ, anantarāyikāya puttadhītuvaḍḍhanāya vaḍḍhamānesu eva udapādīti attho. Lohitakatāya koviḷārapupphasadisāni. Kuṭṭharogo nāma sāsamasūrīrogā viya yebhuyyena saṅkamanasabhāvoti vuttaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ rogo saṅkamatī’’ti. Upari padarena paṭicchādetvā paṃsuṃ rāsikaraṇena datvā. Nāṭakitthiyo nāma naccantiyo. Rājabhariyāyo orodhā nāma. Tassāti susirassa. Migasakuṇādīnanti ettha ādisaddena vanacarakapetādike saṅgaṇhāti.
“坐于彼罗摩王苑中”是句义连结。“木板”指木片。“以宣示刹帝利种姓”是指让人知道自己是刹帝利之后。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ rāmaraññe nisinneti sambandho. Padareti dāruphalake. Khattiyamāyārocanena attano khattiyabhāvaṃ jānāpetvā.
“母系”指从母系传来。“礼物”指根本财物,或赠品。“国王”指罗摩王的长子,即波罗奈国王。“于彼处”指在波罗奈。“即于此”指就在雪山边。“城”指作为国都的大城。名为“拘罗树”者,是一种可用来治疗麻风的殊胜树木。“虎道”指老虎所行之道。显示巴利原文
Mātikanti mātito āgataṃ. Pābhatanti mūlabhaṇḍaṃ, paṇṇākāro vā. Raññoti rāmarājassa jeṭṭhaputtabhūtassa bārāṇasirañño. Tatthāti bārāṇasiyaṃ. Idhevāti himavantapasseyeva. Nagaranti rājadhānībhūtaṃ mahānagaraṃ. Kolarukkho nāma kuṭṭhabhesajjupago eko rukkhaviseso. Byagghapatheti byagghamagge.
“舅父们”指母亲的兄弟。“执发”指编结发辫。“执衣”指穿着衣服的方式。“沐浴处”指如前所说的那座池沼中用来沐浴的水处。现在为了表明他们至今仍无种姓混杂,才说“他们如是”等语。“迎娶”指迎娶女子。“出嫁”指嫁出女子。“于彼处”指在这些释迦族与拘利族中。因为“dha”字有多义,而“saṃ”字有居住之义,因此说“居住”。关于“于最初”:此处以处格表示受格的含义,“agga”字有最初义,而且是动作的差别,所以用“彼为最初”等语来显示。世尊于此所说:“那时,庵婆咤!奥迦迦王发出感叹:‘诸子真是释迦,诸子真是最上释迦。’庵婆咤!从此以后,释迦族便得名。”从音声与意义而言,这是自然词源的示例:“能与自己姊妹共住而不令种姓混杂,能守护、能维持家族传承,所以称为释迦。”他们正是依音声构造的差别而称“释迦”。然而,在《释迦尼犍度》等论典中所说:显示巴利原文
Mātulāti mātu bhātaro. Kesaggahaṇanti kesaveṇibandhanaṃ. Dussaggahaṇanti vatthassa nivasanākāro. Nhānatitthanti yathāvuttāya pokkharaṇiyā udakanhānatitthaṃ. Idānipi tesaṃ jātisambhedābhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘evaṃ tesa’’ntiādimāha. Āvāho dārikāharaṇaṃ. Vivāho dārikādānaṃ. Tatthāti tesu sakyakoliyesu. Dhātusaddānamanekatthattā samusaddo nivāsatthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘vasantī’’ti. Aggeti upayogatthe bhummavacanaṃ, ādyatthe ca aggasaddo, kiriyāvisesoti ca dasseti ‘‘taṃ agga’’ntiādinā. Yadettha bhagavatā vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho ambaṭṭha rājā okkāko udānaṃ udānesi ‘sakyā vata bho kumārā, paramasakyā vata bho kumārā’ti, tadagge kho pana ambaṭṭha sakyā paññāyantī’’ti, tadetaṃ saddato, atthato ca sābhāvikanibbacananidassanaṃ ‘‘sakāhi bhaginīhipi saddhiṃ saṃvāsavasena jātisambhedamakatvā kulavaṃsaṃ anurakkhituṃ sakkuṇanti samatthentīti sakyā’’ti teyeva saddaracanāvisesena sākiyā. Yaṃ panetaṃ sakkatanighaṇṭusatthesu vuttaṃ –
“因往昔曾以萨咖树为覆蔽,而作住处,”
因此,当这一族姓出现于世间时,便被称作“释迦”,名闻遐迩。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sākarukkhapaṭicchannaṃ, vāsaṃ yasmā purākaṃsu; Tasmā diṭṭhā vaṃsajāte, bhuvi ‘sakyā’ti vissutā’’ti.
这仅仅是随顺音声而作的假名释词例示:“因住在迦毗罗仙人住处所在的萨咖林中,所以称为释迦、释迦族。”显示巴利原文
Tadetaṃ saddamattaṃ pati asābhāvikanibbacananidassanaṃ ‘‘kapilamunino vasanaṭṭhāne sākavane vasantīti sakyā,sākiyā’’ti ca.
因为肤色黝黑,所以称名为“黑”,也就是“黑色”等。颔部长出的髭须,以及上唇两侧状如獠牙而生者,是胡须。这只是就字面义理而说。若从派生构词来看,则如同现今之人见到毕舍遮便称之为“毕舍遮”,那时之人见到他,也便以“黑”称之。因此,他刚一出生便能开口说话,由于形貌类似毕舍遮,而被唤作“黑”。正如经中所说:“庵婆咤!恰如当今之人见到毕舍遮,便认知为‘毕舍遮’,庵婆咤!那时之人见到毕舍遮,也同样认知为‘黑’。”其中,“毕舍遮已生”一语,是以当今通晓的名称令其易解,而作为前述词的同义语而说。至于“我将不以含食之口说话”等语句,其中“hara”字经由前缀而有“发声”之义,再与第二前缀结合,便用于“高声”之义,因此说为“发出高声”。显示巴利原文
Kāḷavaṇṇatāya kaṇho nāmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘kāḷavaṇṇa’’ntiādi. Hanuyaṃ jātā massū, uttaroṭṭhassa ubhosu passesu dāṭhākārena jātā dāṭhikā. Idañca atthamattena vuttaṃ, taddhitavasena pana yathā etarahi yakkhe ‘‘pisāco’’ti samaññā, evaṃ tadā ‘‘kaṇho’’ti, tasmā jātamatteyeva sabyāharaṇena pisācasadisatāya kaṇhoti. Tathāhi vuttaṃ ‘‘yathā kho pana ambaṭṭha etarahi manussā pisāce disvā ‘pisācā’ti sañjānanti, evameva kho ambaṭṭha tena kho pana samayena manussā pisāce ‘kaṇhā’ti sañjānantī’’tiādi. Tattha pisāco jātoti idāni pākaṭanāmena suviññāpanatthaṃ purimapadasseva vevacanaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Na sakabaḷena mukhena byāharissāmī’’tiādīsu (pāci. 619) viya upasaggavasena saddakaraṇattho harasaddo, puna dutiyopasaggena yutto uccāsaddakaraṇe vattatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘uccāsaddamakāsī’’ti.
268 “为解除自己之讥嫌”:老师与庵婆咤各自为去除可能加于自身的非难。“自己”在此是各别的用语。“将离间”指以宣说不利的意图而行离间,即进行离间语。由于表达义理时言语本身就是工具,因此从语法上说,“语具”即言语,善妙者即是“善语具”。“于此语中”的“彼”字,虽可指庵婆咤之前所说“乔达摩尊者!有四种姓”等种姓论,但此种姓论应依吠陀所说方式与之对论,为了显示对论的因由,故以众人熟知的三吠陀语来指称,而说“于自己所学之三吠陀语中”。现在为显示世尊所说“庵婆咤!你的父母系谱实为古旧”等语亦被指称,故说“或于此婢子之语中”。再者,“对论”意为解答问题,或进行论辩,因此应知为显示依此二义相应,而以“彼”字指称其对象。显示巴利原文
268. Attano upārambhamocanatthāyāti ācariyena, ambaṭṭhena ca attano attano upari pāpetabbopavādassa apanayanatthaṃ. ‘‘Attano’’ti hetaṃ vicchālopavacanaṃ. Paribhindissatīti anatthakāmatāpavedanena paribhedaṃ karissati, pesuññaṃ upasaṃharissatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atthaviññāpane sādhanatāya vācā eva karaṇaṃ vākkaraṇaṃ niruttinayena, taṃ kalyāṇamassāti kalyāṇavākkaraṇo. Asmiṃ vacaneti ettha tasaddena kāmaṃ ‘‘cattārome bho gotama vaṇṇā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.266) ambaṭṭhena heṭṭhā vutto jātivādo parāmasitabbo hoti, tathāpesa jātivādo vede vuttavidhināyeva tena paṭimantetabbo, tasmā paṭimantanahetubhāvena pasiddhaṃ vedattayavacanameva parāmasitabbanti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘attanā uggahite vedattayavacane’’ti. Idāni ‘‘porāṇaṃ kho pana te ambaṭṭha mātāpettika’’ntiādinā bhagavatā vuttavacanassapi parāmasanaṃ dassento ‘‘etasmiṃ vā dāsiputtavacane’’ti āha. Apica paṭimantetunti ettha paṭimantanā nāma pañhāvissajjanā, uttarikathanā vā, tasmā atthadvayānurūpaṃ tabbisayassa ta-saddena parāmasanaṃ dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
269 “Tāvā”意指:在商议之初,即尚未进行商议。也就是说,“商议尚未进行”。“Dujjānā”意为难以了知、难以理解,因为一开始就无法抬起头来,且出身难以了知,又因意义难以实现,所以意思是让庵婆咤自己解脱。所谓“自己绑的包袱”,是指他自己通过将释迦族贬为卑贱而抬高自己,这正是所谓自己绑的包袱。显示巴利原文
269.Tāvāti mantanāya paṭhamameva, akatāya eva mantanāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dujjānāti dubbiññeyyā, paṭhamameva sīsamukkhipituṃ asamatthanato , jātiyā ca dubbiññeyyattā, aṭṭassa ca dukkaraṇato ambaṭṭho sayameva mocetūti adhippāyo. Attanāva sakyesu ibbhavādanipātanena attano upari pāpuṇanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘attanā baddhaṃ puṭaka’’nti vuttaṃ, attanāva baddhaṃ puṭoḷinti attho.
270 “法”指原因,如同“法无碍解”等(《分别论》718等)中的用法。与法共行,故称“共法”,此即“共法者”,因此说“有因的”等,这是同义词。能生者为因,支撑者为缘。以一处不成立之语,说另一处不成立之语。因此说“因为……”等。显示巴利原文
270.Dhammo nāma kāraṇaṃ ‘‘dhammapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 718 ādayo) viya, dhammena saha vattatīti sahadhammo, so eva sahadhammikoti āha ‘‘sahetuko’’tiādi, pariyāyavacanametaṃ. Janako vā hetu, upatthambhako kāraṇaṃ. Aññena aṭṭhānagatena aññaṃ aṭṭhānagataṃ vacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yo hī’’tiādi.
如此,在两次劝告之后、第三次劝告尚未生起之际,便说“我将离开”。显示巴利原文
Tatoti dvikkhattuṃ codanāto paraṃ, tatiyacodanāya anāgatāya eva pakkamissāmīti vuttaṃ hoti.
271 因应受供养,帝释天王被称为夜叉。火的自然色泽,具足此者,故说“燃烧的,即火色”。“Kandala”是一种花傍树而生的特殊种类,其花为白色,花蕾亦为白色,呈现象牙的形状。“Virūparūpa”意为颠倒的形貌。显示巴利原文
271. Pūjitabbato sakko devarājā yakkho nāma. Yo aggissa pakativaṇṇo, tena samannāgatanti vuttaṃ ‘‘ādittanti aggivaṇṇa’’nti. Kandalo nāma pupphūpagarukkhaviseso, yassa setaṃ pupphaṃ pupphati, makuḷampissa setavaṇṇaṃ dāṭhākāraṃ hoti. Virūparūpanti viparītarūpasaṇṭhānaṃ.
于第八个七日,在阿阇波罗榕树下安坐时,一切诸佛所常习所惯行的少事少业,就之而说“若我……”等语。“Avattamāne”意指不行或不随行。因此,由于彼时如是受记故。为令其惊惧而后解答问题而来,正如于《根本五十篇》中所说到的萨遮迦遍行者一般。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhamasattāhe ajapālanigrodhamūle nisinnassa sabbabuddhassa āciṇṇasamāciṇṇaṃ appossukkataṃ sandhāya ‘‘ahañcevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Avattamāneti appaṭipajjamāne, ananuvattamāne vā. Tasmāti tadā tathāpaṭiññātattā. Tāsetvā pañhaṃ vissajjāpessāmīti āgato yathā taṃ mūlapaṇṇāsake āgatassa saccakaparibbājakassa samāgame (ma. ni. 1.357).
“世尊看见,暗黑也看见”这句中,为说明其他人看不见的两种原因,而说“因为如果……”等句。“Hi”是不变词,表原因。由于不重,且因为他们会说,故如此连接。这对其他人也是共通的,故不重、不负担。“Āvāhetvā”意为以咒力召唤后。“Tassā”指暗黑的。腹内指肠、内脏等。“Vādasaṅghaṭṭe”指言语冲突。“Maññamāno”意为思量。这是显示关联。显示巴利原文
‘‘Bhagavā ceva passati ambaṭṭho cā’’ti ettha itaresamadassane duvidhampi kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘yadi hī’’tiādimāha. Hi-saddo kāraṇatthe nipāto. Yasmā agaru, yasmā ca vadeyyuṃ, tasmāti sambandho. Aññesampi sādhāraṇato agaru abhāriyaṃ. Āvāhetvāti mantabalena avhānaṃ katvā. Tassāti ambaṭṭhassa. Antokucchi antaantaguṇādiko. Vādasaṅghaṭṭeti vācāsaṅghaṭṭane. Maññamānoti maññanato. Sambandhadassanañhetaṃ.
272 “寻求救护”意为:这位沙门乔达摩是我从此怖畏中的救护者,如此寻求世尊为“救护”,即前往亲近。其余两句亦同此理。“Tāyatī”意为从现前的怖畏中保护,因此说“保护”,这是作者成就词。“Nilīyatī”意为被现前的怖畏所逼恼而隐藏,这是处所成就词。“Sara”一词有伤害义,此处即指破坏,故说“怖畏伤害、破坏”,这是作者成就词。显示巴利原文
272.Tāṇaṃ gavesamānoti ‘‘ayameva samaṇo gotamo ito bhayato mama tāyako’’ti bhagavantaṃyeva ‘‘tāṇa’’nti pariyesanto , upagacchantoti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Tāyatīti yathūpaṭṭhitabhayato pāleti. Tenāha ‘‘rakkhatī’’ti, kattusādhanametaṃ. Nilīyatīti yathūpaṭṭhiteneva bhayena upadduto nilīno hoti, adhikaraṇasādhanametaṃ. Sarasaddo hiṃsane, tañca viddhaṃsanameva adhippetanti vuttaṃ ‘‘bhayaṃ hiṃsati viddhaṃsetī’’ti, kattusādhanametaṃ.
暗黑族姓解说显示巴利原文
Ambaṭṭhavaṃsakathāvaṇṇanā
274 “恒河之南”指名为恒河的河流之南方区域。“婆罗门苦行者”指出身婆罗门家族的苦行者。对于想以咒力将箭或矛等投向他人者,其手不会转动;手既不转,武器又如何能转?就此不转而言,说“武器不转”。“贤善哉”是接受之词,意为善哉。以弓所射之箭不能到达之处,依携带工具的说法,说“弓不能到达”,如同说“以弓射,以眼见”。名为“暗黑”的明咒能安放涂油于众生身上,故依词源学称为“暗黑”,意为如此得名的咒术明咒。由于此明咒存在于他,故黑仙人被称为“暗黑”;而此青年因生于其族系,故被称为“暗黑”。据说他想:“我如何生于方位婢女的胎中?”厌恶那低劣的出身,便出外想:“我现在要以某种方式净化此出身。”因此说“现在我将满足我的心愿”。他的心愿即是:以明咒之力恐吓国王,从得到其女儿之时起,我这婢女出身便得以净化。显示巴利原文
274.Gaṅgāya dakkhiṇatoti gaṅgāya nāma nadiyā dakkhiṇadisābhāge. Brāhmaṇatāpasāti brahmakulino tāpasā. Saraṃ vā sattiādayo vā parassa upari khipitukāmassa mantānubhāvena hatthaṃ na parivattati, hatthe pana aparivattante kuto āvudhaṃ parivattissatīti tathā aparivattanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘āvudhaṃ na parivattatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhadraṃ bhoti sampaṭicchanaṃ, sādhūti attho. Dhanunā khittasarena agamanīyaṃ sasambhārakathānayena ‘‘dhanu agamanīya’’nti vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘dhanunā vijjhati, cakkhunā passatī’’ti. Ambaṭṭhaṃ nāma vijjanti sattānaṃ sarīre abbhaṅgaṃ ṭhapetīti ambaṭṭhā niruttinayena, evaṃladdhanāmaṃ mantavijjanti attho. Yato ambaṭṭhā vijjā etasmiṃ atthīti katvā kaṇho isi ‘‘ambaṭṭho’’ti paññāyittha, tabbaṃsajātatāya panāyaṃ māṇavo ‘‘ambaṭṭho’’ti voharīyati. So kira ‘‘kathaṃ nāmāhaṃ disāya dāsiyā kucchimhi nibbatto’’ti taṃ hīnaṃ jātiṃ jigucchanto ‘‘handāhaṃ yathā tathā imaṃ jātiṃ sodhessāmī’’ti niggato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘idāni me manorathaṃ pūressāmī’’ti. Ayañhissa manoratho – vijjābalena rājānaṃ tāsetvā tassa dhītaraṃ laddhakālato paṭṭhāya myāyaṃ dāsajāti sodhitā bhavissatīti.
“最胜咒”是指最殊胜的吠陀咒。意思是:一个身为婢女之子的人,为何竟来求娶貌如天女的女儿?“Khurati”有切割之义,或指饮刀,故称“刀箭”;又或因为刀被安置在箭端,故称“刀箭”,即箭。藉由咒力,国王的手臂变得仅能勉强支撑;正因为那手臂支撑着,国王恐惧、疑虑、惊怖,心想:“谁知道会发生什么?”所以说:“因怖畏而颤抖地站立。”显示巴利原文
Seṭṭhamanteti seṭṭhabhūte vedamante. Ko nu kiṃ kāraṇā dāsiputto samāno maddarūpiṃ dhītaraṃ yācatīti attho. Khurati chindati, khuraṃ vā pāti pivatīti khurappo, khuramassa agge appīyati ṭhapīyatīti vā khurappo, saro. Mantānubhāvena rañño bāhukkhambhamattaṃ jātaṃ, tena pana bāhukkhambhena ‘‘ko jānāti, kiṃ bhavissatī’’ti rājā bhīto ussaṅkī utrasto ahosi. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘bhayena vedhamāno aṭṭhāsī’’ti.
在《萨罗邦伽本生》(《本生》2.17.52)中,记载了檀达基王等,其后有奥卡卡王;他们的事迹在各地长久以来都广为人知,故说“檀达基王……”等。其中,檀达基王犯了过错,那利凯罗和阿周那也犯了过错,如此关联。即便有沙雨等,也因武器雨而毁灭,所以说“以武器雨”。他们心想:“这位也是有如此大威力者”,如是思惟后,出于怖畏而说出这些话,应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Sarabhaṅgajātake (jā. 2.17.52) āgatānaṃ daṇḍakīrājādīnaṃ pacchā okkākarājā ahosi, tesaṃ pavatti ca sabbattha cirakālaṃ pākaṭāti āha ‘‘daṇḍakīrañño’’tiādi. Aparaddhassa daṇḍakīrañño, aparaddho nāḷikero, ajjuno cāti sambandho. Satipi vālukādivasse āvudhavasseneva vināsoti vuttaṃ ‘‘āvudhavuṭṭhiyā’’ti. ‘‘Ayampi īdiso mahānubhāvo’’ti maññamānā evaṃ cintayantā bhayena avocunti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“Undriyissati”意为将会破裂。这是一种业的形式,就像基于业和作者而说“大地”,如同说“谷仓破裂”一样。因此说“将会破裂”。“Thusamuṭṭhi”指一把谷壳,或一把糠。为何如此说?因此有“仅以声音停滞”等语。显示巴利原文
Undriyissatīti bhindiyissati. Kammarūpañhetaṃ ‘‘pathavī’’ti kammakattuvasena vuttattā yathā ‘‘kusulo bhijjatī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘bhijjissatī’’ti. Thusamuṭṭhīti palāsamuṭṭhi, bhusamuṭṭhi vā. Kasmāti āha ‘‘sarasanthambhanamatte’’tiādi.
心怀恐惧、胆怯之人,因怖畏而身颤毛竖,成为汗毛竖立者;而无所畏惧、泰然自若者,因无怖畏灾祸,身不颤抖、汗毛平顺,成为毛发平伏者,安稳而住。然而,从毛发平顺之相,其安稳便显而易见,因此为以果显因,经中说为‘安稳’,并以‘平毛’等语加以说明。从词源学来看,这个词的成立,正如《怖畏经》中所说:‘我在林中居住时,得到了更大的安稳’(中部1.36等)。此处的‘此’是结语。‘如果国王让我见到那女孩,王子便会安稳、平安’——这样的承诺,仅从上下文便已清楚。‘由此’指由黑天神。‘咒语’指名为手臂支撑咒的平息明咒。因为对于能带来怖畏灾祸的咒语,必定有能平息它的咒语,正如对莲花箭明咒等一样。‘令回转’意为被念诵。为了解除自己女儿所受的诽谤,他使她成为非奴、自由之身。为了让她有与之相称的地位,他将她置于高处。‘以一方’指母方。这是出于悲悯,为安慰而说,并非为了显示出身的高贵。因此,经文说‘那时,世尊’等等。显示巴利原文
Bhītatasitā bhayavasena chambhitasarīrā uddhaggalomā honti haṭṭhalomā, abhītatasitā pana bhayupaddavābhāvato acchambhitasarīrā patitalomā honti ahaṭṭhalomā, khemena sotthinā tiṭṭhanti, tāya pana patitalomatāya tassa sotthibhāvo pākaṭo hotīti phalena kāraṇaṃ vibhāvetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘pallomo’ti vuttanti dasseti ‘‘pannalomo’’tiādinā. Niruttinayena padasiddhi yathā taṃ bhayabheravasutte ‘‘bhiyyo pallomamāpādiṃ araññe vihārāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.36 ādayo). Idanti osānavacanaṃ. ‘‘Sace me rājā taṃ dārikaṃ dasseti, kumāro sotthi pallomo bhavissatī’’ti paṭiññākaraṇaṃ pakaraṇatoyeva pākaṭaṃ. Tenāti kaṇhena. Manteti bāhukkhambhakamantassa paṭippassambhakavijjāsaṅkhāte mante. Evarūpānañhi bhayupaddavakarānaṃ mantānaṃ ekaṃseneva paṭippassambhakamantāhonti yathā taṃ kusumārakavijjādīnaṃ. Parivattiteti pajappite. Attano dhītuyā apavādamocanatthaṃ taṃ adāsaṃ bhujissaṃ karoti. Tassā anurūpe issariye ṭhapanatthaṃ uḷāre ca naṃ ṭhāne ṭhapesi. Ekena pakkhenāti mātupakkhena. Karuṇāyanto samassāsanatthaṃ āha, na pana uccākulīnabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘atha kho bhagavā’’tiādi.
对刹帝利最胜性的解释显示巴利原文
Khattiyaseṭṭhabhāvavaṇṇanā
275 ‘在婆罗门中’只是一种世俗的称说,意思是应当在婆罗门的附近、从婆罗门处获得座位等。因此说‘在婆罗门之间’。纯粹是为表明与吠陀经典相应、对已故者凭信心所应行之事,而非希求任何其他东西;为显示‘信’的词源,而说‘在为死者所设的食物中’。‘吉祥等食物’中,‘等’字包含了节庆、供天神等食物。‘祭祀食物’指以恶想等为由而作的食物。有‘他将成为恶想等食物的受用者’之说,此处火供即是祭祀。‘宾客的’指属于客人的。即便是不速之客的馈赠食物,也称为‘宾客的’,故说‘或礼物食物’。‘遮止’意为阻挡。‘不遮止’即不阻挡。由于未达到刹帝利种姓的纯正,故非双方出身俱净,因此说‘不清净’。显示巴利原文
275.Brāhmaṇesūti vohāramattaṃ, brāhmaṇānaṃ samīpe brāhmaṇehi laddhabbāni āsanādīni labhethāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇānaṃantare’’ti. Kevalaṃ vedasatthānurūpaṃ paralokagate saddhāya eva kātabbaṃ, na tadaññaṃ kiñci abhipatthentenāti saddhanti nibbacanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘matake uddissa katabhatte’’ti vuttaṃ. Maṅgalādibhatteti ettha ādisaddena ussavadevatārādhanādibhatte saṅgaṇhāti. Yaññabhatteti pāpasaññamādivasena katabhatte. ‘‘Pāpasaññamādibhatto bhavissatī’’tiādinā hi aggihomo idha yaññaṃ. Pāhunakānanti atithīnaṃ. Anāgantukānampi pāheṇakabhattaṃ ‘‘pāhuna’’ntveva vuccatīti āha ‘‘paṇṇākārabhatte vā’’ti. Āvaṭaṃ nivāraṇaṃ. Anāvaṭaṃ anivāraṇaṃ. Khattiyabhāvaṃ appatto ubhatosujātābhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘aparisuddho’’ti.
276 在‘以女人或使成为女人’一句中,所谓‘作’通于一切动作的共相,因为‘作’等词根的意义遍在于一切词根之中,因此说‘寻求后’。即寻求并取得已成为刹帝利王子妻子的婆罗门少女;或者,对于婆罗门而言,女人中以刹帝利为最胜,婆罗门为低劣——应引经句后再作连结。在‘以男人或使成为男人’中,方法也一样,这是阿阇梨所说。因为在那里,也是寻求并取得已成为刹帝利公主丈夫的婆罗门青年男子;或者,对于婆罗门,男人中以刹帝利为最胜,婆罗门为低劣,如此连结。‘在某种过失中’:这里的‘过失’指原因,正如有‘在此因缘、在此过失中’等说法,因此是以贪等堕落之处为因,其义即是罪过,而那是不可行之事,所以经中说‘在某种过失中’等。‘灰’一词是灰烬的同义词。因其被以无义之性而丢弃,故称灰,即灰烬。‘杀后’的义释是‘撒灰后’。显示巴利原文
276.Itthiyā vā itthiṃ karitvāti ettha karaṇaṃ nāma kiriyāsāmaññavisayaṃ karabhūdhātūnaṃ atthavasena sabbadhātvantogadhattāti āha ‘‘pariyesitvā’’ti. Khattiyakumārassa bhariyābhūtaṃ brāhmaṇakaññaṃ itthiṃ pariyesitvā gahetvā brāhmaṇānaṃ itthiyā vā khattiyāva seṭṭhā, ‘‘hīnā brāhmaṇā’’ti pāḷimudāharitvā yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Purisena vā purisaṃ karitvāti etthāpi eseva nayo’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.276) ācariyena vuttaṃ. Tatthāpi hi khattiyakaññāya patibhūtaṃ brāhmaṇakumāraṃ purisaṃ pariyesitvā gahetvā brāhmaṇānaṃ purisena vā khattiyāva seṭṭhā, hīnā brāhmaṇāti yojanā. Kismiñcideva pakaraṇeti ettha pakaraṇaṃ nāma kāraṇaṃ ‘‘etasmiṃ nidāne etasmiṃ pakaraṇe’’tiādīsu (pāci. 42, 90) viya, tasmā rāgādivasena pakkhalite ṭhāne hetubhūteti attho, taṃ pana atthato aparādhova, so ca akattabbakaraṇanti āha ‘‘kismiñcideva dose’’tiādi. Bhassasaddo bhasmapariyāyo. Bhasīyati niratthakabhāvena khipīyatīti hi bhassaṃ, chārikā. ‘‘Vadhitvā’’ti etassa atthavacanaṃ ‘‘okiritvā’’ti.
277 由业与烦恼所生,或依他们而生起,故名为“所生”;此所生即是“能生”,亦即人。正如所说“那些随种姓而忆念者”。这就像表示“众生”的语词,依“生”字而以单数表复数,故说“意为众生”。于此,“能生”亦适用。“随念”指依种姓而忆念分别,如“我是乔达摩,我是迦叶”等。显示巴利原文
277. Kammakilesehi janetabbo, tehi vā jāyatīti janito, sveva janeto, manussova . Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘ye gottapaṭisārino’’ti. Tadetaṃ pajāvacanaṃ viya jātisaddavasena bahumhi ekavacananti āha ‘‘pajāyāti attho’’ti. Etasmiṃ janetipi yujjati. Paṭisarantīti gottaṃ paṭicca ‘‘ahaṃ gotamo, ahaṃ kassapo’’tiādinā saraṇaṃ karonti vicinanti.
明行论解释显示巴利原文
Vijjācaraṇakathāvaṇṇanā
278 然而,当引用此偈颂时,敬重梵天者将生起信受,阿摩昼听到“明行具足”之句后,便会询问明行。如此,这部阐明“明行”的教说将利益大众。世尊见此,便引用了此常童子所说的偈颂。为阐明此义,故说“然而以此偈颂”等。否则,世尊也将成为非一切知者、依仗他者,而世尊若依仗他者,则与正自觉者之性不合。因此说“阿摩昼,我也这样说”等。“于婆罗门教中成立”指依婆罗门的信仰而显明。依后文所说方式,与生论等相连。“合和”即将其结合,使之不相矛盾,此为阿阇梨所说。但现在写本中见有“拒绝后”的文句,那是不合理的。何以故?因为在经文中并未拒绝于婆罗门教中成立的明行,而是将阿摩昼所思惟的明行结合、使之不相矛盾后,开示无上的明行。显示巴利原文
278. Imasmiṃ pana siloke āhariyamāne brahmagarukā saddheyyataṃ āpajjissanti, ambaṭṭho ca ‘‘vijjācaraṇasampanno’’ti padaṃ sutvā vijjācaraṇaṃ pucchissati, evamayaṃ vijjācaraṇaparidīpanī desanā mahājanassa sātthikā bhavissatīti passitvā lokanātho imaṃ silokaṃ sanaṅkumārabhāsitaṃ āharīti imamatthampi vibhāvento ‘‘imāya pana gāthāyā’’tiādimāha. Itarathā hi bhagavāpi asabbaññū parāvassayo bhaveyya, na ca yujjati bhagavato parāvassayatā sammāsambuddhabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘ahampi hi, ambaṭṭha, evaṃ vadāmī’’tiādi. Brāhmaṇasamaye siddhanti brāhmaṇaladdhiyā pākaṭaṃ. Vakkhamānanayena jātivādādipaṭisaṃyuttaṃ.‘‘Saṃsanditvāti ghaṭetvā, aviruddhaṃ katvāti attho’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.277) ācariyenavuttaṃ. Idāni pana potthakesu ‘‘paṭikkhipitvā’’ti pāṭho dissati, so ayuttova. Kasmāti ce? Na hi pāḷiyaṃ brāhmaṇasamayasiddhaṃ vijjācaraṇaṃ paṭikkhipati, tadeva ambaṭṭhena cintitaṃ vijjācaraṇaṃ ghaṭetvā aviruddhaṃ katvā anuttaraṃ vijjācaraṇaṃ desetīti.
“论”指执见,或言语表达。因此说“婆罗门……等言说”。因为执见也是应被言说的,故也是言说。“此”指教授、学习、祭祀、令祭祀等行为,不是吠舍的,不是刹帝利的,也不是其他那些人的——以此“等”字摄此义。“于一切处”指在种姓论与慢论之中。于此,“种姓论”是依种姓而起的论议,其意为“这适合迦叶,不适合拘私耶”等言说。“慢论”是依慢而起的论议,以自赞毁他为本质,其意为“这适合婆罗门,不适合首陀罗”等言说。“系缚于种姓论”指依附于依种姓而起的论议。“于一切处”指在系缚于种姓论等之中。“系缚于种姓论者”即系缚于种姓论;“系缚于慢论者”即系缚于慢论。那些以“教授、学习、祭祀、令祭祀等唯适合婆罗门”这种自赞毁他方式而转起者,即是系缚于慢论者。“系缚于嫁娶者”即系缚于嫁娶之事。那些依三种系缚而转起“你配我,或你不配我”者,即是系缚于嫁娶者——为说明这未尽之义,故说“此理趣”。显示巴利原文
Vādoti laddhi, vacībhedo vā. Tenāha ‘‘brāhmaṇa…pe…ādivacana’’nti. Laddhipi hi vattabbattā vacanameva. Idanti ajjhenajjhāpanayajanayājanādikammaṃ, na vessassa, na khattiyassa, na tadaññesanti atthaṃ ādisaddena saṅgaṇhāti. Sabbatthāti gottavādamānavādesu. Tatthāpi hi gottavādoti gottaṃ ārabbha vādo, kassapassevidaṃ vaṭṭati, na kosiyassātiādivacananti attho. Mānavādoti mānaṃ ārabbha attukkaṃsanaparavambhanavasena vādo, brāhmaṇassevidaṃ vaṭṭati, na suddassātiādivacananti attho. Jātivāde vinibaddhāti jātisannissitavāde paṭibaddhā. Sabbatthāti gottavādavinibaddhādīsu. Gottavādavinibaddhāti hi gottavāde vinibaddhā. Mānavādavinibaddhāti mānavāde vinibaddhā, ye hi brāhmaṇasseva ajjhenajjhāpanayajanayājanādayoti evaṃ attukkaṃsanaparavambhanavasena pavattā, te mānavādavinibaddhā ca honti. Āvāhavivāhavinibaddhāti āvāhavivāhesu vinibaddhā. Ye hi vinibaddhattayavasena ‘‘arahasi vā maṃ tvaṃ, na vā maṃ tvaṃ arahasī’’ti evaṃ pavattanakā, te āvāhavivāhavinibaddhā ca hontīti imamatthasesaṃ sandhāya ‘‘esa nayo’’ti vuttaṃ. Āvāhavivāhavinibaddhabhāvavibhāvanatthañhi ‘‘arahasi vā maṃ tvaṃ, na vā maṃ tvaṃ arahasī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ, tadetaṃ jātivādādīhi tīhi padehi yojetabbaṃ. Āvuttiādinayena hi jātivādādayo dvikkhattumatthadīpakā. Tathā hi ācariyena vuttaṃ ‘‘ye pana āvāhavivāhavinibaddhā, te eva sambandhattayavasena ‘arahasi vā maṃ tvaṃ, na vā maṃ tvaṃ arahasī’ti evaṃ pavattanakā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.278).
难道之前不是已经问过明行了吗?为何还要再问呢?为回应此问难,而说“于是,庵婆咤……”等语。其中,“于彼处”(yattha)是指在那明行成就中。这是就婆罗门宗义所成立的而言。“我们将依附”(laggissāma)指我们将归附、成为其中的一部分。“由此”(tato)意即由那明行成就。“他抛下”(avakkhipī)意即他说出。因为从胜义上说,他所执取的“明行”其实只是“无明无行”,所以当从胜义上对明行加以分别时,他便被称为从彼处被远远移开。“于彼处”(yattha)指在那明行成就之中。这是就无上的明行而说。在认知的动作关系中,以所明之业为当机;在相应的动作关系中,以能明之作者为当机。因为作者是依主要动作而说的,因此称“此明行成就适于我们来了解”。诸如此类。“从集起”(samudāgamato)意为从因等而生起。显示巴利原文
Nanu pubbe vijjācaraṇaṃ puṭṭhaṃ, kasmā taṃ puna pucchatīti codanaṃ sodhento ‘‘tato ambaṭṭho’’tiādimāha. Tattha yatthāti yassaṃ vijjācaraṇasampattiyaṃ. Brāhmaṇasamayasiddhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Laggissāmāti olaggā antogadhā bhavissāma. Tatoti tāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya. Avakkhipīti avacāsi. Paramatthato avijjācaraṇāniyeva ‘‘vijjācaraṇānī’’ti gahetvā ṭhito hi paramatthato vijjācaraṇesu vibhajiyamānesu so tato dūrato apanīto nāma hoti. Yatthāti yassaṃ pana vijjācaraṇasampattiyaṃ. Anuttaravijjācaraṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Jānanakiriyāyoge kammampi yujjanakiriyāyoge kattāyeva upapanno. Padhānakiriyāpekkhā hi kārakāti vuttaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ no vijjācaraṇasampadā ñātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Evamīdisesu. Samudāgamatoti ādisamuṭṭhānato.
279 279. 虽然因为戒原本包含在行中,依行来交付是恰当的,但为了阻止庵婆咤走上歧途,世尊唯依戒来交付——为阐明此义,故说“虽包含在行中”。依照《梵网经》所说的理趣,戒有小小戒等三种。“唯依戒”即唯依戒的同义语。“某种某种戒”是指婆罗门依种姓所建立的、以不害等自制自律为特征的一点点微少戒行。“因此”是说正因为存在着这样一点戒,意思是他们可能凭借自身具备的些许戒而依附。阿阇梨说:“‘于彼彼处即依附’是指在彼彼婆罗门宗义所成立的些许戒上,作为‘行’而依附。”这句话由于在义注本身中已经给出了有根据的说明,故应予以审察,或者这仅是表明一种意图。然而,此处之义为:“于彼彼处即依附”是指在这些他们自身具备的细微戒行相关之处,便依附地说“我们也是行具足者”,因此世尊唯依戒来交付——这是上下文的关联。但由于实际上并不存在那样的附会,为了显示前面是唯依行来交付,故说“然而……”等语。因为通过解说色界第四禅,无色界禅也已被解说了,所以“八等至也被作为‘行’交付了”。因为它们也因支分的平等而被视作第四禅。“被交付”是指被无余地取出、掌握,意思是加以显示。从观智以后,则指“他这样心入定、清……”显示巴利原文
279. Kāmaṃ caraṇapariyāpannattā caraṇavasena niyyātetuṃ vaṭṭati, ambaṭṭhassa pana asamapathagamanaṃ nivārento sīlavaseneva niyyātetīti imamatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘caraṇapariyāpannampī’’ti vuttaṃ. Brahmajāle (dī. ni. 1.7, 11, 21) vuttanayena khuddakādibhedaṃ tividhaṃ sīlaṃ. Sīlavasenevāti sīlapariyāyavaseneva. Kiñci kiñci sīlanti brāhmaṇānaṃ jātisiddhaṃ ahiṃsanādiyamaniyamalakkhaṇaṃ appamattakaṃ sīlaṃ. Tasmāti tathā vijjamānattā, attani vijjamānaṃ sīlamattampi nissāya laggeyyāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Tattha tattheva laggeyyāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃyeva brāhmaṇasamayasiddhe sīlamatte ‘caraṇa’nti laggeyyā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.279) ācariyena vuttaṃ, tadetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyameva sākāravacanassa vuttattā vicāretabbaṃ, adhippāyamattadassanaṃ vā etaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha attho – tattha tattheva laggeyyāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃyeva attani vijjamānasīlamattapaṭisaṃyuttaṭṭhāne ‘‘mayampi caraṇasampannā’’ti laggeyya, tasmā sīlavaseneva niyyātetīti sambandho. Tathāpasaṅgābhāvato pana upari caraṇavaseneva niyyātetīti dassento ‘‘yaṃ panā’’tiādimāha. Rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānaniddeseneva arūpāvacarajjhānānampi niddiṭṭhabhāvāpattito ‘‘aṭṭhapi samāpattiyo ‘caraṇa’nti niyyātitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tānipi hi aṅgasamatāya catutthajjhānānevāti. Niyyātitāti ca asesato nīharitvā gahitā, nidassitāti attho. Vipassanāñāṇato panāti ‘‘so evaṃ samāhite citte parisuddhe pariyodāte anaṅgaṇe vigatūpakkilese mudubhūte kammanīye ṭhite āneñjappatte ñāṇadassanāya cittaṃ abhinīharati abhininnāmetī’’tiādinā nayena vipassanāñāṇato paṭṭhāya.
四恶趣门解说显示巴利原文
Catuapāyamukhakathāvaṇṇanā
280 280. “未达到”(asampāpuṇanto)是指虽已开始,却不能完成。“不能忍受”(avisahamāno)是指根本无力开始。“khārī”是对苦行者资具的称呼,而它又有多种类别,为加以分别显示,故说“火钻”等。其中,“火钻”(araṇī)是指上方和下方两块用来摩擦生火的火钻。“水壶”(kamaṇḍalū)即净瓶。“sujā”指祭祀用的勺子。因为“sujā”一词用于舀取祭食等的勺子,如《究罗檀头经》中所说:“当第一或第二把勺子举起时”。正如阿阇梨在此处所说:“sujā即是勺子”。因为容易取得祭食等,故称“sujā”。然而有些人不辨此义,仅取其“缝合”之义而读作“针”,那是不妥当的,因为阿阇梨并未如此解释。“camaro”是指“吞食”(camati)即“吃”,是一种特定的鹿,以其尾毛制成的扇子称为“cāmarā”(拂尘)。以“等”字摄持了三杖、三瓶等物。以鄙陋弯曲之相而产生者称为“kājo”(扁担),如同“kālavaṇa”的构词;或者因为“kacati”(绑缚)重担在此处,故称“kāco”。声论师们认为这两种词形皆可。“khārī”是指那些苦行者的资具,他们的资具即以此为名。显示巴利原文
280.Asampāpuṇantoti ārabhitvāpi sampajjitumasakkonto. Avisahamānoti ārabhitumeva asakkonto. ‘‘Khārī’’ti tāpasaparikkhārassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, so ca anekabhedoti vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘araṇī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha araṇīti heṭṭhimuparimavasena aggidhamanakaṃ araṇīdvayaṃ. Kamaṇḍalūti kuṇḍikā. Sujāti homadabbi. Sujāsaddo hi homakammani habyannādīnamuddharaṇatthaṃ katadabbiyaṃ vattati yathā taṃ kūṭadantasutte ‘‘paṭhamo vā dutiyo vā sujaṃ paggaṇhantāna’’nti (dī. ni. 1.341). Tathā hi imasmiṃyeva ṭhāne ācariyena vuttaṃ ‘‘sujāti dabbī’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.280). Habyannādīnaṃ sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ jāyatīti hi sujā. Keci pana imamatthamavicāretvā tunnatthameva gahetvā ‘‘sūcī’’ti paṭhanti, tadayuttameva ācariyena tathā avaṇṇitattā. Camati adatīti camaro, migaviseso, tassa vālena katā bījanī cāmarā. Ādisaddena tidaṇḍatighaṭikādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Kucchitena vaṅkākārena jāyatīti kājo yathā ‘‘kālavaṇa’’nti; kacati bhāraṃ bandhati etthāti vā kāco. Duvidhampi hi padamicchanti saddavidū. Khāribharitanti khārīhi paripuṇṇaṃ. Ekena vi-kārena padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā ‘‘khārivividha’’nti paṭhantānaṃ vāde samuccayasamāsena atthaṃ dassento ‘‘ye panā’’tiādimāha.
未受具足戒者,即便是漏尽沙弥,对已受具足戒的比丘而言,实质上也只是侍者,外道出家者就更不用说了。为回应这一诘问、显示其中的差别,故说“诚然……”等语。所谓“依前述之理”,即依前述“通过做净……乃至……履行义务”之理。由于具足戒的位阶是通过守持数十万种律仪而成为殊胜的,所以即使是漏尽沙弥,也被称为凡夫比丘的侍者。显示巴利原文
Nanu upasampannassa bhikkhuno sāsanikopi yo koci anupasampanno atthato paricārakova hoti api khīṇāsavasāmaṇero, kimaṅgaṃ pana bāhirakapabbajiteti anuyogaṃ pati tattha visesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kāmañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘kappiya…pe… vattakaraṇavasenā’’ti evaṃ vuttanayena. Anekasatasahassasaṃvaravinayasamādānavasena upasampannabhāvassa visiṭṭhabhāvato khīṇāsavasāmaṇeropi puthujjanabhikkhuno paricārakoti vutto.
九千俱胝,一百八十俱胝;
五万十万,又三十六;
这些律仪戒,由正自觉者所开示;
此即以略说方式所示的律仪戒中之学处。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Navakoṭisahassāni, asītisatakoṭiyo; Paññāsasatasahassāni, chattiṃsa ca punāpare; Ete saṃvaravinayā, sambuddhena pakāsitā; Peyyālamukhena niddiṭṭhā, sikkhā vinayasaṃvare’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.20; apa. aṭṭha. 2.55; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.2.37);
如是,所谓具足戒,即是通过受学那所说的数十万种律仪戒之分门,而成为超越、最上的成就。而此凡夫比丘,正是以此具足戒,成为具足戒者。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttappabhedānaṃ anekasatasahassānaṃ saṃvaravinayānaṃ samādāya sikkhanena uparibhūtā aggabhūtā sampadāti hi upasampadā, tāya cesa upasampadāya puthujjanabhikkhu upasampannoti.
此处“此”即指具有前述特征的苦行者。苦行者是业论者、行论者,并非教法的对立者,因此,对于前来出家的他们,《犍度》中允许不经外道别住便直接出家。因他们行持苦行,故称“苦行者”,即将ta音读作长音。正如“Lomāsa”等词,声明家们认为它带有词缀。这是说:即便漏尽沙弥,实质上也是凡夫比丘的侍者,但他仅是依履行义务而为侍者,并非以低劣的方式。而苦行者,则在德行与服务两方面,皆以低劣方式成为侍者,并非仅是履行义务。正是针对这一差别,才说唯有苦行者具有侍者性。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panāti yathāvuttalakkhaṇo tāpaso. Tāpasā hi kammavādikiriyavādino, na sāsanassa paṭāṇībhūtā, yato nesaṃ pabbajitumāgatānaṃ vināva titthiyaparivāsena khandhake pabbajjā anuññātā. Tapo etesamatthīti tāpasā ta-kārassa dīghaṃ katvā. ‘‘Lomasā’’tiādīsu viya hi sa-paccayamicchanti saddavidū. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kāmaṃ khīṇāsavopi sāmaṇero puthujjanassa bhikkhuno atthato paricārakova hoti, so pana vattakaraṇamatteneva paricārako, na lāmakabhāvena. Tāpaso tu guṇavasena ceva veyyāvaccakaraṇavasena ca lāmakabhāveneva paricārako, na vattakaraṇamattena, evamimesaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ sandhāya tāpasasseva paricārakatā vuttāti.
以“为何”等语,诘问者质问其因。以“因为”等语,导师显示其因后作答。为展开此略答之义,而说“于此中”等语。“不能”指因无力而邪行、无惭之人。“如刀刃之喻”即如同只能踏在刀刃顶端行走的譬喻。“为众人所认可”指被大众认可为最胜。“其他”指别处的比丘。“此处”指在苦行者的出家法中。“随欲而行”即随心所欲而行,随顺己意而行。“随学”指随所见而学。苦行者是众多的,而非比丘。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kasmā’’tiādinā codako kāraṇaṃ codeti. ‘‘Yasmā’’tiādinā ācariyo kāraṇaṃ dassetvā pariharati. Evaṃ saṅkhepato pariharitamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘imasmiñhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asakkontanti asamatthanena vippaṭipajjantaṃ alajjiṃ. Khuradhārūpamanti khuradhārānaṃ matthakeneva akkamitvā gamanūpamaṃ. Bahujanasammatāti mahājanena seṭṭhasammatā. Aññeti apare bhikkhū. Idhāti tāpasapabbajjāya. Chandena saha carantīti sachandacārino, yathākāmaṃ paṭipannakāti vuttaṃ hoti. Anusikkhantoti diṭṭhānugatiyā sikkhanto. Tāpasāva bahukā honti, na bhikkhū.
“锄头篮”的词源前文已述。“为了欺诳众人”意指为了使众人惊异。“火堂”即火供堂。“以种种薪木”即以吉祥树枝等各种薪木。“以作供养故”指为作祭祀。显示巴利原文
Kudālapiṭakānaṃ nibbacanaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Bahujanakuhāpanatthanti bahuno janassa vimhāpanatthaṃ . Aggisālanti aggihuttasālaṃ. Nānādārūhīti palāsarukkhadaṇḍādīhi nānāvidhasamidhādārūhi. Homakaraṇavasenāti yaññakaraṇavasena.
此处,因水而设有饮水堂,故说“准备了饮用水……”等。所谓“或饭团、或米等”为连接词。“酸粥”指混合了酪浆等酸味的粥。衣等由于能被渴爱等所触,故称为“食”(物质)。以利息指两倍、三倍等的增长。“安置家产”即建立财富。为在圣典中以举例的方式说明前述之义,故说“而此是其行门”,意即此圣典之语仅仅是第四种人欺诈行的入门。何以故?因为他以种种欺诈令世人惊异而住于彼处。因此说“以此……”等。如是,即依“于彼处准备了饮用水……”等所述之理。显示巴利原文
Udakavasenettha pānāgāraṃ. Tenāha ‘‘pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’tiādi. Yaṃ bhattapuṭaṃ vā yāni taṇḍulādīni vāti sambandho. Ambilayāgu nāma takkādiambilasaṃyuttā yāgu. Taṇhādīhi āmasitabbato cīvarādi āmisaṃ nāma. Vaḍḍhiyāti diguṇatiguṇādivaḍḍhiyā. Kuṭumbaṃ saṇṭhapetīti dhanaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti. Yathāvuttamatthaṃ pāḷiyaṃ nidassanamattena vuttanti āha ‘‘idaṃ panassa paṭipattimukha’’nti, idaṃ pana pāḷivacanaṃ assa catutthassa puggalassa kohaññapaṭipattiyā mukhamattanti attho. Kasmāti ce? So hi nānāvidhena kohaññena lokaṃ vimhāpayanto tattha acchati. Tenāha ‘‘iminā hī’’tiādi. Evanti ‘‘tattha pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’tiādinā vuttanayena.
“一切苦行出家皆已指示”是以法安立门径的方式所显示,为以补特伽罗安立门径来开显,故说“有八种”等。在谷堆等处靠近人站立,依乞食之规拾取稻谷、绿豆、芝麻等,这样拾取便称为“拾取”;这种拾取即是他们的行持、他们的生计,因此称为“拾取行者”。依火烤食而活者,为“火烤食者”;非火烤者则不是火烤食者,意指以米施食而活。此中的差别是:拾取行者前往谷堆等处靠近人站立,接受人们施与名为“谷端”的谷物;而非火烤食者,在接受这些之后,只取米。不自煮,故称“非自煮”,靠熟食而活。如铁般坚硬的木、拳大的石,名为“铁拳”,靠此而活故为“铁拳行者”。以齿拔取的树皮,即树皮,为“齿树皮”,靠此而活故为“齿树皮行者”。以戒德受用从树等被风吹落的果实,为“受用落果者”。“枯黄落叶”一词依单余门有二义:因老而枯黄的叶,以及因老熟而与之相似的花果等。由此将说“自食从风吹落的花果枯叶等而活”,故依此而活者为“枯黄落叶行者”,即受用自然落下的叶、花、果者。今为显示这八种的行相,故说“其中”等。可依《犍度释》中的计尼亚螺髻故事取知。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbāpi tāpasapabbajjā niddiṭṭhā’’ti dhammādhiṭṭhānanayena dassitameva puggalādhiṭṭhānanayena vivarituṃ ‘‘aṭṭhavidhā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Khalādīsu manussānaṃ santike upatiṭṭhitvā vīhimuggamāsatilādīni bhikkhācariyaniyāmena saṅkaḍḍhitvā uñchanaṃ uñchā, sā eva cariyā vutti etesanti uñchācariyā. Aggipakkikāya bhattabhikkhāya jīvantīti aggipakkikā, na aggipakkikā anaggipakkikā, taṇḍulabhikkhāya eva jīvikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Uñchācariyā hi khalādīni gantvā upatiṭṭhitvā manussehi diyyamānaṃ khalaggaṃ nāma dhaññaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti, anaggipakkikā pana tādisamapaṭiggaṇhitvā taṇḍulameva paṭiggaṇhantīti ayametesaṃ viseso. Na sayaṃ pacantīti asāmapākā, pakkabhikkhāya eva jīvikā. Ayo viya kaṭṭhino muṭṭhippamāṇo pāsāṇo ayamuṭṭhi nāma, tena vattantīti ayamuṭṭhikā. Dantena uppāṭitaṃ vakkalaṃ rukkhattaco dantavakkalaṃ, tena vattantīti dantavakkalikā. Pavattaṃ rukkhādito pātāpitaṃ phalaṃ bhuñjanti sīlenāti pavattaphalabhojino. Paṇḍupalāsasaddassa ekasesanayena dvidhā attho, jiṇṇatāya paṇḍubhūtaṃ palāsañceva jiṇṇapakkabhāvena taṃsadisaṃ pupphaphalādi cāti. Tena vakkhati ‘‘sayaṃ patitāneva pupphaphalapaṇḍupalāsādīni khādantā yāpentī’’ti, (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.280) tena vattantīti paṇḍupalāsikā, sayaṃpatitapaṇṇapupphaphalabhojino. Idāni te aṭṭhavidhepi sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Keṇiyajaṭilavatthu khandhakavaṇṇanāya (mahāva. aṭṭha. 300) gahetabbaṃ.
“拾取后”:即依乞食之规合为一处。显示巴利原文
Saṅkaḍḍhitvāti bhikkhācariyāvasena ekajjhaṃ katvā.
“米施食”即是以米作为施食。所谓“施食”(bhikkhā),意为应施与、应乞求,或“此为比丘之物”,此词亦转用于米等施物,故说“煮已而食”。显示巴利原文
Taṇḍulabhikkhanti taṇḍulameva bhikkhaṃ. Bhikkhitabbā yācitabbā, bhikkhūnaṃ ayanti vā bhikkhāti hi bhikkhāsaddo taṇḍulādīsupi niruḷho. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pacitvā paribhuñjantī’’ti.
“求施食即是苦”,即挨家挨户往他人宅舍乞求施食,这些求乞因属卑劣的行止而称为苦。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhāpariyeṭṭhi nāma dukkhāti paresaṃ gehato gehaṃ gantvā bhikkhāya pariyesanā nāma dīnavuttibhāvena dukkhā.
然而,若有人认为“出家者执取石头是苦”,遂用牙齿拔取而食,这些人称为“齿树皮行者”。此是注释书根本理路。显示巴利原文
Ye pana ‘‘pāsāṇassa pariggaho nāma dukkho pabbajitassā’’ti danteheva uppāṭetvā khādanti, te dantavakkalikā nāmāti ayaṃ aṭṭhakathāmuttakanayo.
“枯黄落叶”一词,亦兼指花与果,系通过相似假立;此义由“花果枯黄落叶等”一语所示。显示巴利原文
Paṇḍupalāsasaddo pupphaphalavisayopi sadisatākappanenāti dasseti ‘‘pupphaphalapaṇḍupalāsādīnī’’ti iminā.
“等”字即指枯黄落叶行者。这只是举例,其他也因同类而如此。于应到达处,即于应作证得处。于一树下,即最初所至之树。显示巴利原文
Teti paṇḍupalāsikā. Nidassanamattametaṃ aññesampi tathā bhedasambhavato. Pāpuṇanaṭṭhāneti gahetuṃ sampāpuṇanaṭṭhāne. Ekarukkhatoti paṭhamaṃ upagatarukkhato.
“若尔,如此岂非一切苦行出家皆已指出?”这一诘问尚消释,故说“这些……”等。唯四种,即由“持拘舍草等”等所说的:受用落果者、受用块根果者、事火者、住家者——唯此四种苦行出家。住家者,即以家为住处而趋入。据此,即依此处所说第四苦行出家“作四门家而住”等,显示其界限。其余也应依逆次结合而了知。事火者,即通过事奉火而趋入火堂。如是说明其界限时,亦应见依此顺次结合,显示这些各别的二种。显示巴利原文
Kathamettāvatā sabbāpi tāpasapabbajjā niddiṭṭhāti codanā na tāva visodhitāti āha ‘‘imā panā’’tiādi. Catūhiyevāti ‘‘khārividhamādāyā’’tiādinā vuttāhi pavattaphalabhojanikā, kandamūlaphalabhojanikā, agyāgārikā, āgārikā ceti catūhi eva tāpasapabbajjāhi. Agāraṃ bhajantīti agāraṃ nivāsabhāvena upagacchanti. Iminā hi ‘‘catudvāraṃ agāraṃ karitvā acchatī’’tiādinā idha vuttāya catutthāya tāpasapabbajjāya tesamavarodhataṃ dasseti. Evamitaresupi paṭilomato yojanā veditabbā. Aggiparicaraṇavasena agyāgāraṃ bhajanti. Evaṃ pana tesamavarodhataṃ vadanto tadanurūpaṃ imesampi paccekaṃ duvidhataṃ dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
281 因与阿阇梨波拘罗萨提共行,故称‘有阿阇梨者’,此属于他。‘亦为恶趣门’者,即是毁坏之因。更何况与明行足相符?此‘亦’字是诃责之用。故说:‘你岂能与这无上明行足相符,而为有阿阇梨者?’等。在这里,这是注释书的根本理路——以‘不然,乔达摩!’拒绝相符后,为了显示不相符之相,而说:‘而我是谁?’等。‘我是有阿阇梨者,我是谁?我成什么相,能与无上明行足相符?无上明行足是什么,成什么相,能与我这个有阿阇梨者相符?我远离……乃至……有阿阇梨者’——此即依带随伴读之结合。显示巴利原文
281. Ācariyena pokkharasātinā saha pavattatīti sācariyako, tassa. Apāyamukhampīti vināsakāraṇampi. Pageva vijjācaraṇasampadāya sandissaneti pi-saddo garahāyaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘api nu tvaṃ imāya anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya sandissasi sācariyako’’tiādi. Tatrāyamaṭṭhakathāmuttakanayo – ‘‘no hidaṃ bho gotamā’’ti sandissanaṃ paṭikkhipitvā asandissanākārameva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘ko cāha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sācariyako ahaṃ ko ca kīdiso hutvā anuttarāya vijjācaraṇasampadāya sandissāmi, anuttarā vijjācaraṇasampadā kā ca kīdisā hutvā sācariyake mayi sandissati, ārakā ahaṃ…pe… sācariyakoti saha pāṭhasesena yojanā.
282 282. 堪忍趣向恶趣毁坏之具者,为“趣恶趣者”。彼之状态不圆满,不能圆满故为“不圆满者”,以彼之状态不圆满即是义。由自身为趣恶趣者、亦为不圆满者之波拘罗萨提说此语故,于义相应而作“我”义,此即说为“亦由趣恶趣者之不圆满者”。又,由自身不圆满之趣恶趣者,自身成不圆满趣恶趣者故,波拘罗萨提说此语,于义相应而于“如此相”此亦说为“我”语。盖词序是一,义序是另一。然有者言:“为显示所作义故作是说。”此唯是相应,以此二词于作者义同故;又同义之词互为所作义不合宜,故不宜过度戏论。显示巴利原文
282. Apāye vināsanupāye niyutto āpāyiko. Tabbhāvaṃ na paripūreti paripūretuṃ na sakkotīti aparipūramāno, tabbhāvena aparipuṇṇoti attho. Attanā āpāyikena hontenāpi tabbhāvaṃ aparipūramānena pokkharasātinā esā vācā bhāsitāti atthato sambandhattā katvatthe cetaṃ paccattavacananti āha ‘‘āpāyikenāpi aparipūramānenā’’ti. Apica attanā aparipūramānena āpāyikenāpi sayaṃ aparipūramānāpāyikena hutvāpi pokkharasātinā esā vācā bhāsitāti atthayuttito itthambhūtalakkhaṇe cetaṃ paccattavacanantipi evaṃ vuttaṃ. Añño hi saddakkamo, añño atthakkamoti. Keci pana ‘‘karaṇatthameva dassetuṃ evaṃ vutta’’nti vadanti, tadayuttameva padadvayassa kattupadena samānatthattā, samānatthānañca padānaṃ aññamaññaṃ karaṇabhāvānupapattito, alamatipapañcena.
先仙随转之释显示巴利原文
Pubbakaisibhāvānuyogavaṇṇanā
283 “被给予”称为 datti,它本身就是 dattika,因此说“已给予的”。即使不想给予,也使其想给予,当面使之回转、令其迷惑,由此称为“当面回转”。因此说“不能说‘我不给’”。再者,“他的”指婆罗门的。与原因相应的国王们的满钵,因此说“为何给我”。螺白斑麻风,即如洗净的白螺般的白斑麻风。因身体与白莲、白银的功德相似,故如此说。“跟随”即极度追随。显示巴利原文
283. Dīyateti datti, sā eva dattikanti āha ‘‘dinnaka’’nti. Adātukāmampi dātukāmaṃ katvā sammukhā paramāvaṭṭeti sammūḷhaṃ karoti etāyāti sammukhāvaṭṭanī. Tenāha ‘‘na demīti vattuṃ na sakkotī’’ti. Puna tassāti brāhmaṇassa. Kāraṇānurūpaṃ rājūnaṃ puṇṇapattanti āha ‘‘kasmā medinno’’ti. Saṅkhapalitakuṭṭhanti dhotasaṅkhamiva setakuṭṭhaṃ. Setapokkhararajatato guṇasamānakāyattā evamāha. Anugacchatīti paramanubandhati.
如果说,国王出于这两种理由,都不给婆罗门面见的机会,那么,为何不拒绝他的靠近呢?因此才说“然而因为……”等语。“所谓农田明,即是关于政事论”,这是导师所说的。在先前的《梵网经》注释中也曾这样说道:“农田明,即是关于不被征服的、关于王政的政事论等。”在此处,帷幕是难以被逾越的。因此说“站在布幕围墙之内”。而“anta”一词,当其词根以这种形态增长时,就如同“vananta”一词的构词法,有“布幕之内”的含义。“已出发,即带着信心,或为常见论者。因此说‘已带来而给予’”,这是导师所说,所以应当理解为:是以“亡者供食”的略称,或以“常供”的略称,来指代那已带来而给予的食物。“然而这个……”等语,是义理必然之说。“确定”即决定。为何世尊要对这位婆罗门说出如此不悦耳、刺伤人心的话语呢?为了显示其中的理由并澄清这一责难,才说了“然而这个……”等语。连那秘密的、隐藏的、刺伤人心的话语也揭露了出来,这便是其中的关联。显示巴利原文
Yadi duvidhenapi kāraṇena rājā brāhmaṇassa sammukhābhāvaṃ na deti, atha kasmā tadupasaṅkamanaṃ na paṭikkhittanti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. ‘‘Khettavijjāyāti nītisatthe’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.283) ācariyena vuttaṃ. Heṭṭhāpi brahmajālavaṇṇanāyaṃ evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘khettavijjāti abbheyyamāsurakkharājasatthādinītisattha’’nti. (Dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.21) dussamettha tirokaraṇiyaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sāṇipākārassa anto ṭhatvā’’ti. Antasaddena pana tabbhāvena pade vaḍḍhiyamāne dussantaṃ yathā ‘‘vananto’’ti. ‘‘Payātanti saddhaṃ, sassatikaṃ vā. Tenāha abhiharitvā dinna’’nti ācariyena vuttaṃ, tasmā matakabhattasaṅkhepena vā niccabhattasaṅkhepena vā abhiharitvā dinnaṃ bhikkhanti attho veditabbo. ‘‘Ayaṃ panā’’tiādi atthāpattivacanaṃ. Niṭṭhanti nicchayaṃ. Kasmā pana bhagavā brāhmaṇassa evarūpaṃ amanāpaṃ mammavacanaṃ avocāti codanaṃ kāraṇaṃ dassetvā sodhetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Rahassampi paṭicchannampi mammavacanaṃ pakāsesīti sambandho.
284 所谓王座,是就大象肩部之处而言,因此在经文中说“或坐于象颈”。在车座上,即是在车上方铺设之处。因此说“在车上”等语。由极高贵者,即是由高贵者之中最为高贵者。因为毗连复合词并不为世俗学者所认可。国王的后代称为王族,因有多数,或以单数形态的语法来表述,故说“由王族们”。公开的商议,即是指公开进行的商议。这正是此处所指的意思,而非秘密商议,因为希望连首陀罗等也能听闻。因此说“若有首陀罗或首陀罗奴仆前来”等语。意即与国王的举止相似者。能成就其义理的话语,如同国王所说,他也同样能说出成就其义理的话语,应当如此连接理解。显示巴利原文
284. Rājāsanaṃ nāma hatthikkhandhapadesaṃ sandhāya ‘‘hatthigīvāya vā nisinno’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Rathūpatthareti rathassa upari attharitapadese. Tenāha ‘‘rathamhī’’tiādi. Uggatuggatehīti uggatānamatisayena uggatehi. Na hi vicchāsamāso lokikehi abhimatoti. Rañño apaccaṃ rājañño, bahukattaṃ pati, ekasesanayena vā ‘‘rājaññehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Pākaṭamantananti pakāsabhūtaṃ mantanaṃ. Tadevidhādhippetaṃ, na rahassamantanaṃ suddādīhipi suyyamānassa icchitattā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha āgaccheyya suddo vā suddadāso vā’’tiādi. Tādisehiyevāti rañño ākārasadiseheva. Tassatthassa sādhanasamatthaṃ vacanaṃ raññā bhaṇitaṃ yathā, tathā sopi tassatthassa sādhanasamatthameva bhaṇitaṃ vacanaṃ apinu bhaṇatīti yojetabbaṃ.
285 “宣说者”一词,从圣典用语的角度,其词义为“说者”。然而,因为他们如此成为咒语的宣说者,所以为了显示其内在意图上的含义,而说“令宣说者”。以 vada 词根加上 hi、tup 后缀,可成就“vattāro”一词的形式;同样地,以 vatu 词根,可成就“pavattayitāro”一词的形式。这是导师(《长部》注疏 1.285)和作为导师的舍利弗长老的意见。也有人说,仅以 vatu 词根就显示了“pavattāro”一词的成立。由于两词同格,故说“即是咒语”。“将首陀罗排除在外,以应当秘密言说的含义,咒语本身即是因通达种种义理而成为文句”,这是同格关系;因未受具足戒者不得共许,以秘密性而应被说的商议行为,其文句是通达义理的方便,故称为咒语句,这是注释书之外的理解方法。歌咏,即是以歌唱方式诵习,而此处的歌唱,正是以成就高音、低音等音声为所指,因此说“以音声成就”。从圣典用语的角度,是他人所说的。那是为了让他人论说而教授读诵的。汇集之后,以层层累积的方式综合而成。以梨俱吠陀、夜柔吠陀、娑摩吠陀等,其中又各以咒语、梵书等,以及以章节、分卷等而集成。即是如此。显示巴利原文
285.‘‘Pavattāro’’ti etassa pāvacanabhāvena vattāroti saddato attho. Yasmā pana te tathābhūtā mantānaṃ pavattakā nāma, tasmā adhippāyato atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pavattayitāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Vadasaddena, hi tupaccayena ca ‘‘vattāro’’ti padasiddhi, tathā vatusaddena ‘‘pavattayitāro’’ti. Idaṃ ācariyassa (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.285) ca ācariyasāriputtattherassa ca mataṃ. Vatusaddeneva ‘‘pavattāro’’ti padasiddhiṃ dassetītipi keci vadanti. Padadvayassa tulyādhikaraṇattā ‘‘mantamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sudde bahi katvā raho bhāsitabbaṭṭhena mantā eva taṃ taṃ atthapaṭipattihetutāya pada’’nti hi tulyādhikaraṇaṃ hoti, anupanītāsādhāraṇatāya rahassabhāvena vattabbāya mantanakiriyāya padamadhigamupāyantipi mantapadanti aṭṭhakathāmuttako nayo. Gītanti gāyanavasena sajjhāyitaṃ, gāyanampidha udattānudattādisarasampādanavaseneva adhippetanti vuttaṃ ‘‘sarasampattivasenā’’ti. Pāvacanabhāvena aññesaṃ vuttaṃ. Tamaññesaṃ vādāpanavasena vācitaṃ. Saṅgahetvā uparūpari saññūḷhāvasena samupabyūḷhaṃ. Iruvedayajuvedasāmavedādivasena, tatthāpi paccekaṃ mantabrahmādivasena, ajjhāyānuvākādivasena ca rāsikataṃ. Yathāvuttanayeneva piṇḍaṃ katvā ṭhapitaṃ. Aññesaṃ vācitaṃ anuvācentīti aññesaṃ kammabhūtānaṃ tehi vācāpitaṃ mantapadaṃ etarahi brāhmaṇā aññesaṃ anuvācāpenti.
“他们的”指那些咒语的作者。天眼通所摄的随业趣生智,因现见之义而类似天眼;宿住随念智也同样类似天眼,因此说“以天眼”。所以,应以这天眼通所摄的随业趣生智观见众生业之自属等,再以类似天眼的宿住随念智观见过往劫中婆罗门们的咒语与禅定仪轨——应如此取义。由于天眼通唯以当下的色为所缘,在此处直接用天眼并不恰当。要与圣典相合,即与迦叶正自觉者所说、依止于轮回的言教相符,不与之相违。因为他们对依止于还灭的义理并非现量。他们(婆罗门们)以偈颂、长行等体裁,用梵语结集。其他后来者,与阿吒迦等不同,是后来在甘蔗王时代等出现的婆罗门。他们加入杀生等内容,即在阿吒迦等所结集的咒语篇章中,于各处添加了依止杀生等烦恼的语句。他们使之相违背,如同《经集·婆罗门法经》等中所说的方法,因显示杂染之义而形成对立。“仙人”在此只是举例,因为应当说“是仙人,或为仙性而修行者”。为何在此世尊不随顺他们的承认而让说法顺势而下呢?因此说“在此世尊……”等。“在此”,即指“我学习那些咒语,而你却认为‘我是有导师的’”这句话所说之处。显示巴利原文
Tesanti mantakattūnaṃ. Dibbacakkhuparibhaṇḍaṃ yathākammūpagañāṇaṃ, paccakkhato dassanaṭṭhena dibbacakkhusadisañca pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘dibbena cakkhunā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ato dibbacakkhuparibhaṇḍena yathākammūpagañāṇena sattānaṃ kammassakatādīni ceva dibbacakkhusadisena pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇena atītakappe brāhmaṇānaṃ mantajjhenavidhiñca oloketvāti attho gahetabbo. Rūpameva hi paccuppannaṃ dibbacakkhussa ārammaṇanti tamidha aṭṭhānagataṃ hoti. Pāvacanena saha saṃsanditvāti yaṃ kassapasammāsambuddhena vuttaṃ vaṭṭasannissitaṃ vacanaṃ, tena saha saṃsanditvā aviruddhaṃ katvā. Na hi tesaṃ vivaṭṭasannissito attho paccakkhato hoti. Ganthiṃsūti pajjagajjabandhavasena sakkatabhāsāya bandhiṃsu. Aparā pareti aṭṭhakādīhi aparā aññepi pare pacchimā okkākarājakālādīsu uppannā. Pāṇātipātādīni pakkhipitvāti aṭṭhakādīhi ganthitamantapadesveva pāṇātipātādikilesasannissitapadānaṃ tattha tattha pakkhipanaṃ katvā. Viruddhe akaṃsūti suttanipāte brāhmaṇadhammikasuttādīsu (su. ni. brāhmaṇadhammikasutta) āgatanayena saṃkilesikatthadīpanato paccanīkabhūte akaṃsu. Isīti nidassanamattaṃ. ‘‘Isi vā isitthāya paṭipanno vā’’ti hi vattabbaṃ. Kasmā panettha paṭiññāgahaṇavasena desanāsotapatitaṃ na karotīti āha ‘‘idha bhagavā’’tiādi. Idhāti ‘‘tyāhaṃ mante adhīyāmi, ‘sācariyako’ti tvaṃ maññasī’’ti vuttaṭṭhāne. Paṭiññaṃ aggahetvāti yathā heṭṭhā paṭiññā gahitā, tathā ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññasi ambaṭṭha, tāvatā tvaṃ bhavissasi isi vā isitthāya vā paṭipanno sācariyakoti, no hidaṃ bho gotamā’’ti evaṃ idha paṭiññaṃ aggahetvā.
286 “无腥臭”指远离以烦恼不净为因的恶臭。“无女人味”指因不能忍受女人哪怕一丝气味而远离女人味。“持尘垢”指保持自然的尘垢、汗渍等尘垢。“城墙与男子守护”指城墙的防护与男子的防护。在此,以“无腥臭”显示这十位婆罗门的烦恼已被镇伏;以“无女人味、梵行者”显示独住;以“持尘垢”显示无装饰打扮;以“住于山林、山麓”显示舍弃人间聚落而住于远离处;以“以林果为食而住”显示拒绝米饭、肉食等上妙食物;以“当……”等语显示拒绝车乘;以“于一切方……”等语显示拒绝守护与防护。如此显示时,相对于依随邪行派的阿摩昼及其老师的生活方式,这些婆罗门的生活方式虽属正行派,但依圣律中的正行而言,实为邪行。他们怎么会有苦行相应呢?世尊以“他们如此……”等语呵责、降伏阿摩昼,这一点也作了阐明。这就是对后文经文的义理总摄。显示巴利原文
286.Nirāmagandhāti kilesāsucivasena vissagandharahitā. Anitthigandhāti itthīnaṃ gandhamattassapi avisahanena itthigandharahitā. Rajojalladharāti pakatirajasedādijalladharā. Pākārapurisaguttīti pākārāvaraṇaṃ, purisāvaraṇañca. Ettha pana ‘‘nirāmagandhā’’ti etena tesaṃ dasannaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ vikkhambhitakilesataṃ dasseti, ‘‘anitthigandhā, brahmacārino’’ti ca etena ekavihāritaṃ, ‘‘rajojalladharā’’ti etena maṇḍanavibhūsanābhāvaṃ, ‘‘araññāyatane pabbatapādesu vasiṃsū’’ti etena manussūpacāraṃ pahāya vivittavāsaṃ, ‘‘vanamūlaphalāhārā vasiṃsū’’ti etena sālimaṃsodanādipaṇītāhāra paṭikkhepaṃ, ‘‘yadā’’tiādinā yānavāhanapaṭikkhepaṃ, ‘‘sabbadisāsū’’tiādinā rakkhāvaraṇapaṭikkhepaṃ. Evañca dassento micchāpaṭipadāpakkhikaṃ sācariyakassa ambaṭṭhassa vuttiṃ upādāya sammāpaṭipadāpakkhikāpi tesaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ vutti ariyavinaye sammāpaṭipattiṃ upādāya micchāpaṭipadāyeva. Kathañhi nāma te bhavissati sallekhapaṭipattiyuttatāti. ‘‘Evaṃ su te’’tiādinā bhagavā ambaṭṭhaṃ santajjento niggaṇhātītipi vibhāveti. Idañhi vakkhamānāya pāḷiyā piṇḍatthadassananti.
“布片”即布条。“布束”即布编的辫子。“以缠裹物”指以缠裹板,即用布缠裹而制成的、有柔软肋骨状之物,这样说。“令剪”指用剪刀剪断。“于已剪之毛”此处也是同样方法。如同“诸比丘,不应令剪须”等中,kapu一词用于剪断之义。“于适当之处”指颈、头、尾等处。“毛”指生于那些处的毛发。因伴随而行,或以处所名称而称为“kuttavālā”。然而有些人将读法改为“vāḷayuttattā”,解释为“因系有猛兽”,他们有过失,即不顾经文。经文中说“以kuttavāla、以母马车”。“城周围”指城的四周。城墙下方所作的白灰涂抹之处,因应作于城附近,且作助益,故称为“upakārikā”。这些是城的upakārikā,故为“城之upakārikā”,依王都而作阴性词。因此说“但在此……”等。“慧”指以疑惑为因而非单一决定的了知。为显示后文说法增长之因,说“此世尊……”等。经文中“他以问题问我”指那人以提问来考验我。“我以解答来清净”指我也以解答来清净他,应知此义是随宜而说。显示巴利原文
Dussapaṭṭikā dussapaṭṭaṃ. Dussakalāpo dussaveṇī. Veṭhakehīti veṭhakapaṭṭakehi, dussehi saṃveṭhetvā katanamitaphāsukāhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kappetunti kattarikāya chindituṃ. Kappitavālehīti etthāpi eseva nayo. ‘‘Na bhikkhave massu kappāpetabba’’ntiādīsu (cūḷava. 275) viya hi kapusaddo chedane vattati. Yuttaṭṭhānesūti gīvāsīsavāladhīsu. Vālāti tesu ṭhānesu jāyamānā lomā. Sahacaraṇavasena, ṭhānīnāmena vā ‘‘kuttavālā’’ti vuttā. Keci pana ‘‘vāḷayuttattā’’ti pāṭhaṃ kappetvā vāḷarūpayuttattāti atthaṃ vadanti, pāḷiyānapekkhanameva tesaṃ doso. ‘‘Kuttavālehi vaḷavārathehī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Samantānagaranti nagarassa samantato. Pākārassa adhobhāge katasudhākammaṃ ṭhānaṃ nagarassa samīpe kattabbato, upakārakaraṇato ca ‘‘upakārikā’’ti vuccati. Nagarassa upakārikā etāsanti nagarūpakārikāyo, rājadhānīapekkhāya itthiliṅganiddeso. Tenāha ‘‘idha panā’’tiādi. Matīti vicikicchāvasena anekaṃsikajānanā. Upari desanāya avaḍḍhakāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘idaṃ bhagavā’’tiādimāha. Pāḷiyaṃ so maṃ pañhenāti so jano maṃ pucchāvasena sodheyya. Ahaṃ veyyākaraṇena sodhessāmīti ahampimaṃ vissajjanāvasena sodhessāmīti yathārahamadhikāravasena attho veditabbo.
二相见的注释显示巴利原文
Dvelakkhaṇadassanavaṇṇanā
287 “诸坐者……”等,是不敬的属格,或是简别语。因为在蜷缩的威仪中,诸相不能完全清晰地显现,所以说“不能”;又因为能够清晰地显现,所以说“能”。应了知,那时的惯行只是为了寻求安乐。因此,即以此二种理由。显示巴利原文
287.‘‘Nisinnāna’’ntiādi anādare sāmivacanaṃ, visesanaṃ vā. Saṅkucite iriyāpathe anavasesato lakkhaṇānaṃ dubbibhāvanato ‘‘na sakkotī’’ti vuttaṃ, tathā suvibhāvanato pana ‘‘sakkotī’’ti. Pariyesanasukhatthameva tadāciṇṇatā daṭṭhabbā. Tenāti duvidhenapi kāraṇena.
“寻求”指以智慧作了寻求。“计算”指以智慧进行合计。“正确收集”指正确地取来、汇集。“疑惑”一词含有“期望”之义,故说“啊,但愿……”等。有时,无前缀的词也如同有前缀的词一样表达特殊意义,例如“种姓”。“从此处彼处”指从身体的各个部位。“疲惫”即是劳累。因此说“不能见”。以彼,即所说的“寻思而疲惫”的疑惑。从此,即未达决定。如此显示了“疑惑”一词的期望义之后,现在显示其怀疑义,说“或以疑惑……”等。其中,“以疑惑”指以“疑惑”一词所说的疑惑。动词词根主要以不显前缀之义而出现。其余也是如此。处于不同阶段的犹豫,即说为“以三法”,也就是以三种怀疑法,这是它的含义。浑浊性即因不清净而有的混浊性。显示巴利原文
Gavesīti ñāṇena pariyesanamakāsi. Gaṇayantoti ñāṇeneva saṅkalayanto. Samānayīti sammā ānayi samāhari. ‘‘Kaṅkhatī’’ti padassa ākaṅkhatīti atthoti āha ‘‘aho vatā’’tiādi. Anupasaggampi hi padaṃ katthaci saupasaggamiva atthavisesavācakaṃ yathā ‘‘gotrabhū’’ti. Tato tato sarīrappadesato. Kicchatīti kilamati. Tenāha ‘‘na sakkoti daṭṭhu’’nti. Tāyāti ‘‘vicinanto kicchatī’’ti vuttāya vicikicchāya. Tatoti sanniṭṭhānaṃ agamanato. Evaṃ ‘‘kaṅkhatī’’ti padassa āsisanatthataṃ dassetvā idāni saṃsayatthataṃ dassento ‘‘kaṅkhāya vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kaṅkhāyāti ‘‘kaṅkhatī’’ti padena vuttāya kaṅkhāya. Asatvapadhānañhi ākhyātikaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Avatthāpabhedagatā vimati eva ‘‘tīhi dhammehī’’ti vuttā, tippakārehi saṃsayadhammehīti attho. Kālusiyabhāvoti appasannatāya hetubhūto āvilabhāvo.
“以膀胱囊”是指在脐下称为膀胱之处所生的阴茎包皮。就如“阴囊”等词中,kosa一词用于包裹的囊袋之义。因应以布遮蔽,故为“布密处”。因为世尊隐藏于囊中的布密处,是一切佛特有的、不与其他人共的,它犹如极清净的金环,以其自体的形状安布美妙,胜过良种香象最胜肢分的极可爱状态;又如绽放的红莲花那灿烂鬘毛回转的优美,又如暮光映照的水云间所显的满月轮的光辉而照耀;由于内外垢秽不染、长时修习梵行的功德以及安立形状的成就,即使应当隐藏的也成了不应隐藏的。因此说“世尊的……”等。“如胜象”即如良种香象。“广大性”即宽广性。他的疑惑仅在于此。而对于柔软、细滑等功德,他并未作思量。显示巴利原文
Vatthikosenāti nābhiyā adhobhāgasaṅkhāte vatthimhi jātena liṅgapasibbakena. ‘‘Aṇḍakoso’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.152, 189; 2.27; a. ni. 7.71; pārā. 11) viya hi kosasaddo pariveṭhakapasibbake vattati. Vatthena guhitabbattā vatthaguyhaṃ. Yasmā bhagavato kosohitaṃ vatthaguyhaṃ sabbabuddhāveṇikaṃ aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ suvisuddhakañcanamaṇḍalasannibhaṃ, attano saṇṭhānasannivesasundaratāya ājāneyyagandhahatthino varaṅgaparamacārubhāvaṃ, vikasamānatapaniyāravindasamujjalakesarāvattavilāsaṃ, sañjhāpabhānurañjitajalavanantarābhilakkhitasampuṇṇacandamaṇḍalasobhañca attano siriyā abhibhuyya virājati, yaṃ bāhirabbhantaramalehi anupakkiliṭṭhatāya, cirakālaparicitabrahmacariyādhikāratāya, saṇṭhitasaṇṭhānasampattiyā ca kopīnampi samānaṃ akopīnameva jātaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavato hī’’tiādi. Varavāraṇassevāti varagandhahatthino iva. Pahūtabhāvanti puthulabhāvaṃ. Ettheva hi tassa saṃsayo. Tanumudusukumārādīsu panassa guṇesu vicāraṇā eva nāhosi.
288 “如是”是复合词,故说“彼形”。在此,即如阿摩昼见隐藏于囊中的布密处那样,在作神通决意时。以此即引用了“作如是神通决意”等经文,且此处以神通决意的方法,通过《弥兰陀问经》的文句阐明了显示密处的原因。然而有些人引用“于密处显示”,那完全不对。因为经中和注释中都没有可如此引用的内容,且神通决意的方法也未阐明。在此何须他说,应由具四无碍解、六神通、论师之首具寿那先长老所说的方法来接受。于此生起惭耻,故为惭耻处,那即是这样之处,应惭耻之处。“北方的”指《经集》中所说的北方青年。所有这些事应从《经集》中取。显示巴利原文
288. ‘‘Tathārūpa’’nti idaṃ samāsapadanti āha ‘‘taṃrūpa’’nti. Etthāti yathā ambaṭṭho kosohitaṃ vatthaguyhamaddassa, tathā iddhābhisaṅkhāramabhisaṅkharaṇe. Iminā hi ‘‘tathārūpaṃ iddhābhisaṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkharī’’tiādipāḷiparāmasanaṃ, ato cettha saha iddhābhisaṅkhāranayena vatthaguyhadassanakāraṇaṃ milindapañhāpāṭhena (mi. pa. 3.3) vibhāvitaṃ hoti. Keci pana ‘‘vatthaguyhadassane’’ti parāmasanti, tadayuttameva. Na hi taṃ pāḷiyaṃ, aṭṭhakathāyañca atthi, yaṃ evaṃ parāmasitabbaṃ siyā, iddhābhisaṅkhāranayo ca avibhāvito hoti. Kimettha aññena vattabbaṃ catupaṭisambhidāpattena chaḷabhiññena vādīvarena bhadantanāgasenattherena vuttanayeneva sampaṭicchitabbattā. Hirī karīyate etthāti hirikaraṇaṃ, tadeva okāso tathā, hiriyitabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Uttarassāti suttanipāte āgatassa uttaramāṇavassa (ma. ni. 2.384). Sabbesampi cetesaṃ vatthu suttanipātato gahetabbaṃ.
“Chāyanti”意为影像。为了说明“如何示现、示现怎样的像”,故说“以神通”等。“Chāyārūpakamattaṃ”意为只是世尊的影像之形,并非其原本的身体与隐秘处;而且,由于那影像已脱离佛陀的相续,所以只是色法,是与世尊色泽、形态、肢节相似的、由神通所化的影像。这样,用表示“仅仅”之义的音节“ka”来加以限定,也就合理了。以神通造作仅仅是影像之形而后示现,这是句子的关联。诸师长说:“然而,世尊在示现那影像时,是以不显露自己佛身的方式而示现的。”这与具寿那先尊者所说的“示现由神通所造作的仅仅是影像之形”的说法相合相应,应视为如同“以乳合乳,以恒河水合耶牟那河水”一般。因为正是通过这样的说法,当时其他佛身未被示现的这一事实,在意义上便已成立。而在此,通过“穿着下衣”等说法,则显示了即使那影像已脱离佛陀的相续,其下衣等也并未外露;不应责难说:“世尊如何示现包含下衣等在内的影像?而阿摩昼又如何看见?”因为神通境界是不可思议的。在“Chāyaṃ diṭṭheti”中,意为“当影像……”显示巴利原文
Chāyanti paṭibimbaṃ. Kathaṃ dassesi, kīdisaṃ vāti āha ‘‘iddhiyā’’tiādi. Chāyārūpakamattanti bhagavato paṭibimbarūpakameva, na pakativatthaguyhaṃ, tañca buddhasantānato vinimuttattā rūpakamattaṃ bhagavatā sadisavaṇṇasaṇṭhānāvayavaṃ iddhimayaṃ bimbakameva hoti, evañca katvā appakatthena ka-kārena visesitavacanaṃ upapannaṃ hoti. Chāyārūpakamattaṃ iddhiyā abhisaṅkharitvā dassesīti sambandho. ‘‘Taṃ pana dassento bhagavā yathā attano buddharūpaṃ na dissati, tathā katvā dassetī’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.288) ācariyā vadanti. Tadetaṃ bhadantanāgasenattherena vuttena iddhābhisaṅkhatachāyārūpakamattadassanavacanena saṃsandati ceva sameti ca yathā taṃ ‘‘khīrena khīraṃ, gaṅgodakena yamunodaka’’nti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathāvacaneneva hi sesabuddharūpassa taṅkhaṇe adassitabhāvo atthato āpanno hoti. Nivāsananivatthatādivacanena panettha buddhasantānato vinimuttassapi chāyārūpakassa nivāsanādiabahigatabhāvo dassito, na ca codetabbaṃ ‘‘kathaṃ nivāsanādiantaragataṃ chāyārūpakaṃ bhagavā dasseti, kathañca ambaṭṭho passatī’’ti. Acinteyyo hi iddhivisayoti. Chāyaṃ diṭṭheti chāyāya diṭṭhāya. Etanti chāyārūpakaṃ. Bujjhanake sati jīvitanimittampi hadayamaṃsaṃ dasseyyāti adhippāyo. Ninnetvāti nīharitvā. Ayameva vā pāṭho. Kallosīti vissajjane tvaṃ kusalo cheko asi, yathāvutto vā vissajjanāmaggo upapanno yutto asīti attho. ‘‘Kusalo’’ti keci paṭhanti, ayuttametaṃ. Milindapañhe hi sabbattha vissajjanāvasāne ‘‘kallo’’ icceva diṭṭhoti.
“Ninnāmetvāti”意为:以从口中引出(舌)的方式,使其朝向耳孔、鼻孔等方向伸出;为了明确其意图,故说“引出后”。“Kathinasūciṃ viyāti”意为:通过使其变得粗硬而细密,犹如一根坚硬的针。“Tathākaraṇenāti”意为:通过使其像硬针那样的做法。“Etthāti”在此处,即指广长舌。师长们说:通过能使其变得粗硬而细密,显示了舌的柔软性、长性和薄性。因为若非柔软,则不可能使其变得粗硬而细密。在此,其意图如下:正因为只有柔软者才能被变得粗硬而细密,所以通过那样的做法,显示了柔软性,如同以烟知火。又因为只有柔软者,在变得粗硬而细密后,才能伸得很长,所以通过触及耳孔,显示了长性。又因为只有柔软者,在变得粗硬而细密后,才能变得很薄,所以通过触及鼻孔,显示了薄性。再者,若非宽大,则不可能如此覆盖,所以通过覆盖额头,显示了舌的宽大性。显示巴利原文
Ninnāmetvāti mukhato nīharaṇavasena kaṇṇasotādiabhimukhaṃ paṇāmetvā, adhippāyameva dassetuṃ ‘‘nīharitvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kathinasūciṃ viyāti ghanasukhumabhāvāpādanena kakkhaḷasūcimiva katvā. Tathākaraṇenāti kathinasūciṃ viya karaṇena. Etthāti pahūtajivhāya. Mudubhāvo, dīghabhāvo, tanubhāvo ca dassito amuduno ghanasukhumabhāvāpādanatthamasakkuṇeyyattāti ācariyena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.288) vuttaṃ. Tatrāyamadhippāyo – yasmā mudumeva ghanasukhumabhāvāpādanatthaṃ sakkoti, tasmā tathākaraṇena mudubhāvo dassito aggi viya dhūmena. Yasmā ca muduyeva ghanasukhumabhāvāpajjanena dīghagāmi, tasmā kaṇṇasotānumasanena dīghabhāvo dassito. Yasmā pana mudu eva ghanasukhumabhāvāpajjanena tanu hoti, tasmā nāsikāsotānumasanena tanubhāvo dassitoti. Aputhulassa tathāpaṭicchādanatthamasakkuṇeyyattā nalāṭacchādanena puthulabhāvo dassito.
289 应理解为“满怀期望而注视”。显示巴利原文
289. Patthento hutvā udikkhantoti yojetabbaṃ.
290 “Mūlavacanaṃ kathā”指根本的言语,意为“谈论”;“Paṭivacanaṃ sallāpo”指回应的言语,意为“对话”。显示巴利原文
290. Mūlavacanaṃ kathā. Paṭivacanaṃ sallāpo.
291 如同在“Uddhumātakaṃ”等词中,“ka”音节是表厌恶义的,故说“正是厌恶那个”。“Tameva”即指那种智者状态,或亦指阿摩昼本人。因此话是针对阿摩昼而说的。正如经中所言:“……对阿摩昼青年这样说。”虽然这是针对阿摩昼而说,但应知世尊在呵责时,并不局限于名与族姓,而以复数形式来表述。通过“Yādiso”等词,显示了“Yadeva kho tvaṃ”这一不确定表述与“evarūpena”这一确定表述之间的关联。以“状态”来表示“状态的特征”,是处格表具格的意义,故说“在这样的侍奉者当中”。“Na aññatrāti”意为不在别处,即不在善趣。于此,应知通过“以侍奉者”这一表述,间接阐明了“不作侍奉”的行为。“Upaneyya upaneyyāti”是一个表示反复的动词形式,所以说“婆罗门确实……”等,意即一次又一次地引导,即反复举出这种种过失。因此说:“彻底地使其沦为奴隶等状态后”。“Pātesīti”意为使其坠落。显示巴利原文
291. ‘‘Uddhumātaka’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.242; visuddhi. 1.102) viya ka-saddo jigucchanatthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘tameva jigucchanto’’ti. Tamevāti paṇḍitabhāvameva, ambaṭṭhamevātipi attho. Ambaṭṭhañhi sandhāya evamāha. Tathā hi pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ…pe… ambaṭṭhaṃ māṇavaṃ etadavocā’’ti. Kāmañca ambaṭṭhaṃ sandhāya evaṃ vuttaṃ, nāmagottavasena pana aniyamaṃ katvā garahanto puthuvacanena vadatīti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Yadeva kho tva’’nti etassa aniyamavacanassa ‘‘evarūpenā’’ti idaṃ niyamavacananti dasseti ‘‘yādiso’’tiādinā. Bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇe bhummavacanatthe karaṇavacananti vuttaṃ ‘‘edise atthacarake’’ti. Na aññatrāti na aññattha sugatiyaṃ. Ettha pana ‘‘atthacarakenā’’ti iminā byatirekamukhena anatthacarakataṃyeva vibhāvetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Upaneyya upaneyyā’’ti idaṃ tvādyantaṃ vicchāvacananti āha ‘‘brāhmaṇo kho panā’’tiādi. Evaṃ upanetvā upanetvāti taṃ taṃ dosaṃ upanīya upanīya. Tenāha ‘‘suṭṭhu dāsādibhāvaṃ āropetvā’’ti. Pātesīti pavaṭṭanavasena pātesi. Yañca agamāsi, tampi assa tathāgamanasaṅkhātaṃ ṭhānaṃ acchinditvāti yojanā.
婆罗门种姓者波伽罗娑帝往见佛陀的注释。显示巴利原文
Pokkharasātibuddhūpasaṅkamanavaṇṇanā
292-3-6 问:“有多少时间?”因此说:“连说友善之语的时间都没有”。“Āgamā nūti”意为:他来了吗?“Kho”仅仅是不变词。“Idhāti”在此处,即“在您这里”的意思。“Adhivāsetūti”意为:请接受;然而,此处的接受仅指内心的领受,而非通过身、语,所以说“请应允”。“Ajja pavattamānaṃ ajjatanaṃ, puññaṃ, pītipāmojjañca”,为了显示此义,所以说“Yaṃ me”等。“Kāranti”意为:恩惠,或尊敬。“Acopetvāti”意为:不使其动摇。显示巴利原文
292-3-6. Kittako pana soti vuttaṃ ‘‘sammodanīyakathāyapi kālo natthī’’ti. Āgamā nūti āgato nu. Khoti nipātamattaṃ. Idhāti ettha, tumhākaṃ santikanti attho. Adhivāsetūti sādiyatu, taṃ pana sādiyanaṃ idha manasāva sampaṭiggaho, na kāyavācāhīti āha ‘‘sampaṭicchatū’’ti. Ajja pavattamānaṃ ajjatanaṃ, puññaṃ, pītipāmojjañca, imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ me’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kāranti upakāraṃ, sakkāraṃ vā. Acopetvāti acāletvā.
297 “Sahatthā”(亲手)一词是表工具格的从格。因此说“sahatthena”(以亲手)。Suhita 意为已满足,或因无饥渴之苦而安乐。Yāvadattha 意为尽其所需,即当时以食物所作的满足。此处意指拒绝的遮止,而非邀请的遮止,故说“ala”(够了)等。“Hatthasaññāya”(以手示意)仅是举例,因在其他地方也提到以面部表情和言语拒绝,且在一刹那中也可如此拒绝。Onītapattapāṇi 意为“手已从钵移开者”,是一个异依主释复合词,由三个词构成的外在复合词。通过颚音和连缀音,oṇitta 一词表示分离,故说“也有 oṇittapattapāṇi 的读法”等。或者,oṇitta 一词用于清净义。Oṇittapattapāṇi 即指通过去除食物残渣而清净的钵和手。因此说“洗手和钵后”。《精义灯》中说:“Oṇitta 意为分离、分开,或通过去除食物残渣而清净的钵和手,即 oṇittapattapāṇi。”其中后一种说法与“洗手和钵后”不一致,应加审察。Evaṃbhūta 意为“显示巴利原文
297.‘‘Sahatthā’’ti idaṃ karaṇatthe nissakkavacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sahatthenā’’ti. Suhitanti dhātaṃ, jighacchādukkhābhāvena vā sukhitaṃ. Yāvadatthanti yāva attho, tāva bhojanena tadā kataṃ. Paṭikkhepapavāraṇāvettha adhippetā, na nimantanapavāraṇāti āha ‘‘ala’’ntiādi. ‘‘Hatthasaññāyā’’ti nidassanamattaṃ aññattha mukhavikārena, vacībhedena ca paṭikkhepassa vuttattā , ekakkhaṇepi ca tathāpaṭikkhepassa labbhanato. Onītā pattato pāṇi etassāti onītapattapāṇīti bhinnādhikaraṇavisayo tipado bāhiratthasamāso. Muddhajaṇa-kārena, pana saññogata-kārena ca oṇittasaddo vinābhūteti dasseti ‘‘oṇittapattapāṇintipi pāṭho’’tiādinā. Sucikaraṇatthe vā oṇittasaddo. Oṇittaṃ āmisāpanayanena sucikataṃ pattaṃ pāṇi ca assāti hi oṇittapattapāṇi. Tenāha ‘‘hatthe ca pattañca dhovitvā’’ti. ‘‘Oṇittaṃ nānābhūtaṃ vinābhūtaṃ, āmisāpanayanena vā sucikataṃ pattaṃ pāṇito assāti oṇittapattapāṇī’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.23) sāratthadīpaniyaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha pacchimavacanaṃ ‘‘hatthe ca pattañca dhovitvā’’ti iminā asaṃsandanato vicāretabbaṃ. Evaṃbhūtanti ‘‘bhuttāviṃ onītapattapāṇi’’nti vuttappakārena bhūtaṃ.
298 “Anupubbiṃ katha”(次第说)意为应次第讲述的教说。因此说“anupaṭipāṭikatha”(按顺序的教说)。那是什么呢?即说“施论之后是戒论”等。由此阐明了此义:施论因在众人中也普遍通行、为一切所共、容易做到、且是安立于戒的方便,故应首先讲述。因为具足舍离之性的人,由于从执取之物中出离,能轻易地受持诸戒,并于此善为安立;在施论之后应讲戒论,因为戒能令施者与受者清净、饶益他人而遮止损恼他人、说作持法而遮止止持法、讲述财富成就之因后又说生存成就之因。如果此施戒系缚于轮回,为了显示这生存成就即是其果报,故在戒论之后讲天论。由此显示:“以此布施与戒律所成,以及以殊胜、更殊胜等差别而区分的诸福行事,可获得在四大王天等处以殊胜、更殊胜等差别而区分的无量天界成就。”此天界为贪等所染污,为了显示完全不为他们所染污的是圣道,故在天论之后讲道论。在讲道时,为了显示证得彼道的方便,应讲诸欲的过患、卑劣、杂染,以及出离的功德。因为即使包含在天界中的一切欲,也多有过患、无常、不坚固、是变易法,更何况显示巴利原文
298.Anupubbiṃ kathanti anupubbaṃ kathetabbaṃ kathaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘anupaṭipāṭikatha’’nti. Kā pana sāti āha ‘‘dānānantaraṃ sīla’’ntiādi, tenāyamattho bodhito hoti – dānakathā tāva pacurajanesupi pavattiyā sabbasādhāraṇattā, sukarattā, sīle patiṭṭhānassa upāyabhāvato ca ādito kathetabbā. Pariccāgasīlo hi puggalo pariggahavatthūsu vinissaṭabhāvato sukheneva sīlāni samādiyati, tattha ca suppatiṭṭhito hoti, sīlena dāyakapaṭiggāhakasuddhito parānuggahaṃ vatvā parapīḷānivattivacanato, kiriyadhammaṃ vatvā akiriyadhammavacanato, bhogasampattihetuṃ vatvā bhavasampattihetuvacanato ca dānakathānantaraṃ sīlakathā kathetabbā. Tañce dānasīlaṃ vaṭṭanissitaṃ, ayaṃ bhavasampatti tassa phalanti dassanatthaṃ sīlakathānantaraṃ saggakathā. Tāya hi evaṃ dassitaṃ hoti ‘‘imehi dānasīlamayehi, paṇītapaṇītatarādibhedabhinnehi ca puññakiriyavatthūhi etā cātumahārājikādīsu paṇītapaṇītatarādibhedabhinnā aparimeyyā dibbasampattiyo laddhabbā’’ti. Svāyaṃ saggo rāgādīhi upakkiliṭṭho, sabbathā pana tehi anupakkiliṭṭho ariyamaggoti dassanatthaṃ saggakathānantaraṃ maggakathā. Maggañca kathentena tadadhigamupāyadassanatthaṃ kāmānaṃ ādīnavo, okāro, saṃkileso, nekkhamme ānisaṃso ca kathetabbo. Saggapariyāpannāpi hi sabbe kāmā nāma bahvādīnavā aniccā addhuvā vipariṇāmadhammā, pageva itareti ādīnavo, sabbepi kāmā hīnā gammā pothujjanikā anariyā anatthasaṃhitāti lāmakabhāvo okāro, sabbepi bhavā kilesānaṃ vatthubhūtāti saṃkileso, sabbasaṃkilesavippayuttaṃ nibbānanti nekkhamme ānisaṃso ca kathetabboti. Ayampi attho bodhitoti veditabbo. Maggoti hi ettha iti-saddena ādyatthena kāmādīnavādīnampi saṅgahoti ayamatthavaṇṇanā katā. Tenāha ‘‘seyyathidaṃ – dānakathaṃ sīlakathaṃ saggakathaṃ kāmānaṃ ādīnavaṃ okāraṃ saṃkilesaṃ nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ pakāsetī’’ti. Vitthāro sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. 3.26) gahetabbo.
“Kasi”一词意指以智摄取,故说“已摄取”等。通过“sāmaṃ”(自己)一词,显示应予遮止的含义,即“不与其他共通”;由于在证得出世间法时无需他人教导,且是世间唯一最先证得无上正自觉者,故说不与其他共通。“Dhammacakkhu”(法眼)在此处专指入流道,既非如《梵寿经》中那样指下三道,亦非如《小罗睺罗教诫经》中那样指漏尽。为何说“为了显示其生起之相”呢?难道道智不是仅以无为法为所缘,而非以有为法为所缘吗?为消除此问难,故说“因为彼”等语。就其作用而言,即是无痴通达的作用。显示巴利原文
Kasi-saddo ñāṇena gahaṇeti āha ‘‘gahitā’’tiādi. Sāmaṃsaddena nivattetabbamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘asādhāraṇā aññesa’’nti iminā, lokuttaradhammādhigame parūpadesavigatattā, ekeneva loke paṭhamaṃ anuttarāya sammāsambodhiyā abhisambuddhattā ca aññesamasādhāraṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammacakkhunti ettha sotāpattimaggova adhippeto, na brahmāyusutte (ma. ni. 2.383 ādayo) viya heṭṭhimā tayo maggā, na ca cūḷarāhulovādasutte (ma. ni. 3.416) viya āsavakkhayo. ‘‘Tassa uppattiākāradassanattha’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu maggañāṇaṃ asaṅkhatadhammārammaṇameva, na saṅkhatadhammārammaṇanti codanaṃ sodhento ‘‘tañhī’’tiādimāha. Kiccavasenāti asammohapaṭivedhakiccavasena.
莲花色优婆夷证悟告知的解说显示巴利原文
Pokkharasātiupāsakattapaṭivedanākathāvaṇṇanā
299 在圣典中,“diṭṭhadhammo”(已见法者)等处,“见”除了智见之外,尚有眼见等其他见,为遮止他们理解,故说“pattadhammo”(已证法者)。而“证”除智证之外,亦有身行等其它证得,为显示其差别,故说“viditadhammo”(已知法者)。然而,此已知法性亦有可能仅是部分的,为显示无余的已知法性,故说“pariyogāḷhadhammo”(已深入法者),以此表明其已圆满通达四谛。因为道智以一次现观即成就遍知等四种作用,无余地全面深入四谛法。因此说:“以此见圣谛法,故为已见法者。”不应说:“如何仅以一智于一刹那便能成就四种作用而转起?世间未见如此之事,亦无这般教说。”应知譬如一灯于一刹那烧灯芯、耗尽油、破除黑暗、显示光明,此智亦复如是。此处应引圣典文句以为证:“与道俱起之智,此为苦智,此为苦集智,此为苦灭智,此为苦灭道智。”显示巴利原文
299. Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhadhammo’’tiādīsu dassanaṃ nāma ñāṇato aññampi cakkhādidassanaṃ atthīti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘pattadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Patti ca ñāṇapattito aññāpi kāyagamanādipatti vijjatīti tato visesadassanatthaṃ ‘‘viditadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā panesā viditadhammatā ekadesatopi hotīti nippadesato viditadhammataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pariyogāḷhadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ, tenassa saccābhisambodhameva dīpeti. Maggañāṇañhi ekābhisamayavasena pariññādicatukiccaṃ sādhentaṃ nippadesena catusaccadhammaṃ samantato ogāḷhaṃ nāma hoti. Tenāha ‘‘diṭṭho ariyasaccadhammo etenāti diṭṭhadhammo’’ti. ‘‘Kathaṃ pana ekameva ñāṇaṃ ekasmiṃ khaṇe cattāri kiccāni sādhentaṃ pavattati. Na hi tādisaṃ loke diṭṭhaṃ, na āgamo vā tādiso atthī’’ti na vattabbaṃ. Yathā hi padīpo ekasmiṃyeva khaṇe vaṭṭiṃ dahati, snehaṃ pariyādiyati, andhakāraṃ vidhamati, ālokañcāpi dasseti, evametaṃ ñāṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Maggasamaṅgissa ñāṇaṃ dukkhepetaṃ ñāṇaṃ, dukkhasamudayepetaṃ ñāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhepetaṃ ñāṇaṃ, dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāyapetaṃ ñāṇa’’nti (vibha. 794) suttapadampettha udāharitabbanti.
“度脱疑惑”指他度脱了如同怖畏荒野般的十六事及八事的疑惑。“消除了犹豫”指他已断除那种于转起等处生起的“是这样呢,还是不是呢”的犹豫。“达到无畏的状态”指由于舍断了导致怯懦的恶法,并善住于其对立面的戒等功德,因而达到、证得了无畏的状态,即明达。为了显示“这无畏的证得、善住,立于何处?在导师的教法中”这一问难中“在导师的教法中”所说的含义,而说“何处?在导师的教法中”。其含义是:由于自己现量亲见、亲证,故他不再存在需要依止的其他老师。由此说出其意趣:“不依止他人”等。“不转起”指不运行、或不实行,或者不依止他人、不信奉他人,因此解作“不依止他人”也是合理的。然而,此处应当说而未说的内容,应知是缘于前文已述、后文将述,故暂略之。显示巴利原文
Tiṇṇā vicikicchāti sappaṭibhayakantārasadisā soḷasavatthukā, aṭṭhavatthukā ca vicikicchā anena vitiṇṇā. Vigatā kathaṃkathāti pavattiādīsu ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, na nu kho’’ti evaṃ pavattikā kathaṃkathā assa vigatā samucchinnā. Visāradabhāvaṃ pattoti sārajjakarānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ pahīnattā, tappaṭipakkhesu ca sīlādiguṇesu suppatiṭṭhitattā visāradabhāvaṃ veyyattiyaṃ patto adhigato. Sāyaṃ vesārajjappatti suppatiṭṭhitatā katthāti codanāya ‘‘satthusāsane’’ti vuttanti dassento ‘‘kattha? Satthusāsane’’ti āha. Attanāva paccakkhato diṭṭhattā, adhigatattā ca na assa paccayo paccetabbo paro atthīti attho. Tatthādhippāyamāha ‘‘na parassā’’tiādinā. Na vattatīti na pavattati, na paṭipajjati vā, na paraṃ pacceti pattiyāyatīti aparappaccayotipi yujjati. Yaṃ panettha vattabbampi avuttaṃ, tadetaṃ pubbe vuttattā, parato vuccamānattā ca avuttanti veditabbaṃ.
如是,《吉祥悦美》——《长部》注释——阐明了极为微细、甚深、难以通达的义理,能生起极清净、广大的智慧与明辨。此《隐蔽义开显》名为《善悦美》,由具足正直、柔和、克制、信、念、定、慧、忍、精进等法,于三藏及其注释无滞无碍、游刃于无畏之智,又善能通达自宗他宗种种盘根错节的大阿阇梨、大语法家智幢法帅长老——为大王法王所尊崇者——所造。此《隐蔽义开显》正是《阿摩昼经》注释的隐蔽义开显。显示巴利原文
Iti sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya paramasukhumagambhīraduranubodhatthaparidīpanāya suvimalavipulapaññāveyyattiyajananāya ajjavamaddavasoraccasaddhāsatidhitibuddhikhantivīriyādidhammasamaṅginā sāṭṭhakathe piṭakattaye asaṅgāsaṃhīravisāradañāṇacārinā anekappabhedasakasamayasamayantaragahanajjhogāhinā mahāgaṇinā mahāveyyākaraṇena ñāṇābhivaṃsadhammasenāpatināmattherena mahādhammarājādhirājagarunā katāya sādhuvilāsiniyā nāma līnatthapakāsaniyā ambaṭṭhasuttavaṇṇanāya līnatthapakāsanā.